AT commands interface guide for X43

pochette MUSE 15/11/01 17:12 Page 1

GIVE WINGS TO

YOUR IDEAS

AT Commands Interface Guide for X43

Revision: 00 8

Date: February 2005

P L U G I N T O T H E W I R E L E S S W O R L D

confidential ©

Page : 1 / 180

This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement.

Ce document est la propriété exclusive de WAVECOM. Il ne peut être communiqué ou divulgué à des tiers sans son autorisation préalable.

Revision:

Date:

Reference:

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

AT Commands

Interface Guide for

AT X43

008

11 February 2005

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

confidential ©

Page: 1 / 478

This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. Ce document est la propriété exclusive de WAVECOM. Il ne peut

être communiqué ou divulgué à des tiers sans son autorisation préalable.

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Overview

The aim of this document is to provide WAVECOM customers with a full description of the AT commands associated with AT software release X43 and upper until further notice. confidential ©

Page: 2 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Trademarks

®, WAVECOM ® , WISMO ® , MUSE Platform ® , and certain other trademarks and logos appearing on this document, are filed or registered trademarks of

Wavecom S.A. in France or in other countries. All other company and/or product names mentioned may be filed or registered trademarks of their respective owners. confidential ©

Page: 3 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Document History

Revision Date

004

005

7 jun 2004

History of the evolution

Additional minor corrections: line setting, operator names update, integration of X41a and X41b specific documents

29 Sep 2004 +CSSD evolution

Minor enhancements for Phonebook commands

(CPBR, CPBW, CPBS, CPBF)

006

007

30 Nov 2004 Updates for X42 revision

Add +WSHS command

Update +ECHO command (with appropriate restrictions)

10 Jan 2005 Last update for X42 revision: ADC behavior description, +ECHO parameters precision

February

2005

Updates for X43 revision:

AT+WTONE parameter update for two frequencies;

BAD SOFTWARE message (MCC lock); ECHO parametrs updated; Algi ID6 updated for default parametrers; Details added for +CREG confidential ©

Page: 4 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Contents

1

INTRODUCTION 15

1.1

Scope of this document.........................................................................15

1.2

Related documents................................................................................15

1.3

Abbreviations and Definitions................................................................16

1.4

Presentation rules .................................................................................18

2 AT COMMANDS FEATURES 19

2.1

Wavecom line settings ..........................................................................19

2.2

Command line .......................................................................................19

2.3

Information responses and result codes ................................................19

3 GENERAL BEHAVIORS 20

3.1

SIM Insertion, SIM Removal ..................................................................20

3.2

Background initialization .......................................................................21

3.3

Length of phone numbers .....................................................................22

3.4

BAD SOFTWARE message ....................................................................22

4 GENERAL COMMANDS 23

4.1

Manufacturer identification +CGMI ......................................................23

4.2

Request model identification +CGMM ..................................................24

4.3

Request revision identification +CGMR ................................................25

4.4

Product Serial Number +CGSN.............................................................25

4.5

Select TE character set +CSCS .............................................................27

4.6

Wavecom Phonebook Character Set +WPCS........................................28

4.7

Request IMSI +CIMI .............................................................................29

4.8

Card Identification +CCID .....................................................................30

4.9

Capabilities list +GCAP.........................................................................30

4.10

Repeat last command A/ ......................................................................32

4.11

Power off +CPOF..................................................................................32

4.12

Set phone functionality +CFUN ............................................................33

confidential ©

Page: 5 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

4.13

Phone activity status +CPAS ................................................................35

4.14

Report Mobile Equipment errors +CMEE ..............................................36

4.15

Keypad control +CKPD .........................................................................37

4.16

Clock Management +CCLK ...................................................................38

4.17

Alarm Management +CALA .................................................................39

4.18

Ring Melody Playback +CRMP .............................................................41

4.19

Ringer Sound Level +CRSL...................................................................43

4.20

Generic Sim Access: +CSIM..................................................................44

4.21

Restricted SIM access +CRSM ..............................................................47

5 CALL CONTROL COMMANDS 50

5.1

Dial command D....................................................................................50

5.2

Hang-Up command H...........................................................................53

5.3

Answer a call A ....................................................................................54

5.4

Remote disconnection ...........................................................................55

5.5

Extended error report +CEER................................................................56

5.6

DTMF signals +VTD, +VTS ..................................................................57

5.7

Redial last telephone number ATDL......................................................58

5.8

Automatic dialing with DTR AT%Dn ......................................................60

5.9

Automatic answer ATS0 ......................................................................61

5.10

Incoming Call Bearer +CICB .................................................................62

5.11

Single Numbering Scheme +CSNS .......................................................64

5.12

Gain control +VGR, +VGT.....................................................................65

5.13

Microphone Mute Control +CMUT .......................................................68

5.14

Speaker & Microphone selection +SPEAKER ........................................69

5.15

Echo Cancellation +ECHO ....................................................................70

5.16

SideTone modification +SIDET .............................................................77

5.17

Initialize Voice Parameters +VIP ...........................................................78

6 NETWORK SERVICE COMMANDS 80

6.1

Signal Quality +CSQ.............................................................................80

6.2

Operator selection +COPS ....................................................................81

6.3

Network registration +CREG ................................................................85

6.4

Read operator name +WOPN ...............................................................86

6.5

Selection of Preferred PLMN list +CPLS................................................88

confidential ©

Page: 6 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

6.6

Preferred operator list +CPOL ...............................................................89

6.7

Read operator name +COPN ................................................................93

7 SECURITY COMMANDS 94

7.1

Enter PIN +CPIN ...................................................................................94

7.2

Enter PIN2 +CPIN2 ...............................................................................96

7.3

PIN remaining attempt number +CPINC ...............................................99

7.4

Facility lock +CLCK .............................................................................100

7.5

Change password +CPWD.................................................................104

8 PHONEBOOK COMMANDS 106

8.1

Select phonebook memory storage +CPBS.........................................106

8.2

Read phonebook entries +CPBR .........................................................108

8.3

Find phonebook entries +CPBF ..........................................................110

8.4

Write phonebook entry +CPBW..........................................................111

8.5

Phonebook phone search +CPBP .......................................................115

8.6

Move action in phonebook +CPBN .....................................................117

8.7

Subscriber number +CNUM ...............................................................120

8.8

Avoid phonebook init +WAIP..............................................................121

8.9

Delete Calls Phonebook +WDCP..........................................................123

8.10

Set Voice Mail Number +CSVM...........................................................124

9 SHORT MESSAGES COMMANDS 125

9.1

Parameters definition ..........................................................................125

9.2

Select message service +CSMS .........................................................126

9.3

New Message Acknowledgement +CNMA.........................................127

9.4

Preferred Message Storage +CPMS ...................................................131

9.5

Preferred Message Format +CMGF ....................................................132

9.6

Save Settings +CSAS .........................................................................135

9.7

Restore settings +CRES......................................................................135

9.8

Show text mode parameters +CSDH..................................................136

9.9

New message indication +CNMI ........................................................137

9.10

Read message +CMGR ......................................................................140

9.11

List message +CMGL .........................................................................142

9.12

Send message +CMGS ......................................................................145

confidential ©

Page: 7 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

9.13

Write Message to Memory +CMGW ..................................................147

9.14

Send Message From Storage +CMSS ................................................148

9.15

Set Text Mode Parameters +CSMP ....................................................150

9.16

Delete message +CMGD ....................................................................152

9.17

Service center address +CSCA ...........................................................153

9.18

Select Cell Broadcast Message Types +CSCB ....................................154

9.19

Cell Broadcast Message Identifiers +WCBM ......................................157

9.20

Message status modification +WMSC ...............................................158

9.21

Message overwriting +WMGO...........................................................159

9.22

Un-change SMS Status +WUSS..........................................................161

9.23

More Messages to Send +CMMS .......................................................162

10 SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES COMMANDS 164

10.1

Call forwarding +CCFC.......................................................................164

10.2

Call barring +CLCK .............................................................................166

10.3

Modify SS password +CPWD.............................................................167

10.4

Call waiting +CCWA...........................................................................169

10.5

Calling line identification restriction +CLIR..........................................171

10.6

Calling line identification presentation +CLIP......................................172

10.7

Connected line identification presentation +COLP ..............................173

10.8

Advice of charge +CAOC ....................................................................174

10.9

Accumulated call meter +CACM ........................................................176

10.10

Accumulated call meter maximum +CAMM.......................................177

10.11

Price per unit and currency table +CPUC............................................178

10.12

Call related supplementary services +CHLD .......................................179

10.13

List current calls +CLCC ......................................................................180

10.14

Supplementary service notifications +CSSN .......................................182

10.15

Unstructured supplementary service data +CUSD..............................183

10.16

Closed user group +CCUG..................................................................185

11 DATA COMMANDS 186

11.1

Using AT Commands during a data connection...................................186

11.2

Bearer type selection +CBST ..............................................................186

11.3

Select mode +FCLASS........................................................................188

11.4

Service reporting control +CR.............................................................190

confidential ©

Page: 8 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

11.5

Cellular result codes +CRC .................................................................191

11.6

DTE-DCE local rate reporting +ILRR......................................................192

11.7

Radio link protocol parameters +CRLP................................................193

11.8

Others radio link parameters +DOPT ..................................................194

11.9

Select data compression %C...............................................................195

11.10

V42 bis data compression +DS ..........................................................196

11.11

V42 bis data compression report +DR ................................................197

11.12

Select data error correcting mode \N ..................................................198

12 FAX COMMANDS 199

12.1

Transmit speed +FTM ........................................................................199

12.2

Receive speed +FRM..........................................................................200

12.3

HDLC transmit speed +FTH................................................................200

12.4

HDLC receive speed +FRH..................................................................201

12.5

Stop transmission and wait +FTS ......................................................201

12.6

Receive silence +FRS..........................................................................202

12.7

Setting up the PC fax application: .......................................................203

13 FAX CLASS 2 COMMANDS 204

13.1

Transmit Data +FDT...........................................................................204

13.2

Receive Data +FDR.............................................................................204

13.3

Transmit page ponctuation +FET .......................................................205

13.4

Page transfer status parameters +FPTS .............................................205

13.5

Terminate Session +FK ......................................................................206

13.6

Page transfer bit order +FBOR............................................................206

13.7

Buffer size report +FBUF ....................................................................207

13.8

Copy quality checking +FCQ ..............................................................207

13.9

Capability to receive +FCR..................................................................208

13.10

Current sessions parameters +FDIS ...................................................209

13.11

DCE capabilities parameters +FDCC ...................................................212

13.12

Local ID string +FLID..........................................................................213

13.13

Page transfer timeout parameter +FPHCTO........................................213

13.14

Fax Class 2 indication messages .........................................................214

14 V24-V25 COMMANDS 216

confidential ©

Page: 9 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

14.1

Fixed DTE rate +IPR ...........................................................................216

14.2

DTE-DCE character framing +ICF .......................................................218

14.3

DTE-DCE local flow control +IFC .......................................................219

14.4

Set DCD signal &C .............................................................................220

14.5

Set DTR signal &D .............................................................................221

14.6

Set DSR signal &S..............................................................................222

14.7

Back to online mode O .......................................................................222

14.8

Result code suppression Q .................................................................223

14.9

DCE response format V .....................................................................224

14.10

Default configuration Z.......................................................................224

14.11

Save configuration &W ......................................................................225

14.12

Auto-tests &T.....................................................................................225

14.13

Echo E ........................................................................................226

14.14

Restore factory settings &F ................................................................227

14.15

Display configuration &V....................................................................227

14.16

Request identification information I ....................................................229

14.17

Data / Commands Multiplexing +WMUX............................................230

15 SPECIFIC AT COMMANDS 231

15.1

Cell environment description +CCED ..................................................231

15.2

General Indications +WIND ................................................................234

15.3

Analog digital converters measurements +ADC .................................240

15.4

Mobile Equipment event reporting +CMER.........................................242

15.5

Indicator control +CIND.......................................................................244

15.6

Mobile equipment control mode +CMEC .............................................245

15.7

Read Language Preference +WLPR ....................................................247

15.8

Write Language Preference +WLPW...................................................249

15.9

Read GPIO value +WIOR ....................................................................249

15.10

Write GPIO value +WIOW ..................................................................250

15.11

Input/Output Management +WIOM....................................................251

15.12

Abort command +WAC ......................................................................253

15.13

Play tone +WTONE ............................................................................254

15.14

Play DTMF tone +WDTMF .................................................................257

15.15

Wavecom Downloading +WDWL .......................................................258

15.16

Wavecom Voice Rate +WVR...............................................................259

confidential ©

Page: 10 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15.17

Wavecom Data Rate +WDR.................................................................261

15.18

Hardware Version +WHWV ................................................................263

15.19

Date of Production +WDOP................................................................264

15.20

Wavecom Select Voice Gain +WSVG ...................................................264

15.21

Wavecom Status Request +WSTR ......................................................266

15.22

Wavecom Scan +WSCAN ...................................................................267

15.23

Wavecom Ring Indicator Mode +WRIM ..............................................267

15.24

Wavecom 32kHz Power down Mode +W32K......................................269

15.25

Wavecom Change Default Melody +WCDM ........................................270

15.26

Wavecom Software version +WSSW .................................................271

15.27

Wavecom Custom Character Set +WCCS............................................272

15.28

Wavecom LoCK +WLCK .....................................................................274

15.29

CPHS command: +CPHS.....................................................................275

15.30

Unsolicited result: Wavecom Voice Mail Indicator: +WVMI .................279

15.31

Unsolicited result: Wavecom diverted call indicator: +WDCI................281

15.32

Wavecom network operator name: +WNON .......................................282

15.33

Wavecom CPHS information: +WCPI ..................................................283

15.34

Wavecom customer service profile: +WCSP ........................................284

15.35

Wavecom Battery Charge Management +WBCM...............................286

15.36

Unsolicited result: Wavecom Battery Charge Indication +WBCI...........289

15.37

Features Management +WFM............................................................291

15.38

Commercial Features Management +WCFM ......................................296

15.39

Wavecom Customer storage mirror +WMIR .......................................297

15.40

Wavecom Change Default Player +WCDP ..........................................298

15.41

Wavecom CPHS Mail Box Number: +WMBN ......................................299

15.42

Wavecom Alternate Line Service: +WALS ...........................................300

15.43

Wavecom Open AT control command +WOPEN ................................302

15.44

Wavecom Reset +WRST ...................................................................304

15.45

Set Standard Tone +WSST.................................................................305

15.46

Wavecom Location +WLOC................................................................306

15.47

Wavecom Bus Read +WBR ................................................................310

15.48

Wavecom Bus Write +WBW ..............................................................312

15.49

Wavecom Bus Management +WBM ..................................................313

15.50

Wavecom Hang-up +WATH ...............................................................319

15.51

Write IMEI +WIMEI ............................................................................320

confidential ©

Page: 11 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15.52

Write IMEI SVN: +WSVN.....................................................................322

15.53

Wavecom multi-band selection command: +WMBS ...........................323

15.54

Module Serial Number +WMSN ..........................................................325

15.55

Cellular Text telephone Modem +WCTM.............................................325

15.56

Modem Behaviour Configuration +WBHV ...........................................327

15.57

Hardware Configuration AT+WHCNF ..................................................329

15.58

SIM Holder Status AT+WSHS .............................................................330

16 SIM TOOLKIT 332

16.1

Overview of SIM Application ToolKit ...................................................332

16.2

Messages exchanged during a SIM ToolKit operation. ........................334

16.3

SIM TOOLKIT COMMANDS.................................................................335

17 GPRS COMMANDS 353

17.1

Define PDP Context +CGDCONT .........................................................353

17.2

Quality of Service Profile (Requested) +CGQREQ .................................355

17.3

Quality of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable) +CGQMIN.................360

17.4

GPRS attach or detach +CGATT ..........................................................362

17.5

PDP context activate or deactivate +CGACT........................................363

17.6

Enter data state +CGDATA..................................................................365

17.7

GPRS mobile station class +CGCLASS ................................................366

17.8

Select service for MO SMS messages +CGSMS ..................................368

17.9

GPRS event reporting +CGEREP ..........................................................370

17.10

GPRS network registration status +CGREG .........................................373

17.11

Request GPRS IP service ‘D’................................................................374

17.12

Network requested PDP context activation..........................................375

17.13

Automatic response to a network request for PDP context activation

+CGAUTO 376

17.14

Manual response to a network request for PDP context activation

+CGANS 378

17.15

Show PDP address +CGPADDR ..........................................................380

17.16

Cellular result codes +CRC ..................................................................382

17.17

Service reporting control +CR.............................................................383

17.18

Extended error report +CEER..............................................................384

17.19

GPRS parameters customization: +WGPRS.........................................384

confidential ©

Page: 12 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

17.20

Full AT GPRS commands examples.....................................................389

18 OTHER AT COMMANDS 391

18.1

V.25 ter recommendation ....................................................................391

18.2

GSM 07.05 recommendation ..............................................................391

18.3

GSM 07.07 recommendation ..............................................................391

19 APPENDIXES 392

19.1

ME error result code: +CME ERROR: <error> ......................................392

19.2

Message service failure result code: +CMS ERROR: <er> ...................394

19.3

Specific error result codes ...................................................................395

19.4

Failure Cause from GSM 04.08 recommendation (+CEER)...................396

19.5

Specific Failure Cause for +CEER.........................................................397

19.6

GSM 04.11 Annex E-2: Mobile originating SM-transfer.......................398

19.7

Unsolicited result codes ......................................................................400

19.8

Final result codes ................................................................................401

19.9

Intermediate result codes ....................................................................402

19.10

Parameters storage .............................................................................402

19.11

GSM sequences list.............................................................................407

19.12

Operator names...................................................................................411

19.13

Data / Commands multiplexing protocol..............................................429

19.14

CPHS Information field ........................................................................432

19.15

CSP constants.....................................................................................433

20 APPENDIX A (INFORMATIVE) 437

20.1

Examples with the PIN required ..........................................................437

20.2

Examples where a voice call is originated............................................438

20.3

Example with incoming calls ...............................................................439

20.4

Example of a call forwarding ...............................................................439

20.5

Example of a multiparty call ................................................................440

20.6

Examples about phonebooks...............................................................441

20.7

Examples about short messages .........................................................444

20.8

Examples about Fax class 2 ................................................................444

20.9

+CSIM and +CRSM Examples.............................................................447

confidential ©

Page: 13 / 478



21

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

APPENDIX B: SUPPORT OF SIM TOOLKIT BY THE M.E.

11 February 2005

449

22 APPENDIX C: STRUCTURE OF TERMINAL PROFILE

23 APPENDIX D: COMMAND TYPE AND NEXT ACTION INDICATOR.

451

457

24 APPENDIX E: CODING OF ALPHA FIELDS IN THE SIM FOR UCS2

25 APPENDIX F: SPECIFICATION OF POWER DOWN CONTROL VIA RS232

460

458

26 APPENDIX G: CONDITIONS FOR COMMAND EXECUTION AND

DEPENDENCE TO SIM 462

26.1

General commands .............................................................................462

26.2

Call Control commands .......................................................................463

26.3

Network service commands ................................................................463

26.4

Security commands.............................................................................464

26.5

Phonebook commands ........................................................................464

26.6

Short Messages commands ................................................................464

26.7

Supplementary Services commands....................................................465

26.8

Data commands ..................................................................................466

26.9

Fax commands....................................................................................466

26.10

Class 2 Commands .............................................................................466

26.11

V24-V25 commands............................................................................467

26.12

Specific AT commands........................................................................468

26.13

SIM Toolkit commands........................................................................469

26.14

GPRS commands ................................................................................469

27 APPENDIX H: INTEROPERABILITY COMMANDS ALWAYS REPLY OK 471

28 ALPHABETICAL INDEX FOR AT COMMANDS AND RESPONSES 472

confidential ©

Page: 14 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

1 Introduction

1.1 Scope of this document

This document describes the AT-command based messages exchanged between an application and the WAVECOM products in order to manage GSM related events or services.

Wavecom Module

External

Application

Send AT command

Serial Link

AT

1.2 Related documents

This interface specification is based on the following recommendations:

[1] ETSI GSM 07.05: Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2);

Use of DTE-DCE interface for Short Message Service (SMS) and Cell Broadcast

Service (CBS)


AT command set for GSM Mobile Equipment (ME)

[3] ITU-T Recommendation V.25 ter: Serial asynchronous automatic dialing and control


Technical implementation of the Short Message Service (SMS) Point-to-Point

(PP) confidential ©

Page: 15 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005


Alphabets and language-specific information

[6] ETSI GSM 04.80: Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2):

Mobile radio interface layer 3, Supplementary service specification, Formats and coding

[6] 3GPP 05.02: 3 rd Generation Partnership Project ; Technical Specification

Group GSM/EDGE- Radio Access Network ; Multiplexing and multiple access on the radio path – 3GPP TS 05.02 V6.9.2 (2001-04)

1.3 Abbreviations and Definitions

1.3.1 Abbreviations

ADN Abbreviated Dialing Number (Phonebook)

AMR-FR

AMR-HR

AMR Full Rate (full rate speech version 3)

AMR Half Rate (half rate speech version 3)

ASCII

AT

Standard characters table (1 byte coding)

Modem Hayes commands prefix (for “ATtention”)

BER

CLI

CSD

CTS

CUG

DTMF

DTR

EEPROM

EFR

E-ONS

FDN

FR

GPRS

GSM

Bit Error Rate

Client Line Identification

(GSM data call)

Clear To Send signal

Closed User Group

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency

Data Terminal Ready

Electrically Erasable Programming Only Memory

Ehanced Full Rate (full rate speech version 2)

Enhanced Operator Name Service

Fixed Dialing Number (Phonebook)

Full Rate (full rate speech version 1)

General Packet Radio Service

Global System for Mobile communication confidential ©

Page: 16 / 478



HR

IMSI

MCC

MNC

MOC

MTC

NITZ

OPL

PIN

PLMN

PNN

PSTN

PUK

RSSI

RTS

SIM

SMS

SPN

UCS2

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Half Rate (half rate speech version 1)

International Mobile Subscriber Identity

Mobile Country Code

Mobile Network Code

Mobile Originated Call (outgoing call)

Mobile Terminated Call (incoming call)

Network Information and Time Zone

Operator PLMN List

Personal Identification Number

Public Land Mobile Networks

PLMN Network Name

Public Switched Telephone Network

PIN Unlock Key

Received Signal Strength Indication

Ready To Send signal

Subscriber Information Module

Short Message Service

Service Provider Name

Characters table (2 bytes coding) confidential ©

Page: 17 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

1.3.2 Definitions

The words, “Mobile Station” (MS) or “Mobile Equipment” (ME) are used for mobile terminals supporting GSM services.

A call from a GSM mobile station to the PSTN is called a “mobile originated call” (MOC) or “outgoing call”, and a call from a fixed network to a GSM mobile station is called a “mobile terminated call” (MTC) or “incoming call”.

In this document, the word “product” refers to any Wavecom product supporting the AT commands interface.

1.4 Presentation rules

In the following, the AT commands are presented with as much precision as possible, through three paragraphs. A “Description” paragraph provides general information on the AT command (or response) behaviour. A

“Syntax”paragraph describes the way to use it, the possible answers, through a readable format. A “Defined values” paragraph provides parameters values, as well for the AT command as for the corresponding responses.

Schemas are provided where necessary. confidential ©

Page: 18 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

2 AT commands features

2.1 Wavecom line settings

A serial link handler is set with the following default values (factory settings): o speed according to customer choice at order time, o 8 bits data, o 1 stop bit, o no parity, o RTS/CTS flow control.

Please use the +IPR, +IFC and +ICF commands to change these settings.

2.2 Command line

Commands always start with AT (which means ATtention) and finish with a

<CR> character.

2.3 Information responses and result codes

Responses start and end with <CR><LF> (except for the ATV0 DCE response format) and the ATQ1 (result code suppression) commands.

•

If command syntax is incorrect, the “ERROR” string is returned,.

•

•

If command syntax is correct but transmitted with wrong parameters, the +CME ERROR: <Err> or +CMS ERROR: <SmsErr> strings is returned with adequate error codes if CMEE was previously set to 1. By default,

CMEE is set to 0, and the error message is only “ERROR”.

If the command line has been executed successfully, an “OK” string is returned.

In some cases, such as “AT+CPIN?” or (unsolicited) incoming events, the product does not return the “OK” string as a response.

In the following examples <CR> and <CR><LF> are intentionally omitted. confidential ©

Page: 19 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

3 General behaviors

3.1 SIM Insertion, SIM Removal

SIM card Insertion and Removal procedures are supported. There are software functions relying on positive reading of the hardware SIM detect pin. This pin state (open/closed) is permanently monitored.

When the SIM detect pin indicates that a card is present in the SIM connector, the product tries to set up a logical SIM session. The logical SIM session will be set up or not depending on whether the detected card is a SIM Card or not.

The AT+CPIN? command delivers the following responses:

•

•

•

•

If the SIM detect pin indicates “absent”, the response to AT+CPIN? is

“+CME ERROR 10” (SIM not inserted).

If the SIM detect pin indicates “present”, and the inserted card is a SIM card, the response to AT+CPIN? is “+CPIN: xxx” depending on SIM PIN state.

If the SIM detect pin indicates “present”, and the inserted card is not a

SIM card, the response to AT+CPIN? is “+CME ERROR 10”.

These last two states are not provided immediately due to background initialization. Between the hardware SIM detect pin indicating “present” and the final results, the AT+CPIN? sends “+CME ERROR: 515” (Please wait, init in progress).

When the SIM detect pin indicates card absence, and if a SIM Card was previously inserted, an IMSI detach procedure is performed, all user data is removed from the product (Phonebooks, SMS etc.). The product then switches to emergency mode. confidential ©

Page: 20 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

3.2 Background initialization

After entering the PIN (Personal Identification Number), some SIM user data files are loaded into the product (phonebooks, SMS status, etc.). Please be aware that it might take some time to read a large phonebook.

The AT+CPIN? command response occurs after the PIN checking. After this response user data is loaded in background. This means that some data may not be available just when PIN entry is confirmed by ’OK’. The reading of phonebooks will then be refused by “+CME ERROR: 515” or “+CMS ERROR:

515” meaning, “Please wait, service is not available yet, init in progress”.

This type of answer may be sent by the product at several points:

• when trying to execute another AT command before the previous one is completed (before response),

•

• when switching from ADN to FDN (or FDN to ADN) and trying to read the relevant phonebook immediately, when asking for +CPIN? status immediately after SIM insertion and before the product has determined if the inserted card is a valid SIM card. confidential ©

Page: 21 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

3.3 Length of phone numbers

Phone numbers can be made of up to 60 digits. The 20 first digits are stored in

SIM, in the phonebook file (EF

LND

) corresponding to the selected phonebook. The next digits are stored in other extension SIM files (EF

EXT1

EF

EXT2

).

ADN

, EF

FDN

or EF

or

As an example:

Number of digits

1 to 20

21 to 40

41 to 60

Nb of records in EF

1

1

1

ADN

Nb of records in EF

0

1

2

EXT1

If there is no more free records in the EF(EXT1), the behavior is:

-> if user tries to store an entry which number exceeds 20 digits: +CME: 20

-> if user tries to dial a number which number exceeds 20 digits: +CME: 20

As the maximum length for the numbers (in ADN, FDN, LND) phonebooks is 60 digits:

-> if user tries to dial a number which number exceeds 60 digits: +CME: 3

Before to perform a call, the number of free records in the EF

EXT1 be able to store the dialed number.

is checked, to

-> If there are free records left, the call is setup.

-> otherwise, +CME: 20 error in returned (Memory full).

Please refer to Recommendation 3GPP 11.11 for more details.

3.4 BAD SOFTWARE message

Wavecom module is designed to be downloaded with a specific software.

When the user has to take in charge the software download, it is necessary to be sure that the compatible software is downloaded. If the software downloaded is either corrupted or non-compatible, the message BAD

SOFTWARE is displayed. To remedy, reinstall the initial specific software version.

Remark: If the module is still displaying BAD SOFTWARE, only Wavecom or a distributor can recover it. confidential ©

Page: 22 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

4 General commands

4.1 Manufacturer identification +CGMI

4.1.1 DescriptionDescription

This command gives the manufacturer identification.

4.1.2 Syntax:

Command syntax: AT+CGMI

Command

AT+CGMI

Note: Get manufacturer identification

Possible responses

WAVECOM MODEM

OK

Note: Command valid, Wavecom modem

4.1.3 Defined values

No parameter confidential ©

Page: 23 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

4.2 Request model identification +CGMM

4.2.1 Description

This command is used to get the supported frequency bands. With multi-band products the response may be a combination of different bands.

4.2.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CGMM

Command

AT+CGMM

Note: Get hardware version

AT+CGMM


AT+CGMM


AT+CGMM


AT+CGMM


AT+CGMM


Possible responses

MULTIBAND 900E 1800

OK

Note: Multiband: GSM 900 MHz extended band and DCS 1800 (default configuration).

900E

OK

Note: 900 Extended

1800

OK

Note: DCS

1900

OK

Note: PCS

G850

OK

Note: GSM 850

MULTIBAND G850 1900

OK

Note: Multiband: GSM 850 and PCS



Page: 24 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

4.3 Request revision identification +CGMR

4.3.1 Description

This command is used to get the revised software version.

4.3.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CGMR

Command

AT+CGMR

Note: Get software version

Possible responses

440_09gm.Q2406A 1266500 020503

17:06

OK

Note: Software release 4.40, generated on the 05 th of February 2003


No parameter

4.4 Product Serial Number +CGSN

4.4.1 Description

This command allows the user application to get the IMEI (International Mobile

Equipment Identity, 15 digits number) of the product.

4.4.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CGSN

Command

AT+CGSN

Note: Get the IMEI

AT+CGSN

Note: Get the IMEI

Possible responses

012345678901234

OK

Note: IMEI read from EEPROM

+CME ERROR: 22

Note: IMEI not found in EEPROM confidential ©

Page: 25 / 478




No parameter

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005 confidential ©

Page: 26 / 478



4.5 Select TE character set +CSCS

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

4.5.1 Description

This command informs the ME which character set is used by the TE. The ME can convert each character of entered or displayed strings. This is used to send, read or write short messages. See also +WPCS for the phonebooks’ character sets.

4.5.2 Syntax

Command

AT+CSCS=”GSM”

Note: GSM default alphabet

AT+CSCS=”PCCP437”

Note: PC character set code page 437

AT+CSCS=?

Note: Get possible values

Possible responses

OK

Note: Command valid

OK

Note: Command valid

+CSCS:

(“GSM”,”PCCP437”,”CUSTOM”,”HEX”)

OK

Note: Possible values


<Character Set>

“GSM” GSM default alphabet.

“PCCP437” PC character set code page 437.

“CUSTOM” User defined character set (cf. +WCCS command).

“HEX” Hexadecimal mode. No character set used ; the user can read or write hexadecimal values. confidential ©

Page: 27 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

4.6 Wavecom Phonebook Character Set +WPCS

4.6.1 Description

This specific command informs the ME which character set is used by the TE for the phonebooks. The ME can convert each character of entered or displayed strings. This is used to read or write phonebook entries. See also +CSCS for the short messages character sets.

4.6.2 Syntax

Command

AT+WPCS=”TRANSPARENT”

Note: Transparent mode

AT+WPCS=”CUSTOM”

Note: Custom character set

AT+WPCS=?


Possible responses

OK

Note: Command valid

OK

Note: Command valid

+WPCS:

(“TRANSPARENT”,”HEX”,”CUSTOM”)

OK



<Character Set>

“TRANSPARENT” Transparent mode. The strings are displayed and entered as they are stored in SIM or in ME.

“CUSTOM”

“HEX”

User defined character set (cf. +WCCS command).

Hexadecimal mode. No character set used ; the user can read or write hexadecimal values. confidential ©

Page: 28 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

4.7 Request IMSI +CIMI

4.7.1 Description

This command is used to read and identify the IMSI (International Mobile

Subscriber Identity) of the SIM card. The PIN may need to be entered before reading the IMSI.

4.7.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CIMI

Command

AT+CIMI

Note: Read the IMSI

Possible responses

208200120320598

OK

Note: IMSI value (15 digits), starting with

MCC (3 digits) / MNC (2 digits, 3 for PCS

1900)

See appendix 19.12 for MCC / MNC description.



Page: 29 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

4.8 Card Identification +CCID

4.8.1 Description

This command orders the product to read the EF-CCID file on the SIM card.

4.8.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CCID

Command

AT+CCID

Note: Get card ID

AT+CCID?

Note: Get current value

AT+CCID= ?

Note: Get possible value

Possible responses

+CCID: “123456789AB111213141”

OK

Note: EF-CCID is present, hexadecimal format

+ CCID: “123456789AB111213141”

OK

Note: Same result as +CCID

OK

Note: No parameter but this command is valid


No parameter

If there is no EF-CCID file present on the SIM, the +CCID answer will not be sent, but the OK message will be returned.

4.9 Capabilities list +GCAP

4.9.1 Description

This command gets the complete list of capabilities. confidential ©

Page: 30 / 478



4.9.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+GCAP

Command

AT+GCAP

Note: Get capabilities list


No parameter

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Possible responses

+GCAP: +CGSM, +FCLASS

OK

Note: Supports GSM and FAX commands confidential ©

Page: 31 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

4.10 Repeat last command A/

4.10.1 Description

This command repeats the previous command. Only the A/ command itself cannot be repeated.

Command syntax: A/

Command

A/

Note: Repeat last command

Possible responses

No parameter

4.11 Power off +CPOF

4.11.1 Description

This specific command stops the GSM software stack as well as the hardware layer. The AT+CFUN=0 command is equivalent to +CPOF.

Command syntax: AT+CPOF

Command

AT+CPOF

Note: Stop GSM stack

Possible responses

OK

Note: Command valid


Page: 32 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

4.12 Set phone functionality +CFUN

4.12.1 Description

This command selects the mobile station’s level of functionality.

When the application wants to stop the product with a power off, or if the application wants to force the product to execute an IMSI DETACH procedure, then it must send:

AT+CFUN=0 (equivalent to AT+CPOF)

This command executes an IMSI DETACH and makes a backup copy of some internal parameters in SIM and in EEPROM. The SIM card cannot then be accessed.

If the mobile equipment is not powered off by the application after this command has been sent, a re-start command (AT+CFUN=1) will have to issued to restart the whole GSM registration process.

If the mobile equipment is turned off after this command, then a power on will automatically restart the whole GSM process.

The AT+CFUN=1 command restarts the entire GSM stack and GSM functionality: a complete software reset is performed. All parameters are reset to their previous values if AT&W was not used.

If you write entries in the phonebook (+CPBW) and then reset the product directly (AT+CFUN=1, with no previous AT+CFUN=0 command), some entries may not be written (the SIM task does not have enough time to write entries in the SIM card).

In addition, the OK response will be sent at the last baud rate defined by the

+IPR command. With the autobauding mode the response can be at a different baud rate, it is therefore preferable to save the defined baud rate with AT&W before directly sending the AT+CFUN=1 command. confidential ©

Page: 33 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Command

AT+CFUN?

Note: Ask for current functionality level

Possible responses

+CFUN: 1

OK

Note: Full functionality

AT+CFUN=0 OK

Note: Set minimum functionality, IMSI detach procedure

Note: Command valid

AT+CFUN=1 OK

Note: Set the full functionality mode with a complete software reset

Note: Command valid confidential ©

Page: 34 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

<functionality level>

0: Set minimum functionality, IMSI detach procedure

1: Set the full functionality mode with a complete software reset

4.13 Phone activity status +CPAS

4.13.1 Description

This command returns the activity status of the mobile equipment.

4.13.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CPAS

Command

AT+CPAS

Note: Current activity status

Possible responses

+CPAS: <pas>

OK

<pas>

0 ready (allow commands from TA/TE)

1 unavailable (does not allow commands)

2 unknown

3 ringing (ringer is active)

4 call in progress

5 asleep (low functionality) confidential ©

Page: 35 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

4.14.1 Description

This command disables or enables the use of the “+CME ERROR: <xxx>” or

“+CMS ERROR:<xxx>” result code instead of simply “ERROR”. See appendix

19.1 for +CME ERROR result codes description and appendix 19.2 for +CMS

ERROR result codes.

4.14.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CMEE=<error reporting flag>

Command Possible responses

OK

AT+CMEE=0

Note: Disable ME error reports, use only

« ERROR »

OK

AT+CMEE=1

Note: Enable «+CME ERROR: <xxx>» or

«+CMS ERROR: <xxx>»

OK

OK

<error reporting flag>

0: Disable ME error reports, use only « ERROR »

1: Enable «+CME ERROR: <xxx>» or «+CMS ERROR: <xxx>» confidential ©

Page: 36 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

4.15 Keypad control +CKPD

4.15.1 Description

This command emulates the ME keypad by sending each keystroke as a character in a <keys> string.

The supported GSM sequences are listed in the appendix.

If emulation fails, a +CME ERROR: <err> is returned.

If emulation succeeds, the result depends on the GSM sequence activated:

Note: In the case where the FDN phonebook is activated, the sequences concerning “call forwarding” are allowed only if the entire sequence is written in the FDN.

Command syntax: AT+CKPD=<keys>

Command

AT+CKPD=”*#21#”

Note: Check every call forwarding status

AT+CKPD=”1234”

Note: Sequence not allowed

Possible responses

+CCFC: 0,7

+CME ERROR 3

<keys>

Keyboard sequence: string of the following characters (0-9,*,#). confidential ©

Page: 37 / 478



4.16 Clock Management +CCLK

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

4.16.1 Description

This command is used to set or get the current date and time of the ME realtime clock.

4.16.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CCLK=<date and time string>


AT+CCLK=”00/06/09,17:33:00” OK

Note: set date to June 9 th to 5:33pm

, 2000, and time Note: Date/Time stored

+CME ERROR 3 AT+CCLK=”00/13/13,12:00:00”

Note: Incorrect month entered

AT+CCLK?

Note: Get current date and time

+CCLK: “00/06/09,17:34:23”

OK

Note: current date is June 9 th current time is 5:34:23 pm

, 2000

<date and time string>

String format for date/time is: “yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss”.

Valid years are 98 (for 1998) to 97 (for 2097). The seconds field is not mandatory. Default date/time is “98/01/01,00:00:00” (January 1 midnight). st , 1998 / confidential ©

Page: 38 / 478



4.17 Alarm Management +CALA

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

4.17.1 Description

This command is used to set alarms date/time in the ME.

The maximum number of alarms is 16.

Note: The date/time should be already set with AT+CCLK command before using AT+CALA.

4.17.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CALA=<date and time string> (set alarm)

AT+CALA=””,<index> (delete alarm)


AT+CALA=”00/06/09,07:30” OK

Note: set an alarm for June 9 th

7:30 am

, 2000 at Note: Alarm stored

AT+CALA=”99/03/05,13:00:00” +CME ERROR 3

Note: set an alarm for March 5 th

1:00 pm

, 1999 at Note: Invalid alarm (date/time expired)

AT+CALA?

Note: list all alarms

+CALA: “00/06/08,15:25:00”,1

+CALA: “00/06/09,07:30:00”,2

+CALA: “00/06/10,23:59:00”,3

Note: three alarms are set (index 1, 2, 3)

AT+CALA=””,3

Note: delete alarm index 3

AT+CALA?

Note: list all alarms

Note: an alarm occurs (index 1)

OK

Note: Alarm index 3 deleted

+CALA: “00/06/09,07:30:00”,2

Note: Only one alarm (index 2)

<date and time string> confidential ©

Page: 39 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

String format for alarms: “yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss” (see +CCLK).

Note: Seconds are taken into account.

<index> offset in the alarm list, range 1 to 16. confidential ©

Page: 40 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

4.18 Ring Melody Playback +CRMP

4.18.1 Description

This command allows a melody to be played. All melodies are manufacturer defined.

For incoming voice, data or fax calls, 10 manufacturer-defined melodies can be played back (in a loop).

For an incoming short message, 2 manufacturer-defined sounds can be played back (once). Melody #1: short beep / Melody #2: long beep.

Note: loop melodies (for voice/data/fax call) must be stopped by a +CRMP command with the <index> field set to 0 (example: +CRMP=0,,,0).

When the <volume> parameter is given, this overwrites the <sound level> value of the +CRSL command. If the <volume> parameter is not given, the

<sound level> value of +CRSL is used as default value.

Command

AT+CRMP=0,7,0,2 OK

Note: Play voice call melody index 2 with volume level 7.

Note: Melody Playback.

AT+CRMP=0,,,0

Note: Stop the melody.

AT+CRMP=?

Note: supported parameters

Possible responses

OK

Note: The melody is stopped.

+CRMP: (0-3),(0-15),0,(0-11)

OK

<call type>

3 Incoming short message (SMS)

<volume> confidential ©

Page: 41 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

…

<type>

0 Manufacturer Defined (default)

<index>

0 Stop Melody Playback

1-11 Melody ID for voice/data/fax call type (default: 1)

1-2 Melody ID for short message (default: 1)


Page: 42 / 478



4.19 Ringer Sound Level +CRSL

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

4.19.1 Description

This command is used to set/get the sound level of the ringer on incoming calls. The set command changes the default <volume> value of the +CRMP command.

Command

AT+CRSL=0

Note: Set volume to Min.

AT+CRSL=15

Note: Set volume to Max.

AT+CRSL?

Note: get current ringer sound level

AT+CRSL=?


<sound level>

6 Default volume (default)

Possible responses

OK

Note: Current ring playing with Min. volume.

OK

Note: Current ring playing with Max. volume.

+CRSL: 15

OK

Note: Current level is 15 (max.)

+CRSL: (0-15)

OK confidential ©

Page: 43 / 478



4.20 Generic Sim Access: +CSIM

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

4.20.1 Description

This command allows a direct control of the SIM by a remote application on the TE. The <command> is sent without any modification to the SIM. In the same manner the SIM <response> is sent back by the ME as it is.

The user shall then take care of processing SIM information within the frame specified by GSM as specified in GSM 11.11(or 3GPP TS 51.011).

If operation mode is not allowed by the ME, +CME ERROR: <error> is returned.

Between two successive +CSIM commands, there is no locking of the interface between the SIM and the GSM application. Since in this situation some command types and parameters can modify wrong SIM ’s files , some operations, described below, are not allowed for CSIM command. However, it is possible to process them with the CRSM command.

4.20.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CSIM=<length>,<command>


+CME ERROR: <err>

AT+CSIM? OK

AT+CSIM=? OK

<length>: integer type

Length of the characters that are sent to TE in <command> or <response>

(two times the actual length of the command or response). For command sent to TE, This value must be in the range [ 10 – 522 ], else a CME_ERROR=3 is returned.

<command>: hexadecimal type confidential ©

Page: 44 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Command passed on by the MT to the SIM in the format as described in

GSM 11.11 (or 3GPP TS 51.011) (hexadecimal character format; refer +CSCS)

Second Byte Value not supported:

Due to the absence of locking, a CME_ERROR=3 is returned for the following instructions ( See CRSM commands):

• D6 : UPDATE BINARY

• DC : UPDATE RECORD

• 32 : INCREASE

• 88 : RUN GSM ALGORITHM

• 20 : VERIFY CHV

• 24 : CHANGE CHV

• 28 : ENABLE CHV

• 2C : UNBLOCK CHV

• C0 : GET RESPONSE

Second Byte Value warning:

Due to the absence of locking, the right response may not be returned for the following instructions (See CRSM commands).

• C2

: ENVELOPE

• A2

: SEEK confidential ©

Page: 45 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Fifth Byte Value Restriction:

For the following instructions ( Second Byte ):

• A4 : SELECT

• 10 : TERMINAL PROFILE

• C2 : ENVELOPE

• 14 : TERMINAL RESPONSE the user must make sure that the value of the fifth Byte of the instruction corresponds of the length of bytes (data starting from 6 follow it. th byte) which

The value of the Fifth Byte must be equal of the value: <length>/2 – 5, else the command is not send to the SIM and CME_ERROR=3 is returned.

<error>: integer type

3 Wrong format or parameters of the command

<response>: hexadecimal type

Response to the command passed on by the SIM to the MT in the format as described in GSM 11.11 (or 3GPP TS 51.011) (hexadecimal character format; refer +CSCS) confidential ©

Page: 46 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

4.21 Restricted SIM access +CRSM

4.21.1 Description

By using this command instead of Generic SIM Access +CSIM TE application has easier but more limited access to the SIM database. This command transmits to the MT the SIM <command> and its required parameters.

As response to the command, MT sends the actual SIM information parameters and response data. MT error result code +CME ERROR may be returned when the command cannot be passed to the SIM, but failure in the execution of the command in the SIM is reported in <sw1> and <sw2> parameters.

As for the CSIM command , there is no locking between two successive commands. The user should be aware of the precedence of the GSM application commands to the TE commands.

4.21.2 Syntax

Command

AT+CRSM=<command>[,<fileid>[,<P1>,<P2>,<P3>[,<data>]]] syntax:


+CRSM=<command>[,<fileid>

[,<P1>,<P2>,<P3>[,<data>]]]

+CRSM:

<sw1>,<sw2>[,<response>]

+CME ERROR: <err>

AT+CRSM? OK

AT+CRSM=? OK confidential ©

Page: 47 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

<command>: integer type

Command passed on by the MT to the SIM; refer GSM 11.11 (or 3GPP TS

51.011):

176 READ BINARY

178 READ RECORD

192 GET RESPONSE

242 STATUS all other values are reserved and the command will return +CME

ERROR=3

NOTE 1: The MT internally executes all commands necessary for selecting the desired file, before performing the actual command.

<fileid>: integer type

This is the identifier of a elementary datafile on SIM. Mandatory for every command except STATUS.

NOTE 2: The range of valid file identifiers depends on the actual SIM and is defined in GSM 11.11 (or 3GPP TS 51.011). Optional files may not be present at all. This value must be in the range [0 – 65535] else a CME_ERROR=3 is returned.

<P1>, <P2>, <P3>: integer type

Parameters passed on by the MT to the SIM. These parameters are mandatory for every command, except GET RESPONSE and STATUS. The values are described in GSM 11.11 (or 3GPP TS 51.011).

<data>: hexadecimal type information which shall be written to the SIM (hexadecimal character format; refer +CSCS).

<sw1>, <sw2>: integer type

Information from the SIM about the execution of the actual command.

These parameters are delivered to the TE in both cases, on successful or failed execution of the command. confidential ©

Page: 48 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

<response>: hexadecimal type response of a successful completion of the command previously issued

(hexadecimal character format; refer +CSCS). STATUS and GET

RESPONSE return data, which gives information about the current elementary datafield. This information includes the type of file and its size

(refer GSM 11.11 (or 3GPP TS 51.011)). After READ BINARY or READ

RECORD command the requested data will be returned.

<error>: integer type

3 Wrong format or parameters of the command confidential ©

Page: 49 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

5 Call Control commands

5.1 Dial command D

5.1.1 Description

The ATD command is used to set a voice, data or fax call. As per GSM 02.30, the dial command also controls supplementary services.

For a data or a fax call, the application sends the following ASCII string to the product (the bearer must be previously selected with the +CBST command):

ATD<nb> where <nb> is the destination phone number.

Note: If a GPRS PPP session is already running, the setting of a CSD (GSM data call) is not supported.

For a voice call, the application sends the following ASCII string to the product:

(the bearer may be selected previously, if not a default bearer is used).

ATD<nb>; where <nb> is the destination phone number.

Please note that for an international number, the local international prefix does not need to be set (usually 00) but does need to be replaced by the ‘+’ character.

Example: to set up a voice call to Wavecom offices from another country, the

AT command is: “ATD+33146290800;”

Note that some countries may have specific numbering rules for their GSM handset numbering.

Please refer to §3.3 for details on number length.

confidential ©

Page: 50 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

The response to the ATD command is one of the following:

Verbose result code

Numeric code

(with ATV0 set)

Description

OK

CONNECT

<speed>

0

10,11,12,13,14,

15 if the call succeeds, for voice call only if the call succeeds, for data calls only,

<speed> takes the value negotiated by the product.

BUSY

NO ANSWER

NO CARRIER

7

8

3

If the called party is already in communication

If no hang up is detected after a fixed network time-out

Call setup failed or remote user release. Use the AT+CEER command to know the failure cause

Direct dialing from a phonebook (stored in the SIM card) can be performed with the following command:

ATD> <index>;

+CPBS command) to call <index> from the selected phonebook (by the

ATD> “BILL”; to call “BILL” from the selected phonebook

ATD> mem <index> (mem is “SM”,”LD”,”MC”,”ME”,”RC”,”MT” or “SN”, see +CPBS command) allows direct dialing from a phonebook number. Does not function with “ON” mem.

5.1.2 Syntax

Command syntax: ATD<nb>[<I>][;]

ATD>[<mem>]<index>[<I>][;]

ATD>[<mem>]<name>[<I>][;]

Command

AT+CPBS?

Note: Which phonebook is selected ?

ATD>SM6;

Note: Call index 6 from ADN phonebook

Possible responses

+CPBS:”SM”,8,10

Note: ADN phonebook is selected, 8 locations are used and 10 locations are available

OK

Note: Call succeeds

When the FDN phonebook has been locked, only numbers beginning with the digits of FDN phonebook entries can be called. confidential ©

Page: 51 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

For example, if “014629” is entered in the FDN phonebook all the phone numbers beginning with these 6 digits can be called.

The CLIR supplementary service subscription can be overridden for this call only.

“I” means “invocation” (restrict CLI presentation).

“i” means “suppression” (allow CLI presentation).

Control of CUG supplementary service information by “G” or “g” is allowed for this call only. The index and info values set with the +CCUG command are used.

An outgoing call attempt could be refused if the AOC service is active and credit has expired (NO CARRIER).

When trying to set up an outgoing call while there is an active call, the active call is first put on hold, then the call set up is carried out.

As per GSM 02.30, GSM sequences may be controlled using dial commands.

These sequences can contain “*”, “#”, but “;” is forbidden.

If the sequence is not supported or fails, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned.

In the case where the FDN phonebook is activated, the sequences concerning call forwarding are allowed only if there are written in the FDN.

See paragraph 19.11 to have the list of supported sequences.

Command

ATD*#21#

Note: Check any call forwarding status

Possible responses

+CCFC: 0,7

Note: No call forwarding

ATD**61*+33146290800**25# OK

Note: Register call forwarding on no reply, with no reply timer fixed at 25 s.

Note: done

ATD*2#

Note: Bad sequence

+CME ERROR 3 confidential ©

Page: 52 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005


<nb> destination phone number

<I> (optional parameter)

“I” means “invocation” (restrict CLI presentation).

“i” means “suppression” (allow CLI presentation).

<mem> phonebook (one of “SM”,”LD”,”MC”,”ME”,”RC”,”MT” or “SN”). A default value can be selected by +CPBS command.

<index> call number at indicated offset from the phonebook selected by the

+CPBS command

<name> call number corresponding to given name from the phonebook selected by the +CPBS command

5.2 Hang-Up command H

5.2.1 Description

The ATH (or ATH0) command is used by the application to disconnect the remote user. In the case of multiple calls, all calls are released (active, on-hold and waiting calls).

The specific Wavecom ATH1 command has been appended to disconnect the current outgoing call, only in dialing or alerting state (ie. ATH1 can be used only after the ATD command, and before its terminal response (OK, NO

CARRIER, ...). It can be useful in the case of multiple calls. confidential ©

Page: 53 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

5.2.2 Syntax

Command syntax: ATH<n>

Command

ATH

Note: Ask for disconnection

ATH1

Note: Ask for outgoing call disconnection

Possible responses

OK

Note: Every call, if any, are released

OK

Note: Outgoing call, if any, is released


<n>

0: Ask for disconnection (default value)

1: Ask for outgoing call disconnection

5.3 Answer a call A

5.3.1 Description

When the product receives a call, it sets the RingInd signal and sends the

ASCII “RING” or “+CRING: <type>” string to the application (+CRING if the cellular result code +CRC is enabled). Then it waits for the application to accept the call with the ATA command.

5.3.2 Syntax:

Command syntax: ATA

Command

ATA

Note: Answer to this incoming call

ATH

Note: Disconnect call

Possible responses

RING

Note: Incoming call

OK

Note: Call accepted

OK

Note: Call disconnected



Page: 54 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

5.4 Remote disconnection

This message is used by the product to inform the application that an active call has been released by the remote user.

The product sends “NO CARRIER” to the application and sets the DCD signal.

In addition, for AOC, the product can release the call if credit has expired

(release cause 68 with +CEER command). confidential ©

Page: 55 / 478



5.5 Extended error report +CEER

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

5.5.1 Description

This command gives the cause of call release when the last call set up

(originating or answering) failed.

5.5.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CEER

Command

ATD123456789;

Note: Outgoing voice call

AT+CEER

Note: Ask for reason of release

Possible responses

NO CARRIER

Note: Call setup failure

+CEER: Error <xxx>

OK

Note: <xxx>is the cause information element values from GSM recommendation 04.08 or specific Call accepted

For the cause information element from GSM 04.08 see chapter 18.4 or 18.5.

“NO CARRIER” indicates that the AT+CEER information is available for failure diagnosis.



Page: 56 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

5.6 DTMF signals +VTD, +VTS

5.6.1 +VTD Description

The product enables the user application to send DTMF tones over the GSM network. This command is used to define tone duration (the default value is

300ms).

5.6.2 +VTD Syntax

Command syntax: AT+VTD=<n>

Command

AT+VTD=6

Note: To define 600 ms tone duration

AT+VTD=0

Note: To set the default value

AT+VTD?

Note: interrogate current tone duration

Possible responses

OK

Note: Command valid

OK

+VTD: <n>

OK

OK


<n>: tone duration

<n>*100 is the duration in ms.

If n < 4, tone duration is 300 ms; if n > 255, the value is used modulo

256. Default value is 300 ms, that is <n> = 3. confidential ©

Page: 57 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

5.6.4 +VTS Description

The product enables the user application to send DTMF tones over the GSM network. This command enables tones to be transmitted, only when there is an active call.

5.6.5 +VTS Syntax

Command syntax: AT+VTS=<Tone>

Command

AT+VTS=”A”

AT+VTS=”11”

AT+VTS=”4”

AT+VTS=”1”;+VTS=”3”;+VTS=”#”

OK

Note: send tone sequence 13#

Possible responses

OK

Note: Command valid

+CME ERROR: 3

Note: If the <Tone> is wrong

+CME ERROR: 3

Note: If there is no communication


<Tone>: DTMF tone to transmit

<Tone> is in {0-9,*,#,A,B,C,D}

5.7 Redial last telephone number ATDL

5.7.1 Description

This command is used by the application to redial the last number used in the

ATD command. The last number dialed is displayed followed by “;” for voice calls only confidential ©

Page: 58 / 478



5.7.2 Syntax

Command syntax: ATDL

Command

ATDL

Note: Redial last number


No parameter

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Possible responses

0146290800;

OK

Note: Last call was a voice call.

Command valid confidential ©

Page: 59 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

5.8 Automatic dialing with DTR AT%Dn

5.8.1 Description

This command enables and disables:

• automatic dialing of the phone number stored in the first location of the

ADN or FDN phonebook,

• automatic sending of the short message (SMS) stored in the first location of the SIM.

The number is dialed when DTR OFF switches to ON.

The short message is sent when DTR OFF switches to ON.

5.8.2 Syntax


AT%D1;

Note: Activates DTR voice number dialing

OK

Note: Command has been executed

DTR is OFF

DTR switches ON

Note: The number in the first location of the

ADN is dialed automatically

OK

DTR switches OFF

Note: The product goes on-hook

AT%D2 OK

Note: Activates DTR short message sending

Note: Command has been executed

DTR is OFF

DTR switches ON

Note: The first short message is sending

+CMGS: x

AT%D1; OK

DTR is OFF

DTR switches ON

Note: no phone number in the first location in the ADN or FDN phonebook

+CME ERROR: 21 confidential ©

Page: 60 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005


AT%D2 OK

DTR is OFF

DTR switches ON

Note: no short message in the first location of the SIM.

+CMS ERROR: 321


<n> (0-2) To enable or disable automatic message transmission or number dialing. Informs the product that the number is a voice number, rather than a fax or data number.

AT%D0 Disables automatic DTR number dialing / message transmission.

AT%D1; Enables automatic DTR dialing if DTR switches from OFF to ON;

Dials the phone number in the first location of the ADN or FDN phonebook. Voice call (with semi-colon).

AT%D1 Activates automatic DTR dialing if DTR switches from OFF to ON;

Dials the phone number in the first location of the ADN or FDN phonebook. Data or Fax call (without semi-colon).

AT%D2 Activates automatic DTR short message transmission if DTR switches from OFF to ON. Sends the short message in the first location of the SIM.

If the first location is empty:

•

•

AT%D1 and AT%D2 commands will receive an OK response

The DTR ON event will trigger a CME ERROR: 21 or a CMS ERROR: 321.

5.9 Automatic answer ATS0

5.9.1 Description

This S0 parameter determines and controls the product automatic answering mode. confidential ©

Page: 61 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

5.9.2 Syntax

Command syntax: ATS0=<value>

Command

ATS0=2

Note: Automatic answer after 2 rings

ATS0?

Note: Current value

ATS0=0

Note: No automatic answer

Possible responses

OK

002

OK

Note: always 3 characters padded with zeros

OK

Note: Command valid

All others S-parameters (S6,S7,S8 …) are not implemented.


<value> number of rings before automatic answer (3 characters padded with zeros). Range of values is 0 to 255.

5.10 Incoming Call Bearer +CICB

5.10.1 Description

This specific command is used to set the type of incoming calls when no

incoming bearer is given (see +CSNS).

Note: setting the +CICB command affects the current value of +CSNS. confidential ©

Page: 62 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

5.10.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CICB=<mode>

Command

AT+CICB=1

Note: If no incoming bearer, force a fax call

Possible responses

OK

Note: Command accepted

AT+CICB=2 OK

Note: If no incoming bearer, force a voice call


AT+CICB?

Note: Interrogate value

+CICB: 2

OK

Note: Default incoming bearer: voice call

AT+CICB=?

Note: Test command

+CICB: (0-2)

OK

Note: Speech, data or fax default incoming bearer

<mode>

0: Data

1: Fax

2: Speech confidential ©

Page: 63 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

5.11 Single Numbering Scheme +CSNS

5.11.1 Description

This command selects the bearer to be used when an MT single numbering

scheme call is set up (see +CICB).

Note: setting the +CSNS command affects the current value of +CICB.

Command syntax: AT+CSNS

Command

AT+CSNS=2

Note: force a fax call

AT+CSNS=0

Note: force a voice call

AT+CSNS?


AT+CSNS=?

Note: Test command

Possible responses

OK


OK


+CSNS: 0

OK

Note: Default incoming bearer: voice call

+CSNS: (0,2,4)

OK

Note: Voice, data or fax default incoming bearer

<mode>

0: Voice

2: Fax

4: Data confidential ©

Page: 64 / 478



5.12 Gain control +VGR, +VGT

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

5.12.1 Description

This command is used by the application to tune the receive gain of the speaker and the transmit gain of the microphone.

5.12.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+VGR=<Rgain>

AT+VGT=<Tgain>

Command

AT+VGR=25

Possible responses

OK

Note: Command valid

AT+VGT=45 OK

Note: Command valid

AT+VGR?


AT+VGR=?

Note: Test command

AT+VGT?


AT+VGT=?

Note: Test command

+VGR: 64

OK

Note: Default receive gain

+VGR: (0-255)

OK


+VGT: 64

OK

Note: Default transmit gain

+VGT: (0-255)

OK


Note: For the AT+VGT ? command with controller 1 set, the value is the lower value of range, where as with controller 2, value correspond to the entered value with AT+VGT=xx. confidential ©

Page: 65 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

48 to 63

64 to 79

80 to 95

96 to 111

112 to 127

128 to 143

144 to 159

160 to 175

176 to 191

192 to 207

208 to 223

224 to 255 values

<Rgain>: reception gain

<Tgain>: transmission gain

The application sends:

For Q24x6 and P32x6 modules

AT+VGR=<val> for receive gain

AT+VGT=<val>

0 to 15

16 to 31

32 to 47

+6 db

+4 db

+2 db

Controller 1

0 to 31

32 to 63

64 to 95

+0 db

-2 db

-4 db

-6 db

-8 db

-10 db

-12 db

-14 db

-16 db

-18 db

-20 db

-22 db

96 to 127

128 to 159

160 to 191

192 to 223

224 to 255 for transmit gain

AT+VGT=<val>

Controller 1

+30 db

Controller 2

0

+33 db

+36 db

1

2

+39 db

+42 db

+45 db

+48 db

+51 db

3

…

19

20

21

22

23

…

58

59

60

61 for transmit gain

Controller 2

+0 db

+0,5 db

+1 db

+1,5 db

…

+9,5 db

+10 db

+10.5 db

+11 db

+11.5 db

+29 db

+29.5 db

+30 db

+30,5 db

… …

103 to 127

128 to 242 reserved reserved

243 db

245 db

255 db confidential ©

Page: 66 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

For P5186 module:

AT+VGR=<val> For the receive gain

AT+VGT=<val>

Controller 1

0 to 15

16 to 31

32 to 47

48 to 63

64 to 79

80 to 95

96 to 111

112 to 127

128 to 143

144 to 159

160 to 175

176 to 191

+6 db

+3 db

+0 db

+0 db

-3 db

-6 db

-6 db

-9 db

-12 db

-12 db

-15 db

-18 db

0 to 31

32 to 63

64 to 95

96 to 127

128 to 159

160 to 191

192 to 223

224 to 255

For the transmit gain controller 1

+29 db

+32 db

+35 db

+38 db

+41 db

+44 db

+47 db

+47 db

192 to 207

208 to 223

224 to 239

240 to 255

-18 db

-21 db

-21 db

-21 db

The gain values listed here are relative, for absolute (electrical) values please refer to the specific hardware documentation of the module used in the application. confidential ©

Page: 67 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

5.13 Microphone Mute Control +CMUT

5.13.1 Description

This command is used to mute the microphone input on the product (for the active microphone set with the +SPEAKER command). This command is only allowed during a call.

5.13.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CMUT=<mode>

Command

AT+CMUT=?

Note: Test command

AT+CMUT?

Note: Ask for current value

AT+CMUT=1

Note: Mute ON (call active)

AT+CMUT?

Note: Ask for current value

AT+CMUT=0

Note: Mute OFF (call not active)

Possible responses

+CMUT: (0,1)

OK

Note: Enable / disable mute

+CMUT: 0

OK

Note: Current value is OFF

OK

Note: Command valid

+CMUT: 1

OK

Note: Mute is active (call active)

+CME ERROR:3

Note: Command not valid

<mode>

0: microphone mute off (default value).

1: microphone mute on. confidential ©

Page: 68 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

5.14 Speaker & Microphone selection +SPEAKER

5.14.1 Description

This specific command is used to select the speaker and the microphone set.

5.14.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+SPEAKER=<ActiveSpkMic>

Command

AT+SPEAKER=0

Note: Speaker ONE and Micro ONE

AT+SPEAKER?

Possible responses

OK

Note: Command valid

+SPEAKER: 0

OK

Note: Speaker ONE and Micro ONE are active

OK

<ActiveSpkMic>

0: SPEAKER ONE, MICRO ONE

1: SPEAKER TWO, MICRO TWO confidential ©

Page: 69 / 478



5.15 Echo Cancellation +ECHO

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

5.15.1 Description

This specific command is used to enable, disable or configure the Echo

Cancellation functions for voice calls (in rooms, in cars, etc.).

It is necessary to tune the Microphone gain (AT+VGT) and the Speaker gain

(AT+VGR) before activating the Echo Cancellation.

Note:

• You can activate/deactivate the echo cancellation during a call without resetting the product if the <AlgoId> parameter is not changed. But you have to use the syntax with all parameters: AT+ECHO=1,3,30,8000,256 for instance.

• To use Echo cancellation 3 and 6, the ECHO feature must be activated.

• Please remind that echo cancellation algorithms may be not available on some WISMO modules:

WISMO module Algorithm 6 support Algorithm 3 support

P51xx No Yes

Q2400 Yes

Q2406 Yes

Yes

Yes

Q2426 No

Q31xx No

No

No

5.15.2 Syntax

Command syntax:

For AlgoId=1:

AT+ECHO=<mode>[,<Algold>[,<VolOut>,<Step>,<PcmThRel>,

<PcmThMax>]]

For AlgoId=3:

AT+ECHO=<mode>[,<Algold>[,<AlgoParam>,<NoiseThres>,<NmbTaps>

]]

For AlgoId=6:

AT+ECHO=<mode>[, <Algold>[, <AlgoParam>, <NoiseThres>,

<NmbTaps>, <ConvergenceTime1>, <ConvergenceTime2>, confidential ©

Page: 70 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

<NoiseLevelMAX>, <DetectionThreshold>, <CNGAdjust>,

<CNGParam1>,<CNGParam2>, <CNGGain>,<SOMValue>]] confidential ©

Page: 71 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Response syntax:

For AlgoId=1:

ECHO: <status>,<Algold>,<VolOut>,<Step>,<PcmThRel>,<PcmThMax>

For AlgoId=3:

+ECHO: <status>,<Algold>,<AlgoParam>,<NoiseThres>,<NmbTaps>

For AlgoId=6:

+ECHO: <status>,<Algold>,<AlgoParam>,<NoiseThres>,<NmbTaps>,

<ConvergenceTime1>,<ConvergenceTime2>,<NoiseLevelMAX>,

<DetectionThreshold>,<CNGAdjust>,<CNGParam1>,<CNGParam2>,

<CNGGain>,<SOMValue>,<NoiseEstimate>

Command

AT+CMEE=1

Note: Enables the use of result code

AT+SPEAKER?

OK

Possible responses

AT+SIDET=0

Note: Deactivate the Sidetone

AT+SIDET?

AT+ECHO?

Note: Read current settings

AT+ECHO=1,1,0,3,10,7

Note: Active Echo cancellation 1 for

Mic/Spk one.

AT+ECHO?


AT+ECHO=1,3,30,8000,256

Note: Activate the Echo cancellation 3

AT+ECHO?

Note: Read the Echo cancellation settings

AT+CFUN=1

Note: Reset the product

AT+ECHO?


+ SPEAKER: 0

OK

Note: Speaker ONE and Micro ONE are active

OK

+SIDET: 0,0

+ECHO: 0,1,0,3,10,7

OK

OK

+ECHO: 1,1,0,3,10,7

OK

+CME ERROR: 519

Note: The new algorithm will be activated after a reset of the product

+ECHO: 3,3,30,8000,256

OK

OK

+ECHO: 1,3,30,8000,256

OK confidential ©

Page: 72 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005


AT+ECHO=0

Note: Deactivate the Echo Cancellation

AT+ECHO=0

Note: Deactivate the Echo Cancellation

AT+ECHO=

1,6,30,50,256,200,550,15,32767,32767,27

484,38697,7311,0

Note: Activate the Echo cancellation 6

AT+ECHO?

Note: Read the Echo cancellation settings

OK

OK

+CME ERROR: 519

Note: The new algorithm will be activated after a reset of the product

+ECHO:3,6,30,8000,256,200,550,15,

32767,32767,27484,38697,7311, 10

OK

OK AT+CFUN=1

Note: Reset the product

AT+ECHO?


+ECHO: 1, 6, 30, 8000, 256, 200, 550,

15, 32767,2767,27484,38697,7311,10

OK

<mode>

0: Deactivate Echo

1: Activate Echo

When mode = 1 is choosen, AlgoId is mandatory.

<Status>

0 Echo Deactivated.

1 Echo Activated for Mic/Spk one.

2 Echo Activated for Mic/Spk two.

3 Reset the product.

Note: <Status> does not indicate the currently selected speaker. If echo is activated, it indicates the speaker for which echo parameters are set. Echo can be activated on a non-selected speaker. confidential ©

Page: 73 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

<AlgoId>

1: Echo cancellation 1 (Not supported on WISMO P51x6)

3: Echo cancellation 3

6: Echo cancellation 6: AEC algorithm

Please remind that echo cancellation algorithms may be not available on some WISMO modules. Refer to table in Description paragraph.

Echo cancellation 1 (4 parameters):

• The parameter <Volout> specifies the maximum attenuation of the switch

<Volout>

0: 31 db (default)

1: 29 db

2: 27 db

3: 25 db

…

14: 3 db

15: 1 db

• The parameter <Step> specifies the attenuation step between attenuation and no attenuation.

<Step>

0: 1 db

1: 2 db

2: 3 db

3: 4 db (default)

• The <PcmThRel> parameter specifies the relative threshold between max and min energy information.

The allowed range is [ 0 ; 31 ]. (10 by default)

• The <PcmThMax > parameter specifies threshold of max energy information.


Echo Cancellation 3 (3 parameters):

• <AlgoParam> high value leads to high echo attenuation but the fullduplex quality will be less efficient.

The allowed range is [ 0 ; 63 ]. (30 by default) confidential ©

Page: 74 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

• <NoiseThres> indicates the noise threshold. Low value leads to high noise attenuation. The threshold 32767 indicates no noise attenuation.

The allowed range is [0 ;32767]. (8000 default)

• <NmbTaps> indicates the Number of Taps of the Adaptive Filter. The allowed range is [64 ;256]. (256 by default)-64 taps is for short Echo-

256 taps is for long Echo.

Echo Cancellation 6 (12 parameters):

• <AlgoParam> high value leads to high echo attenuation but the fullduplex quality will be less efficient.


• <NoiseThres> indicates the noise threshold. Low value leads to high noise attenuation. The threshold 512 indicates no noise attenuation. The allowed range is [0 ;512]. (50 default)

• <NmbTaps> indicates the Number of Taps of the Adaptive Filter. The allowed range is [2 ;256]. (256 by default)-64 taps is for short Echo-256 taps is for long Echo.

• <ConvergenceTime1> Convergence time in quiet condition:

This parameter expresses duration as the number of GSM speech frames (20 ms each) containing far end speech, upon which the switch only mechanism must run, in quiet conditions. The allowed range is

[162; 65535]. (200 default)

• <ConvergenceTime2> Convergence time in noise condition:

This parameter is the same as ConvergenceTime1 but noisy condition.

The allowed range is [162; 65535]. (550 default)

Important note: <ConvergenceTime2> must be greater than

<ConvergenceTime1>

• <NoiseLevelMAX> Upper bound of the noise floor estimate

This parameter is expressed an integer on 16bits, and corresponds to the rounded value of the noise floor estimate expressed in dB (log2). The allowed range is [NOISE_LEVEL_MIN+1, 31], NOISE_LEVEL_MIN being a constant (NOISE_LEVEL_MIN=4 in the current implementation). Default value is 15 .

• <DetectionThreshold> Far-end speech detection threshold:

In order to detect far end speech on the loudspeaker’s signal, the SNR is computed regarding to the far end signal power and the far end signal noise floor level. This parameter specifies a threshold on the SNR above which the switch mechanism will be activated.

This parameter is expressed as an integer on 16bits, and must be in the range [0, 32767]. (32767default) (half duplex is disabled by default and the value 4 is recommended to activate the feature ).

confidential ©

Page: 75 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

• <CNGAdjust>: Comfort noise volume gain

Although the comfort noise volume will self adjust to the estimated ambient noise level, it is possible to artificially reduce its level. This parameter is expressed in fixed point as a signed Q15, meaning that

32767 stands for 1.0, and 0 for 0.0. It ranges from 0 to 32767. Setting this value to 0 will mean no comfort noise. (32767 default)

• <CNGParam1>, <CNGParam2>: 16 bits Comfort noise AR2 coefficients:

The user will set the AR2 coefficients for a specific car. Their value will be estimated on a recorded noise sequence by mean of a tool provided by Wavecom (C or Matlab source code). The recorded sequence shall be made in the noisy conditions and contain noise only. The allowed range is [0; 65535]. (27484 by default for CNG Param1 and 38697 by default for CNGParam2)

• <CNGGain>: 16 bits Comfort noise AR2 gain coefficient.

It specifies the gain of the AR2 filter used for comfort noise generation. It will be estimated by the same tool used to estimate CNGParam1 and

CNGParam2.

It is represented as a Q15 on 16 bits. The allowed range is [0; 32767].

(7311 default)

• <SOMValue>: Switch attenuation value at the beginning of the call

This parameter will range from 1 to 16 and set the depth of the attenuation of the transmit audio signal when speech is detected on the downlink side (4 default)

Important: If <DetectionThreshold> is set to 32767, this parameter is ignored (no impact).

• <NoiseEstimate>: value of the noise floor estimate written by the DSP

(only in case of active communication)

The allowed range is [0, 32] when a communication is active. Otherwise the returned value is 65535.

Notes: o The field <NoiseEstimate> is present only for the AlgoId 6 and only in the response to AT+ECHO? o When a new algoid is selected, AT+ECHO? returns 3 for the mode. The changes will be taken into account after a reset. confidential ©

Page: 76 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

5.16 SideTone modification +SIDET

5.16.1 Description

This specific command is used to set the level of audio feedback in the speaker

(microphone feedback in the speaker).

5.16.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+SIDET=<val1>[,<val2>]

Command

AT+SIDET=1,0

AT+SIDET?

Note: Current value

Possible responses

OK

Note: Command valid

+SIDET: 1,0

OK

Note: Command valid

OK

<val1>

0: SideTone is disabled

1: SideTone is enabled

<val2> ( default value 0 will be used if this parameter is not given)

0: 0 db

1: - 6 db

2: - 12 db

3: - 18 db confidential ©

Page: 77 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

5.17 Initialize Voice Parameters +VIP

5.17.1 Description

This command allows factory settings for voice parameters to be restored from

EEPROM.

These voice parameters include:

•

•

•

•

•

•

Gain control (+VGR & +VGT commands),

Gain controller (+WSVG command),

Microphone mute control (+CMUT command),

Speaker & Microphone selection (+SPEAKER command),

Echo cancellation (+ECHO command),

Side tone modification (+SIDET command).

5.17.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+VIP=<n>

.Command

AT+VIP?

Possible responses

+VIP: 1

OK

+CME ERROR: 3 AT+VIP=2

Note: Syntax error

AT+VIP=1 OK

Note: Restore the factory settings from

EEPROM

Note: The command has been executed

AT+VIP=1 CME ERROR: 519

Note: Restore the factory settings from

EEPROM with the current Echo cancellation algo (different of the default algo).

Note: Reset the product to accept the new algo.

AT+VIP=?

Note: List of supported <n>s

+VIP: (1)

OK

<n> confidential ©

Page: 78 / 478



1: Restore all voice parameters

Other values are not supported.

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008


Page: 79 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

6 Network service commands

6.1 Signal Quality +CSQ

6.1.1 Description

This command is used to ascertain the received signal strength indication

(<rssi>) and the channel bit error rate (<ber>) with or without a SIM card inserted.

6.1.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CSQ

Command

AT+CSQ

Possible responses

+CSQ: <rssi>,<ber>

OK

Note: <rssi> and <ber> as defined below


<rssi>:

0 -113 dBm or less

2 to 30 -109 to –53 dBm

99

<ber>: not known or not detectable

0…7 as RXQUAL values in the table GSM 05.08

99 not known or not detectable confidential ©

Page: 80 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

6.2 Operator selection +COPS

6.2.1 Description

There are three possible ways of selecting an operator (PLMN):

1) The product is in manual mode. It then tries to find the operator specified by the application and if found, tries to register.

2) The product is in automatic mode. It then tries to find the home operator and if found, tries to register. If not found, the product automatically searches for another network.

3) The product enters into manual/automatic mode, and then tries to find an operator as specified by the application (as in manual mode). If this attempt fails it enters automatic mode. If this is successful, the operator specified by the application is selected. The mobile equipment then enters into automatic mode.

Note:

The read command returns the current mode and the currently selected operator. In manual mode, this PLMN may not be the one set by the application (as it is in the search phase).

These commands are not allowed during one communication.

6.2.2 Syntax

To force an attempt to select and register on a network, the application must send the following command:

Command syntax: AT+COPS=<mode>, [<format> [ , <oper> ] ]

Possible responses for AT+COPS=<mode>:

OK

+CME ERROR: 30

+CME ERROR: 32

Network is selected with full service

No network service

Network not allowed – emergency calls only

+CME ERROR: 3

+CME ERROR: 4

Not allowed during Communication

Incorrect parameters

+CME ERROR: 527 Please wait, and retry your selection later

+CME ERROR: 528 Location update failure – emergency calls only

+CME ERROR: 529 Selection failure – emergency calls only confidential ©

Page: 81 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Response syntax for AT+COPS?:

+COPS: <mode> [, <format>, <oper> ]

Response syntax for AT+COPS=?:

+COPS: [list of supported (<stat>, long alphanumeric <oper>, short alphanumeric <oper>s, numeric <oper>) s]

Notes:

• If an incoming call occurs during a PLMN list request, the operation is aborted (+CME ERROR: 520) and the unsolicited RING appears.

• If SPN (Service Provider Name) is present in the SIM, it will be returned in both long and short alphanumeric <oper> fields. The string in the

“short” field will be the SPN truncated to the appropriate character number (10). confidential ©

Page: 82 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Command

AT+COPS?

Note: Ask for current PLMN

AT+COPS=?

Note: Ask for PLMN list

AT+COPS=1,2,20810

Note: Ask for registration on SFR network

Possible responses

+COPS: 0,2,20801

OK

Note: Home PLMN is France Telecom

Orange

+COPS: (2,”F SFR”,”SFR”,”20810”), (3,”F

– BOUYGUES

TELECOM”,”BYTEL”,”20820”),(3,”Orange

F”,”Orange”,”20801”)

OK

Note: Home PLMN is SFR, BYTEL and

Orange networks have been detected

+CME ERROR: 32

Note: Network not allowed – emergency calls only

AT+COPS=1,1,23433 +CME ERROR: 529

Note: Ask for registration on UK Orange network

Note: Selection failed – emergency calls only

AT+COPS=0

Note: Ask for registration on home network

OK

Note: Succeeded

OK AT+COPS=3,0

Note: Set <format> to long alphanumeric

AT+COPS?


AT+COPS=2

Note: Ask for deregistration from network

AT+COPS?


+COPS: 0,0,”Orange F”

OK

Note: Home PLMN is France Telecom

Orange

OK

Note: Succeeded

+COPS: 2

Note: ME is unregistered until <mode>=0 or 1 is selected


The parameters values are the following ones:

<mode>

0: automatic (default value) confidential ©

Page: 83 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

1: manual

2: deregistration ; ME will be unregistered until <mode>=0 or 1 is selected.

3: set only <format> (for read command AT+COPS?)

4: manual / automatic (<oper> shall be present), if manual selection fails, automatic mode is entered.

<format>: format of <oper> field

0: long alphanumeric format <oper>

1: short alphanumeric format <oper>

2: numeric <oper> (default value)

<stat>: status of <oper>

0: unknown

1: available

2: current

3: forbidden

<oper>: operator identifier (MCC/MNC in numeric format only for operator selection)

The long alphanumeric format can be up to 16 characters long (see appendix

19.12 for operator names description, field is “Name”)

The short alphanumeric format can be up to 10 characters long. confidential ©

Page: 84 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

6.3 Network registration +CREG

6.3.1 Description

This command is used by the application to ascertain the registration status of the product.

6.3.2 Syntax

Response syntax: +CREG: <mode>, <stat> [ ,<lac>,<ci> ] for AT+CREG?

Command only

Unsolicited Response Syntax: +CREG: <stat>

Command

AT+CREG?

Possible responses

+CREG: <mode>,<stat>

OK

Note: As defined here-above

AT+CREG=0 OK

Note: Disable network registration unsolicited result code

Note: Command valid

AT+CREG=1 OK

Note: Enable network registration unsolicited result code

Note: Command valid

AT+CREG=2 OK

Note: Enable network registration and location information unsolicited result code

Note: Command valid

Note: 0,1,2 <mode> values are supported confidential ©

Page: 85 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005


<mode>

0: Disable network registration unsolicited result code (default)

1: Enable network registration code result code +CREG: <stat>

2: Enable network registration and location information unsolicited result code +CREG: <stat>,<lac>,<ci> if there is a change of network cell.

<stat>

0: not registered, ME is not currently searching for a new operator.

1: registered, home network.

2: not registered, ME currently searching for a new operator to register to.

3: registration denied. (Unknown IMSI, Illegal MS, Illegal ME, Bad

Authentication)

4: unknown.

5: registered, roaming.

<lac>: string type; two byte location area code in hexadecimal format (e.g.

“00C3” equals 195 in decimal).

<ci>: string type; two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format.

6.4 Read operator name +WOPN

6.4.1 Description

This specific command returns the operator name in alphanumeric format, the numeric format being given.

With E-ONS (Enhanced Operator Name Service) feature, <lac> is an optional parameter to read names from OPL/PNN sim files. If it is not entered, name will be given with current lac. Note that in limited service, current lac is set to 0.

It also permits to erase NITZ PLMN names stored in Flash memory with

“AT+WOPN=3,0”.

When the WISMO module receives a NITZ (Network Information and Time

Zone) message with Long Name or Short Name information, an entry with registered PLMN and names in message is created in flash memory. These names will then be used with +COPS,+COPN,+WOPN commands with the priority order defined in 3GPP TS 22.101. The WISMO module supports only network names with GSM default alphabet coding scheme.

Refer to 3GPP TS 24.008 V5.3.0, 3GPP TS 23.040 v6.1.0, 3GPP TS 22.042 v5.0.0 for more information. confidential ©

Page: 86 / 478



6.4.2 Syntax

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Command

AT+WOPN=?

Note: Test command

Possible responses

OK

+WOPN: 0,”Orange F” AT+WOPN=0,20801

Note: Give an operator in numeric format

AT+WOPN=0,99999

Note: Give a wrong operator

OK

Note: Alphanumeric answer

+CME ERROR: 22

Note: Not found

AT+WOPN=0,20801,36 +WOPN: 0,”Orange F”

Note: Give an operator in numeric format for lac 36

OK

Note: Alphanumeric answer

AT+WOPN=3,0

Note: Erase NITZ PLMN names stored in flash memory

OK


<format> is the required format.

0: Long alphanumeric format

1: Short alphanumeric format

Note: Use <format>=3 and <NumOper>=0 to erase NITZ PLMN names list.

<NumOper> is the operator in numeric format.

<AlphaOper> is the operator in long or short alphanumeric format (see

appendix 19.12 for operator names description)

<lac> is the two bytes Location Area Code to be used to get the PLMN name.

If it is not entered, Current lac will be used (0 if limited service). confidential ©

Page: 87 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

6.5 Selection of Preferred PLMN list +CPLS

6.5.1 Description

This command is used to select one PLMN selector with access technology list in the SIM card that is used by AT+CPOL command.

6.5.2 Syntax

Command

AT+CPLS?

Note: Ask for selection of the SIM file

AT+CPLS=0

Note: selection of EF_PLMNwAct

AT+CPLS=1

Note: selection of EF_OPLMNwAct

AT+CPLS=?


AT+CPLS=?


Possible responses

+CPLS: 1

OK

Note: EF_OPLMNwAct is selected

Note: if EF_PLMNwAct is not present,

EF_PLMNsel will be selected

+CME ERROR: 3

Note: EF_OPLMNwAct is not present

+CPLS: (0,1,2)

OK

Note: The 3 files with Acces technology are present and can be selected

+CPLS: (0)

OK

Note: Only EF_PLMNwAct or EF_PLMNsel can be selected confidential ©

Page: 88 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005


<List>:

0: User controlled PLMN selector with access technology EF_PLMNwAct

Note: if this file is not found EF_PLMNSel will be selected

1: Operator controlled PLMN selector with access technology EF_OPLMNwAct

2: Home PLMN selector with access technology EF_HPLMNwAct

6.6 Preferred operator list +CPOL

6.6.1 Description

This command is used to edit (or update) the SIM preferred list of networks.

This list is read in the SIM file selected by the command AT+CPLS.

6.6.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CPOL=

[<index>] [,<format>[,<oper>[,<GSM_AcT>,<GSMcomp_Act>,<Utran_Act>]]]

The different possibilities are:

•

•

•

•

AT+CPOL = <index> to delete an entry.

AT+CPOL = , <format> to set the format used by the read command

(AT+CPOL?).

AT+CPOL = , <format>, <oper> to put <oper> in the next free location.

AT+CPOL = <index> , <format> , <oper> to write <oper> in the

<format> at the <index>.

•

AT+CPOL =

<index>,<format>,<oper>,<GSM_AcT>,<GSMcp_Act>,<Utran_Act> to write <oper> in the <format> at the <index> precising the acces technology (in the case of EF_PLMNwact, EF_HPLMNwact or

EF_OPLMNwact is present).

Note: per default if Acces technology parameters are not given, the GSM access technology will be choosen.

The supported format are those of the +COPS command.

The length of this list is limited to 85 entries for

EF_PLMNsel, and 51 for

EF_PLMNwAct, EF_OPLMNwAct, EF_HPLMNwAct. confidential ©

Page: 89 / 478



Command

AT+CPOL?

Note: Ask for preferred list of networks

With only EF_PLMNsel present

AT+CPOL?


With EF_PLMNwAct selected and present

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Possible responses

+CPOL:1,2,26201

+CPOL: 6,2,20810

OK

Note: Preferred list of networks in numeric format (read in EF_PLMNsel)

+CPOL:1,2,26201,1,0,0

+CPOL: 6,2,20810,1,0,0

OK

Note: Preferred list of networks in numeric format (read in EF_PLMNwAct)

GSM acces technology selected

GSM compact acces technology not selected

Utran acces technology not selected

OK AT+CPOL=,0

Note: Select long alphanumeric format

AT+CPOL?



AT+CPOL=7,2,20801

Note: Add a network to the list

AT+CPOL?



AT+CPOL=7

Note: Delete 7 th location

+CPOL: 1,0,”D1-TELEKOM”

+CPOL: 6,0,”F SFR”

OK

Note: Preferred list of networks in long alphanumeric format

OK



+CPOL: 7,0,”Orange F”

OK


OK confidential ©

Page: 90 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Command

AT+CPOL?



Possible responses



OK


AT+CPOL=8,2,77777

Note: Add a new network to the list


AT+CPOL=8,2,77777,0,0,1


With EF_PLMNwact present

OK

OK

Note: Acces technology UTRAN is selected

AT+CPOL=8,2,77777


With EF_PLMNwact present

AT+CPOL?

OK

Note: Per default Acces technology GSM is selected



AT+CPOL=9,0,”Orange F”

Note: Add a new network to the list (text format)

OK

Note: Preferred list of networks in long alphanumeric format but 8 numeric format th entry is unknown so the product edits it in the

AT+CPOL?



+CPOL: 8,2,77777”





+CPOL: 8,2,77777”

+CPOL: 9,0,”Orange F”

OK

Note: Preferred list of networks in long alphanumeric format confidential ©

Page: 91 / 478



Command

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Possible responses

OK

Note: The EF can accept 16 records, and supported format are 0,1 or 2.


<index>: position of the operator record in the sim preferred operator list. Do

AT+CPOL=? to get the maximum index of the selected EF.

<format>:

0 long alphanumeric format for <oper>

1 short alphanumeric format for <oper>

2 numeric format for <oper>

<oper>: characterstring or integer (see <format>) indicating operator identifier.

<GSM_AcT>: GSM access technology

<GSMcomp_Act>: GSM compact access technology

<Utran_Act>: UTRA access technology

0 access technology not selected

1 access technology selected confidential ©

Page: 92 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

6.7 Read operator name +COPN

6.7.1 Description

This command return the list of all operator names (in numeric and alphanumeric format) stored in the module.

6.7.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+COPN

Command response: +COPN: <NumOper>,<AlphaOper>

Command

AT+COPN


Possible responses

+COPN: 23201,”A1”

+COPN: 23203,”A max.”

+COPN: 23207,”A tele.ring”

+COPN: 23205,”one”

…

OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

AT+COPN=? OK


<NumOper> is the operator in numeric format.

<AlphaOper> is the operator in long alphanumeric format (see appendix 19.12

for operator names description) confidential ©

Page: 93 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

7 Security commands

7.1 Enter PIN +CPIN

7.1.1 Description

This command is used to enter the ME passwords (CHV1 / CHV2 / PUK1 /

PUK2, etc.), that are required before any ME functionality can be used.

CHV1/CHV2 is between 4 and 8 digits long, PUK1/PUK2 is only 8 digits long.

If the user application tries to make an outgoing call before the SIM PIN code

(CHV1) has been confirmed, then the product will refuse the “ATD” command with a “+CME ERROR: 11” (SIM PIN required).

The application is responsible for checking the PIN after each reset or power on

– if the PIN was enabled.

7.1.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CPIN=<pin>

Command

AT+CPIN=1234

Note: Enter PIN

AT+CPIN=5678

Note: Enter PIN

Possible responses

OK

Note: PIN code is correct

+CME ERROR: 3

Note: Operation not allowed, PIN previously entered

After 3 unsuccessful attempts to enter the PIN (Personal Identification

Number), the PUK (Personal Unblocking Key) will be required. PUK validation forces the user to enter a new PIN code as a second parameter and this will be the new PIN code if PUK validation succeeds. CHV1 is then enabled if PUK1 is correct. The application therefore uses this command:

AT+CPIN=<Puk>,<NewPin>

Command

AT+CPIN=00000000,1234

Note: Enter PUK and new PIN

AT+CPIN=12345678,1234

Note: Enter PUK and new PIN, 2 nd attempt

Possible responses

+CME ERROR: 16

Note: Incorrect PUK

OK

Note: PUK correct, new PIN stored confidential ©

Page: 94 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

To ascertain which code must be entered (or not), the following query command can be used:

AT+CPIN?

The possible responses are:

+CPIN: READY

+CPIN: SIM PIN

+CPIN: SIM PUK

ME is not pending for any password

CHV1 is required

PUK1 is required

+CPIN: SIM PIN2

+CPIN: SIM PUK2

CHV2 is required

PUK2 is required

SIM lock (phone-to-SIM) is required

+CPIN: PH-SIM PIN

+CPIN: PH-NET PIN Network personnalisation is required

+CME ERROR: <err>

SIM failure (13) absent (10) etc…

Please note that in this case the mobile equipment does not end its response with the OK string.

The response +CME ERROR: 13 (SIM failure) is returned after 10 unsuccessful

PUK attempts. The SIM card is then out of order and must be replaced by a new one.

Example: 3 failed PIN validations + 1 successful PUK validation

AT+CPIN?

+CPIN: SIM PIN

AT+CPIN=1235

+CME ERROR: 16

AT+CPIN=1236

+CME ERROR: 16

AT+CPIN=1237

+CME ERROR: 16

AT+CPIN?

+CPIN: SIM PUK

AT+CPIN=99999999,5678

OK

Read the PIN status

The product requires SIM PIN

First attempt to enter a SIM PIN

Wrong PIN

Second attempt

Wrong PIN

Third attempt

Wrong PIN

Read PIN state

The product requires PUK

The PUK is entered, the new PIN shall be 5678

PUK validation is OK. New Pin is 5678

AT+CPIN?

+CPIN: READY

Read PIN state

The product is ready confidential ©

Page: 95 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

If the user tries to do something which requires PIN2 (CHV2), the product will refuse the action with a “+CME ERROR: 17” (SIM PIN2 required). The product then waits for SIM PIN2 to be given.

Of course, if SIM PIN2 is blocked, SIM PUK2 is required instead of SIM PIN2.

For example, the product needs PIN2 to write in the fixed dialing phonebook

(FDN) , so if SIM PIN2 authentication has not been performed during the current session, SIM PIN2 is required

Command

AT+CPBS=”FD”

Note: Choose FDN

AT+CPBW=5,”01290917”,129,”Jacky”

Note: Write in FDN at location 5

Possible responses

OK

+CME ERROR: 17

Note: SIM PIN2 is required

AT+CPIN=5678

Note: Enter SIM PIN2

AT+CPBW=2,”01290917”,129,”Jacky”



OK

OK

Note: Now writing in FDN is allowed

Please note that the product only requests PIN2 or PUK2 once. Therefore, if they are not entered properly, the next +CPIN? command will return “+CPIN:

READY”.


<pin> Personal Identification Number.

<puk> Personal Unblocking Key needed to change the PIN.

See above conditions of use.

7.2 Enter PIN2 +CPIN2

7.2.1 Description

This specific command is used to validate the PIN2 code (CHV2), or to validate the PUK2 code (UNBLOCK CHV2) and to define a new PIN2 code. confidential ©

Page: 96 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Of course, the +CPIN command allows PIN2 or PUK2 codes to be validated, but only when the last command executed resulted in PIN2 authentication failure.

PIN2 length is between 4 and 8 digits, PUK2 length is 8 digits only.

7.2.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CPIN2=<pin2>

Command

AT+CPIN2=1234

Note: Enter PIN2

AT+CPIN2=5678

Note: Enter PIN2

Possible responses

OK

Note: PIN2 code is correct

+CME ERROR: 3

Note: Operation not allowed, PIN2 previously entered

After 3 unsuccessful attempts, PUK2 will then be required. PUK2 validation forces the user to enter a new PIN2 code as a second parameter and this will be the new PIN2 code if PUK1 validation succeeds. The application therefore uses this command:

AT+CPIN2=<puk2>,<NewPin2>

Command

AT+CPIN2=00000000,1234

Note: Enter PUK2 and new PIN2

Possible responses

+CME ERROR: 16

Note: Incorrect Password (PUK2)

AT+CPIN2=12345678,1234 OK

Note: Enter PUK2 and new PIN2, 2 nd attempt

Note: PUK2 correct, new PIN2 stored

To ascertain which code must be entered (or not), the following query command can be used:

AT+CPIN2?

The possible responses are

+CPIN2: READY

+CPIN2: SIM PIN2

+CPIN2: SIM PUK2

+CME ERROR: <err>

No PIN2 is needed

PIN2 is required

PUK2 is required

Absent (10) etc… confidential ©

Page: 97 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

7.2.3 Defined values:

<pin2> Personal Identification Number 2.

<puk2> Personal Unblocking Key 2 needed to change the PIN2.

<Newpin2>

Note: PIN2 length is between 4 and 8 digits, PUK2 length is 8 digits only. confidential ©

Page: 98 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

7.3 PIN remaining attempt number +CPINC

7.3.1 Description

This specific command is used to get the number of valid attempts for PIN1

(CHV1), PIN2 (CHV2), PUK1 (UNBLOCK CHV1) and PUK2 (UNBLOCK CHV2) identifiers.

7.3.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CPINC

Command

AT+CPINC

Note: Get the number of attempts left

AT+CPINC?

Note: Get current values

AT+CPINC=?


Possible responses

+CPINC: 2,3,10,10

OK

Note: First CHV1 attempt was a failure

+CPINC: 2,3,10,10

OK

Note: First attempt was a failure

OK


<n1>, <n2> are the attempts left for PIN1, PIN2 (0 = blocked, 3 max)

<k1>, <k2> are the attempts left for PUK1, PUK2 (0 = blocked, 10 max)

For this to work, the card should be present at the time of initialization, otherwise an error will be sent (+CME ERROR: 10). confidential ©

Page: 99 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

7.4 Facility lock +CLCK

7.4.1 Description

This command is used by the application to lock, unlock or interrogate an ME or network facility <fac>.

Nota: Test SIM cards (with MCC=001 & MNC=01) doesn’t check “PS”, “PN”,

“PU”, “PP” and “PC” locks.

7.4.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CLCK= <fac>,<mode>[,<passwd>[,<class>] ]

Response syntax: +CLCK: <status> [ ,<class1> ]<CR><LF>+CLCK:

<status>,<class2> [ … ] ] confidential ©

Page: 100 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Command

AT+CLCK=”SC”,1,1234

Note: Enable PIN

AT+CLCK?

Note: Read PIN status

Possible responses

OK

Note: PIN was correct

+CLCK!“PS”,0),(“SC”,0),(“FD”,0),(“PN“,0)

,(“PU“,0),(“PP“,0),(“PC“,0)

OK

Note: PIN is enabled, no SIM lock, no network lock, no information on Call barring

(no longer supported in GSM 07.07)

+CME ERROR: 16

Note: PIN was wrong


Note: Disable PIN

AT+CPIN=1234

Note: Enter PIN

AT+CLCK=?

Note: Request supported facilities

OK

Note: PIN was good

+CLCK:

(“PS”,”SC”,”AO”,”OI”,”OX”,”AI”,”IR”,”AB

”,”AC”,”FD”,”PN”,”PU”,”PP”,”PC”)

AT+CLCK=”PN”,1,12345678

Note: Activate network lock

OK

Note: Supported facilities

OK

Network lock activated

AR+CLCK=”AO”,1,1234,2 OK

Note: Activate all outgoing calls barring for data calls

Note: Call barring is activate

AT+CLCK=”AO”,2

Note: Query BAOC status


Note: Disable PIN

+CLCK: 1,2

OK

Note: BAOC activate for data calls only

+CME ERROR: 521

Note: PIN deactivation is forbidden with this SIM card confidential ©

Page: 101 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005


<fac>: supported facilities

• “PS”: SIM lock facility with a 8 digits password.

• “SC“: PIN enabled (<mode> = 1) / disabled (<mode> = 0)

• “AO”: BAOC (Barr All Outgoing Calls)

• “OI” : BOIC (Barr Outgoing International Calls)

• “OX”: BOIC-exHC (Barr Outgoing. International Calls except to Home

Country)

• “AI” : BAIC (Barr All Incoming Calls)

• “IR” : BIC-Roam (Barr Inc. When Roaming outside Home Country)

• “AB”: All Barring services

• “AG”: All outGoing barring services

• “AC”: All inComing barring services

• “PN”: Network lock with a 8 digits password (NCK).

• “PU”: Network Subset lock with a 8 digits password (NSCK).

• “PP”: Service Provider lock with a 8 digits password (SPCK).

• “PC”: Corporate lock with a 8 digits password (CCK).

• “FD”: SIM Fixed Dialing Numbers (FDN) memory feature (PIN2 is required as <password>)

<mode>

0: unlock the facility

1: lock the facility

2: query status

<class>

1: Voice (telephony)

2: Data (apply to all bearer services)

4: Fax (facsimile services)

8: Short Message service

7: Voice, Data and Fax (Default value)

Any attempt to combine different classes will result in activation / deactivation / interrogation of Voice, Data and Fax. confidential ©

Page: 102 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

If <class> is omitted, default value 7 will be used.

Password maximum length is given with the AT+CPWD=? Command.

Note: It will not possible to lock the FDN phonebook if this one is not loaded. confidential ©

Page: 103 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

7.5 Change password +CPWD

7.5.1 Description

This command is used by the application to change a password (PIN, call barring, NCK, etc.). The facility values (<fac>) are the same as for the +CLCK command with a “P2” facility to manage SIM PIN2.

For the network lock (“PN”), unlocking is forbidden after 10 failed attempts to disable (unlock) the network lock with an incorrect password.

7.5.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CPWD= <fac>, <oldpwd>, <newpwd>

Command

AT+CPWD=?


AT+CPWD=”SC”,1234,5555

Note: Change PIN

AT+CPWD=”SC”,1234,5555

Note: Change PIN

AT+CPIN=5555

Note: Enter PIN

AT+CPWD=”PN”,12345678,00000000

Note: Change NCK

Possible responses

+CPWD:

(“PS”,8),(“SC”,8),(“AO”,4),(“OI”,4),(“OX”,4),(“AI”,

4),(“IR”,4),(“AB”,4),(“AG”,4),(“AC”,4),(“P2”,8),(“F

D”,8),(”PN”,8),(”PU”,8),(”PP”,8),(”PC”,8)

OK

Note: CHV1/CHV2 must be on 8 digits maximum

(4 mini)

For call barring, on 4 digits maximum

OK


+CME ERROR: 16

Note: PIN was wrong

OK


OK

Note: NCK changed for net lock confidential ©

Page: 104 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005


<fac>: facility

• “PS”

• “SC”

• “AO”

• “OI”

• “OX”

• “AI”

• “IR“

• “AB”

• “AG”

• “AC”

• “P2”

• “FD”

• ”N”

• ”U”

• ”P”

• ”C”

<oldpwd>, <newpwd>

On 4 or up to 8 or 16 digits according to the facility. confidential ©

Page: 105 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

8 Phonebook commands

Please refer to §3.3 for details on numbers length.

8.1 Select phonebook memory storage +CPBS

8.1.1 Description

This command selects phonebook memory storage.

Note on ADN and FDN activation: when FDN has been activated with the

+CLCK command, the selection of ADN phonebook is possible only if ADN status bit3 is set to 1 (EF file “ readable and updatable when invalidated”).

Please refer to Recommendation 3GPP 11.11 for more details.

8.1.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CPBS=<pb>[,<pin2>]

Note: <pin2> can be used only for selecting “FD” phonebook.

Command

AT+CPBS=”SM”

Note: Select ADN phonebook

AT+CPBS=?


AT+CPBS?

Note: Status

AT+CPBS=”FD”,1234

Note: Select FDN phonebook

Possible responses

OK

Note: ADN phonebook is selected

+CPBS:

(”SM”,”LD”,”MC”,”ON”,”ME”,”RC”,”MT”,

”SN”)

OK

Note: only “EN” phonebook is not supported with this SIM card.

+CPBS:”SM”,10,20

OK

Note: ADN phonebook selected, 10 locations used, 20 locations available

OK

Note: FDN phonebook is selected

Selection of ADN phonebook when FDN is active is SIM dependent.

Note: Selection of “FD” phonebook with <pin2>, when <pin2> is already verified, will give error CME ERROR: 3 confidential ©

Page: 106 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005


<pb>: phonebook

• “SM”: ADN (SIM phonebook)

• “FD”: FDN (SIM Fix Dialing, restricted phonebook)

• “ON”: MSISDN (SIM own numbers)

• “EN”: EN (SIM emergency number)

• “LD”: LND (combined ME and SIM last dialing phonebook)

• “MC”: MSD (ME missed calls list)

• “ME”: ME (ME phonebook)

• “MT”: MT (combined ME and SIM phonebook)

• “RC”: LIC (ME received calls list)

• “SN”:SDN (Services dialing phonebook)

<pin2>: Personal Identification Number 2. confidential ©

Page: 107 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

8.2 Read phonebook entries +CPBR

8.2.1 Description

This command returns phonebook entries for a range of locations from the current phonebook memory storage selected with +CPBS.

Note: for all phonebook read commands (+CPBR, +CPBF, +CPBN, +CPBP, +CNUM), the TON/NPI MSB of each number is set to 1 (ex: a TON/NPI stored as 17 is displayed as 145).

8.2.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CPBR=<first_entry>[,<last_entry>]

Response syntax:

+CPBR: <location>, <number>, <type (TON/NPI)>, <Text>

Command

AT+CPBR=?

Note: Test command

AT+CPBR=12,14

Note: Read entries from 12 to 14

AT+CPBR=10

Note: Read entry 10

AT+CPBR=11

Note: Read entry 11 (UCS2 format)

AT+CPBR=52

Note: Read entry 52 (wrong)

Possible responses

+CPBR: (1-50),60,10

OK

Note: 50 locations (from 1 to 50), max length for phone number is 60 digits, 10 characters max for the text.

+CPBR: 12,”112”,129,”Emergency”

+CPBR: 13,”+331290909”,145,”Fred”

+CPBR: 14,”0146290808”,129,”Zazi”

OK

Note: Display locations 12,13,14 with location, number, type (TON/NPI), Text

+CPBR:10,”0146290921”,129,”Rob”

OK

Note: Display location 10

+CPBR:11,”0146290921”,129,”8000010002FFF

F”

OK

Note: Display location 11

+CME ERROR: 21

Note: Invalid index confidential ©

Page: 108 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005


<first_entry>, <last_entry> location (or range of locations) where to read phonebook entry.

<type (TON/NPI)>

Type of address byte in integer format. Value is 145 if the dialing string

(<number> response value) includes the international access code character ‘+’, else value is 129. confidential ©

Page: 109 / 478



8.3 Find phonebook entries +CPBF

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

8.3.1 Description

This command returns phonebook entries with alphanumeric fields starting with a given string. The AT+CPBF= “” command can be used to display all phonebook entries sorted in alphabetical order.

This command is not allowed for”D“, ”C“,”N” phonebooks and for the “EN” phonebook, which does not contain alphanumeric fields.

It is possible to use this command with UCS2 strings. If a wrong UCS2 format is entered, the string is considered as an ASCII string.

8.3.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CPBF=<string>

Command

AT+CPBF=?

Note: Test command

AT+CPBF=“E”

Note: Read entries with “E”

Possible responses

+CPBF: 60,10

OK

Note: Max length for phone number is 60 digits, 10 characters for the text.

+CPBF: 12,”112”,129,”Emergency”

+CPBF: 15,”+331290101”,145,”Eric”

OK

Note: Display locations with text field starting with “E”

AT+CPBF=”H”

Note: Read entries with “H”

+CME ERROR: 22

Note: Entry not found

AT+CPBF=”800001FFFF” +CPBF: 11,

”0146290921”,129,”8000010002FFFF”

Note: Read entries starting with 0001

UCS2 character

OK

Note: Display locations with text field starting with 0001 UCS2 character

AT+CPBF=”8045C” +CME ERROR: 22

Note: Read entries with “8045C” (ASCII format)

Note: Entry not found. The string has a wrong UCS2 format, it is therefore considered as an ASCII string confidential ©

Page: 110 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005


<string>

Searched starting string (depends on the format of data stored in the phonebooks)

8.4 Write phonebook entry +CPBW

8.4.1 Description

This command writes a phonebook entry in location number

<index> in the current phonebook memory storage.

“RC” and “MC” phonebooks could be only erased by +CPBW. Adding field and/or modifying field is not allowed for these phonebooks.

This command is not allowed for “EN”, “LD”, “MC”, “RC”, “MT”, “SN” phonebooks, which can not be written. confidential ©

Page: 111 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

8.4.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CPBW=<index>[,<number>[,<type>[,<text>]]]

Note: <number> usage (phone number length) depends on SIM capabilities

(EF

EXT1

file availability)

Command

AT+CPBW=?

Note: Test command

AT+CPBW= 3

Note: Erase location 3

AT+CPBW=5,”112”,129,”SOS”

Note: Write at location 5

Possible responses

+CPBW: (1-50),60,(129,145),10

OK

Note: 50 locations, phone number = 60 digits max, TON/NPI of 129 or 145, text length = 10.

OK

Note: Location 3 erased

OK

Note: Location 5 written

AT+CPBW=5,”01290917”,129,”Jacky”

Note: Overwrite location 5

OK

Note: Location 5 overwritten

AT+CPBW=6,”01292349”,129,”80004100

42”

OK

Note: write location 6 (UCS2 format for the

<text> field)

Note: Location 6 is written

AT+CPBW=,”+33145221100”,145,”SOS”

Note: Write at the first location available

AT+CPBW=,”0345221100”,129,”SOS”

Note: Write at the first location available

OK

Note: First location available is written

+CME ERROR: 20

Note: Phonebook full

AT+CPBW=57,”112”,129,”WM”

Note: Write at location 57 (wrong)

+CME ERROR: 21

Note: Invalid index

AT+CPBW=7,”012345678901234567890”

,129,”WAVE”

+CME ERROR: 26

Note: Write at location 7 a phone number exceeding the limit (21 digits)

Note: Phone number too long

AT+CPBW=7,”0122334455”,129,”WAVEC

OM TEL”

+CME ERROR: 24

Note: Write at location 7 along text (11 characters)

Note: Text too long confidential ©

Page: 112 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

AT+CPBW=8,”01292349”,129,”80xyz”

Note: write location

OK

Note: Location 8 is written. The string has a wrong UCS2 format, it is therefore considered as an ASCII string

When the fixed dialing phonebook (FDN) is locked, this command is not allowed. Moreover, when the FDN is unlocked, PIN2 is required to write in the

FDN phonebook.

But if PIN2 authentication has been performed during the current session, the

+CPBW command with FDN is allowed.

Command

AT+CPBS=”FD”

Note: Choose FDN

AT+CPBW=5,”01290917”,129,”Jacky”


AT+CPIN?

AT+CPIN=5678

Note: Enter SIM PIN2

AT+CPBW=5,”01290917”,129,”Jacky”


Possible responses

OK

+CME ERROR: 17


SIM PIN2


OK

OK

Note: Writing in FDN is now allowed


<index> memory. integer type value depending on the capacity of the phonebook

<number>

<type> phone number in ASCII format.

TON/NPI (Type of address byte in integer format).

Note: Value is 145 if the dialing string (<number> response value) includes the international access code character ‘+’, else value is 129 (ex: a <type> value of 17 will be written as 145).

Note 1:

For the <text> parameter all strings starting with “80” , “81” or “82” are considered in UCS2 format. See the APPENDIX E (Coding of Alpha fields in the

SIM for UCS2).

Note 2: confidential ©

Page: 113 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

The +CSCS (Select Character set) command does not affect the format for phonebook entries.

Note 3: The maximum length of the phone number will depend upon free

memory available in SIM (Please refer to §3.3 for details on number length).

confidential ©

Page: 114 / 478



8.5 Phonebook phone search +CPBP

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

8.5.1 Description

This specific command orders the product to search the phonebook for an item with the same phone number as that defined in the parameter.

8.5.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CPBP=<PhoneNumber>


AT+CPBP=”+331290101” +CPBP: 15,”+331290101”,145,”Eric”

Note: Search entries corresponding to this phone number

OK

Note: Display the entry corresponding to the specified phone number

AT+CPBP=”+331290101” +CPBP: 15,”01290101”,129,”Eric”


OK


AT+CPBP=”01290202” +CPBP: 15,”+331290202”,145,”David”


OK


AT+CPBP=”+331288575”


+CPBP:

15,”+331290101”,145,”8045682344FFFF

” (UCS2 format)

OK


AT+CPBP=”0129” +CME ERROR: 22


Note: Entry not found confidential ©

Page: 115 / 478




<PhoneNumber> coded according to GSM 07.07 or GSM 07.05.

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008


Page: 116 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

8.6 Move action in phonebook +CPBN

8.6.1 Description

This specific command instructs the product to make a forward or backward move in the phonebook (in alphabetical order).

This command is not allowed for the “EN” phonebook which does not contain alphanumeric fields.

8.6.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CPBN=<mode>

Command

AT+CPBN=?

Note: Test command

AT+CPBN=0

Note: Read the first location

AT+CPBN=2

Note: Read the next location

AT+CPBN=2


AT+CPBN=3

Note: Read the previous location

AT+CPBN=1

Note: Read the last location

AT+CPBN=2


Possible responses

+CPBN: (0-5)

OK

Note: Possible modes

+CPBN: 15,”+331290101”,145,”Eric”

OK

Note: Display the first location

+CPBN: 5,”+33147658987”,145,”Frank”

OK

Note: Display the second location

+CPBN: 6,”+331290302”,145,”Marc”

OK

Note: Display the third location

+CPBN: 5,”+33147658987”,145,”Frank”

OK

Note: Display the second location

+CPBN: 6,”+331290302”,145,”Marc”

OK

Note: Display the last location

+CPBN: 15,”+331290101”,145,”Eric”

OK

Note: Display the first location confidential ©

Page: 117 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Using mode 4 and 5 with +CPBF command and CPBW:

Command

AT+CPBF=”Er”

Note: Find ”Er” in phonebook

AT+CPBN=2


Possible responses

+CPBF: 15,”+331290101”,145,”Eric”

OK

Note: Display the location

+CPBN: 5,”+33147658987”,145,”Frank”

OK

Note: Display the following location

AT+CPBF=”Er”

Note: Find ”Er” in phonebook

AT+CPBN=4

Note: Get the last location read

+CPBF: 15,”+331290101”,145,”Eric”

OK

Note: Display the location

+CPBN: 15,”+331290101”,145,”Eric”

OK

Note: Display the last location read

AT+CPBW=,”0146290800”,129,”WM” OK

Note: Write an item at the first location available

Note: No information about this location

AT+CPBN=4


+CPBN: 15,”+331290101”,145,”Eric”

OK

Note: Display the last location read

AT+CPBN=5 +CPBN: 38,”0146290800,129,”WM”

Note: Display the last item written with its location

OK

Note: Display the last item written with its location

AT+CPBN=4

Note: Get the last item read

+CPBN: 38,”0146290800,129,”WM”

OK

Note: Now the last item read is the last written item too

AT+CPBF=”800041FFFF”

Note: Find”800041” in phonebook

+CPBF:

15,”+3312345”,145,”8000414339FFFF”

OK

Note: Display this location

AT+CPBN=4


+CPBN:

15,”+3312345”,145,”8000414339FFFF”

OK

Note: Display the last location read confidential ©

Page: 118 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Please note that the AT+CPBN=5 command is useful after an AT+CPBW command used without a location.


<mode>

2: Next valid item in alphabetical order

3: Previous valid item in alphabetical order

4: Last item read (usable only if a read operation has been performed on the current phonebook since the end of initialization (+WIND: 4))

5: Last item written (usable only if a write operation has been performed on the current phonebook since the end of initialization (+WIND: 4)) confidential ©

Page: 119 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

8.7 Subscriber number +CNUM

8.7.1 Description

This command returns the subscriber MSISDN(s).

If the subscriber has different MSISDNs for different services, each MSISDN is returned in a separate line.

8.7.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CNUM

Response syntax: +CNUM: <alpha1>, <number1>, <type1>

<CR><LF> +CNUM: <alpha2>, <number2>, <type2> ….

Command

AT+CNUM

Note: Get MSISDN(s)

AT+CNUM=?

Possible responses

+CNUM:”Phone”, “0612345678”,129

+CNUM:”Fax”, “0687654321”,129

+CNUM: “80001002FFFF”, “+0183773”,

145 (UCS2 format)

OK

Note: MSISDNs

OK


<alphax> optional alphanumeric string associated with <numberx>

<numberx> string type phone number with format as specified by <typex>

<typex> type of address byte in integer format confidential ©

Page: 120 / 478



8.8 Avoid phonebook init +WAIP

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

8.8.1 Description

This specific command allows the initialization of all phonebooks to be inhibited during subsequent boots.

8.8.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+WAIP=<mode>


AT+WAIP?

Note: Current values ?

AT+WAIP=?

Note: Possible values ?

+WAIP:0

OK

Note: Default value (init phonebooks)

+WAIP: (0,1)

OK

Note: Disable / enable

AT+WAIP =1 OK

Note: Inhibit initialization of phonebooks

(next boot)

Note: no answer

AT&W

Note: Save modifications in EEPROM

Caution: the given value should be stored in EEPROM. Therefore, the AT&W command must be used to save the new <mode> value.

Note:

No phonebook commands are allowed if +WAIP=1 (after boot).

If a phonebook command is entered, a “+CME ERROR: 3” is returned.


<mode>

0: Normal initialization (with phonebooks)

1: No phonebook initialization confidential ©

Page: 121 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008


Page: 122 / 478



8.9 Delete Calls Phonebook +WDCP

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

8.9.1 Description

This specific command allows to delete the calls listed in some phonebooks.

8.9.2 Syntax

Command

AT+WDCP?

Possible responses

OK

AT+WDCP=?


+WDCP: (“LD”,”MC”,”RC”)

OK

Note: Identifiers of the phonebooks supporting a list of calls

AT+WDCP=”LD” OK

Note: Delete all the content of Last Dialing phonebook.

Note: Last Dialing phonebook is now empty.


<calls phonebook>

“LD”: SIM (ME extended) Last dialing phonebook

“MC”: ME missed calls list phonebook

“RC”: ME received calls list phonebook confidential ©

Page: 123 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

8.10 Set Voice Mail Number +CSVM

8.10.1 Description

This commands allows to set/get and enable/disable the voice mail number in memory.

8.10.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CSVM=<mode>[,<number>[,<type>]]

Command

AT+CSVM?

Possible responses

+CSVM: 1,”660”,129

Note: Get mail number

OK

Note: Voice mail number “660” is activated

+CSVM: (0-1),(129,145) AT+CSVM=?


OK

Note: activation/deactivation and format

129 & 145 are supported

AT+CSVM=0,”888”,129

Note: Disable Voice Mail number and change value to “888”.

OK

<mode>

0: Disable the voice mail number

1: Enable the voice mail number

<number>

Phone number in ASCII format.

<type>

TON/NPI (Type of address byte in integer format).

Note: Value is 145 if the dialing string (<number> response value) includes the international access code character ‘+’, else. value is 129 (ex: a <type> value of 17 will be written as 145). confidential ©

Page: 124 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

9 Short Messages commands

9.1 Parameters definition

<da> Destination Address, coded like GSM 03.40 TP-DA

<dcs> Data Coding Scheme, coded like in document [5].

<dt> Discharge Time in string format:

“yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss±zz”(Year [00-99], Month [01-12],

Day [01-31], Hour, Minute, Second and Time Zone [quarters of an

<fo> hour] )

First Byte, coded like SMS-SUBMIT first byte in document [4], default value is 17 for SMS-SUBMIT

<index> Place of storage in memory.

<length> Text mode (+CMGF=1): number of characters

PDU mode (+CMGF=0): length of the TP data unit in bytes

<mem1> Memory used to list, read and delete messages (+CMGL, +CMGR and +CMGD).

<mem2> Memory used to write and send messages (+CMGW, +CMSS).

<mid> CBM Message Identifier.

<mr> Message Reference.

<pid> Protocol Identifier.

SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by GSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal format, coded as specified in doc [4] For CBS: GSM

03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal format

<sca> Service Center Address

Service Center Time Stamp in string format:

“yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss±zz”

(Year/Month/Day,Hour:Min:Seconds±TimeZone)

<sn>

<st>

CBM Serial Number

Status of a SMS-STATUS-REPORT

<stat> Status of message in memory.

<tooa> Type-of-Address of <oa>.

<tora> Type-of-Address of <ra>. confidential ©

Page: 125 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

<tosca> Type-of-Address of <sca>.

<total1> Number of message locations in <mem1>.

<total2> Number of messages locations in <mem2.

<used1> Total number of messages locations in <mem1>.

<used2> Total number of messages locations in <mem2.

<vp> Validity Period of the short message, default value is 167

9.2 Select message service +CSMS

9.2.1 Description

The supported services are originated (SMS-MO) and terminated short message (SMS-MT) + Cell Broadcast Message (SMS-CB) services.

9.2.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CSMS=<service>

Command

AT+CSMS=0

Possible responses

+CSMS: 1,1,1

OK

Note: SMS AT command Phase 2 version

4.7.0

Note: SMS-MO, SMS-MT and SMS-CB supported

AT+CSMS=1

Note: SMS AT command Phase 2 +

AT+CSMS?

Note: Current values ?

+CSMS: 1,1,1

Note: SMS-MO, SMS-MT and SMS-CB supported

+CSMS: 0,1,1,1

OK

Note: GSM 03.40 and 03.41 (SMS AT command Phase 2 version 4.7.0

AT+CSMS=?

Note: Possible services

+CSMS: (0,1)

OK


<service>

0: SMS AT commands are compatible with GSM 07.05 Phase 2 version

4.7.0.

1: SMS AT commands are compatible with GSM 07.05 Phase 2 + version . confidential ©

Page: 126 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

9.3 New Message Acknowledgement +CNMA

9.3.1 Description

This command allows reception of a new message routed directly to the TE to be acknowledged.

In TEXT mode, only positive acknowledgement to the network (RP-ACK) is possible.

In PDU mode, either positive (RP-ACK) or negative (RP-ERROR) acknowledgement to the network is possible.

Acknowledge with +CNMA is possible only if the +CSMS parameter is set to 1

(+CSMS=1) when a +CMT or +CDS indication is shown (see +CNMI command).

If no acknowledgement is given within the network timeout, an RP-ERROR is sent to the network, the <mt> and <ds> parameters of the +CNMI command are then reset to zero (do not show new message indication).

9.3.2 Syntax

Command syntax in text mode

:

AT+CNMA

Command syntax in PDU mode

:

AT+CNMA [ = <n> [ , <length> [ <CR>

PDU is entered

<ctrl-Z / ESC> ] ] ]

Note:

PDU is entered using <ackpdu> format instead of <pdu> format (e.g.. SMSC address field is not present). confidential ©

Page: 127 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Example of acknowledgement of a new message in TEXT mode


AT+CSMS=1

Note: SMS AT commands compatible with

GSM 07.05 Phase 2 + version

OK

AT+CMGF=1

Note: Set TEXT mode

AT+CNMI=2,2,0,0,0

Note: <mt>=2

OK

Note: TEXT mode valid

OK

+CMT: “123456”,”98/10/01,12:30

00+00”,129,4

,32,240, “15379”,129,5<CR><LF>

Received message

Note: message received

AT+CNMA

Note: acknowledge the message received

AT+CNMA

Note: try to acknowledge again

OK

Note: send positive acknowledgement to the network

+CMS ERROR: 340

Note: no +CNMA acknowledgment expected confidential ©

Page: 128 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Example of acknowledgement of a new message in PDU mode:


AT+CSMS=1

Note: SMS AT commands compatible with

GSM 07.05 Phase 2 + version

OK

AT+CMGF=0

Note: Set PDU mode

AT+CNMI=2,2,0,0,0

Note: <mt>=2

OK

Note: PDU mode valid

OK

+CMT: ,29

07913366003000F1240B913366920547

F30000003003419404800B506215D42E

CFE7E17319


OK AT+CNMA=2,2<CR>

>00D3 <Ctrl-Z>

Note: Negative ACK to the SMS.

Reason is: memory capacity excedeed

AT+CNMA=2,2<CR> OK

>00D0 <Ctrl-Z>


Reason is: SIM memory storage is full

AT+CNMA=2,2<CR>

>00D2 <Ctrl-Z>


Reason is: Error in MS

AT+CNMA=2,2<CR>

>00FF <Ctrl-Z>


Unspecified error

OK

OK


<n>: Type of acknowledgement in PDU mode

0: send RP-ACK without PDU (same as TEXT mode)

1: send RP-ACK with optional PDU message

2: send RP-ERROR with optional PDU message

<length>: Length of the PDU message confidential ©

Page: 129 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Please refer to GSM 03.40 Recommandation for other PDU negative acknowledgement codes. confidential ©

Page: 130 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

9.4 Preferred Message Storage +CPMS

9.4.1 Description

This command allows the message storage area to be selected (for reading, writing, etc).

9.4.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CPMS=<mem1>,[<mem2>]

Command

AT+CPMS=?

Note: Possible message storages

AT+CPMS?

Note: Read

AT+CPMS=”AM”

Note: Select false message storage

AT+CPMS=”BM”

Note: Select CBM message storage

AT+CPMS?

Note: Read

Possible responses

+CPMS: ((“SM”,”BM”,”SR”),(“SM”))

OK

Note:

Read, list, delete: SMS, CBM or SMS

Status Report

Write, send: SMS

+CPMS: “SM”,3, 10,”SM”,3,10

OK

Note: Read, write…SMS from/to SIM

3 SMS are stored in SIM. 10 is the total memory available in SIM

+CMS ERROR: 302

+CPMS: 2,20,3,10

OK

Note: Read, list, delete CBM from RAM 2

CBM are stored in RAM

+CPMS: “BM”,2,20,”SM”,3,10

OK

Note:

Read list, delete CBM from RAM

Write SMS to SIM confidential ©

Page: 131 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005


<mem1>: Memory used to list, read and delete messages. It can be:

-“SM”: SMS message storage in SIM (default)

-“BM”: CBM message storage (in volatile memory).

-“SR”: Status Report message storage (in SIM if the EF-SMR file exists, otherwise in the ME non volatile memory)

Note:

“SR” ME non volatile memory is cleared when another SIM card is inserted. It is kept, even after a reset, while the same SIM card is used.

<mem2>: Memory used to write and send messages

- “SM” : SMS message storage in SIM (default).

If the command is correct, the following message indication is sent:

+CPMS: <used1>,<total1>,<used2>,<total2>

When <mem1> is selected, all following +CMGL, +CMGR and +CMGD commands are related to the type of SMS stored in this memory.

9.5 Preferred Message Format +CMGF

9.5.1 Description

The message formats supported are text mode and PDU mode.

In PDU mode, a complete SMS Message including all header information is given as a binary string (in hexadecimal format). Therefore, only the following set of characters is allowed: {‘0’,’1’,’2’,’3’,’4’,’5’,’6’,’7’,’8’,’9’, ‘A’,

‘B’,’C’,’D’,’E’,’F’}. Each pair or character is converted to a byte (e.g.: ‘41’ is converted to the ASCII character ‘A’, whose ASCII code is 0x41 or 65).

In Text mode, all commands and responses are in ASCII characters.

The selected format is stored in EEPROM by the +CSAS command. confidential ©

Page: 132 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

9.5.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CMGF=<mode>

Command

AT+CMGF?

Note: Current message format

AT+CMGF=?

No e: Possible message format

Example, sending an SMS Message in PDU mode

Possible responses

+CMGF:1

OK

Note: Text mode

+CMGF: (0,1)

OK

Note: Text or PDU modes are available

Command

AT+CMGF=0

Note: Set PDU mode

Possible responses

OK

Note: PDU mode valid

AT+CMGS=14<CR>

0001030691214365000004C9E9340B

+CMGS: 4

OK

Note: Send complete MSG in PDU mode, no SC address

Note: MSG correctly sent, <mr> is returned


<mode> PDU or text mode

0 PDU mode

1 Text mode

The <pdu> message is composed of the SC address (00 means no SC address given, use default SC address read with +CSCA command) and the TPDU message.

In this example, the length in bytes of the TPDU buffer is 14, coded as GSM

03.40

In this case the TPDU is: 0x01 0x03 0x06 0x91 0x21 0x43 0x65 0x00 0x00

0x04 0xC9 0xE9 0x34 0x0B, which means regarding GSM 03.40: confidential ©

Page: 133 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

<fo> 0x01 (SMS-SUBMIT, no validity period)

<mr> (TP-MR) 0x03 (Message Reference)

<da> (TP-DA) 0x06 0x91 0x21 0x43 0x65 (destination address

+123456)

<pid> (TP-PID) 0x00 (Protocol Identifier)

<dcs> (TP-DCS) 0x00 (Data Coding Scheme: 7 bits alphabet)

<length> (TP-UDL) 0x04 (User Data Length, 4 characters of text)

TP-UD 0xC9 0xE9 0x34 0x0B (User Data: ISSY)

TPDU in hexadecimal format must be converted into two ASCII characters. For example, the byte 0x2A is presented to the ME as two characters ‘2’ (ASCII 50) and ‘A’ (ASCII 65). confidential ©

Page: 134 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

9.6 Save Settings +CSAS

9.6.1 Description

All settings specified by the +CSCA and +CSMP commands are stored in

EEPROM if the SIM card is a Phase 1 card or in the SIM card if it is a Phase 2

SIM card.

9.6.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CSAS


AT+CSAS OK

Note: Store +CSCA and +CSMP parameters

Note: Parameters saved


No parameter

9.7 Restore settings +CRES

9.7.1 Description

All settings specified in the +CSCA and +CSMP commands are restored from

EEPROM if the SIM card is Phase 1 or from the SIM card if it is a Phase 2 one.

9.7.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CRES


AT+CRES OK

Note: Restore +CSCA and +CSMP parameters

Note: Parameters restored



Page: 135 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

9.8 Show text mode parameters +CSDH

9.8.1 Description

This command gives additional information on text mode result codes. These informations can be found in description of the +CMT, +CMGR, +CMGL commands and responses.

9.8.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CSDH=<n>

Command

AT+CSDH=0

Note: Set value to “do not show”

AT+CSDH?

Note: Current value

Possible responses

OK

+CSDH: 0

OK

Note: Do not show header values


<n>: show indicator

• 0: do not show header values

• 1: show the values in result codes confidential ©

Page: 136 / 478



9.9 New message indication +CNMI

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

9.9.1 Description

This command selects the procedure for message reception from the network.

9.9.2 Syntax:

Command syntax: AT+CNMI=<mode>,<mt>,<bm>,<ds>,<bfr>

Command

AT+CNMI=2,1,0,0,0

Note: <mt>=1

Possible responses

OK

AT+CNMI=2,2,0,0,0

Note: <mt>=2

AT+CMTI: “SM”,1


OK

+CMT:

00+00”,129,4

,32,240, “15379”,129,5<CR><LF>


AT+CNMI=2,0,0,1,0

Note: <ds>=1

OK

AT+CMGS=”+33146290800”<CR>

Happy Birthday !<ctrl-Z>

Note: Send a message in text mode

+CMGS: 7

OK

Note: Successful transmission

+CDS: 2, 116, ”+33146290800”, 145,

“98/10/01,12:30:07+04”, “98/10/01

12:30:08+04”, 0

Note: message was correctly delivered


<mode>: controls the processing of unsolicited result codes confidential ©

Page: 137 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

0: Buffer unsolicited result codes in the TA. If TA result code buffer is full, indications can be buffered in some other place or the oldest indications may be discarded and replaced with the new received indications

1: Discard indication and reject new received message unsolicited result codes when TA-TE link is reserved. Otherwise forward them directly to the TE

2: Buffer unsolicited result codes in the TA when TA-TE link is reserved and flush them to the TE after reservation. Otherwise forward them directly to the

TE

3: Forward unsolicited result codes directly to the TE. TA-TE link specific inband used to embed result codes and data when TA is in on-line data mode

Important note: only <mode>=2 is supported.

Any other value for <mode> (0,1 or 3) is accepted (return code will be

OK), but the processing of unsolicited result codes will be the same as with<mode>=2. confidential ©

Page: 138 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

<mt>: sets the result code indication routing for SMS-DELIVER indications.

Default is 1.

0: No SMS-DELIVER indications are routed.

1: SMS-DELIVERs are routed using unsolicited code: +CMTI: “SM”,<index>

2: SMS-DELIVERs (except class 2 messages) are routed using unsolicited code: if PDU mode:

+CMT: [<alpha>], <length> <CR> <LF> <pdu> if text mode:

+CMT: <oa>,[<alpha>], <scts> [,<tooa>, <fo>, <pid>, <dcs>,

<sca>, <tosca>, <length>] <CR><LF><data>

3: Class 3 SMS-DELIVERS are routed directly using code in <mt>=2 ; Other classes messages result in indication <mt>=1

<bm>: defines the rules for storing the received CBMs (Cell Broadcast

Message) types. They depend also on the coding scheme (text or PDU) and the setting of Select CBM Types (see +CSCB command). Default is 0.

0: No CBM indications are routed to the TE. The CBMs are stored.

1: The CBM is stored and an indication of the memory location is routed to the customer application using unsolicited result code: +CBMI: “BM”, <index>

2: New CBMs are routed directly to the TE using unsolicited result code.

If PDU mode:

+CBM: <length><CR><LF><pdu> or

If text mode:

+CBM:<sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<page>,<pages> <CR><LF> <data>

3: Class 3 CBMs: as <bm>=2.

Other classes CBMs: as <bm>=1.

<ds> for SMS-STATUS-REPORTs. Default is 0.

0: No SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed.

1: SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed using unsolicited code:

If PDU mode:

+CDS: <length> <CR> <LF> <pdu> (PDU mode) or

If text mode:

+CDS: <fo>,<mr>, [<ra>] , [<tora>], <scts>,<dt>,<st> (Text mode)

2: SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are stored and routed using the unsolicited result code: +CDSI: “SR”,<index> confidential ©

Page: 139 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

<bfr> Default is 0.

0: TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is flushed to the TE when <mode> = 1 to 3 is entered (OK response shall be given before flushing the codes)

1: TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is cleared when <mode> 1…3 is entered.

9.10 Read message +CMGR

9.10.1 Description

This command allows the application to read stored messages. The messages are read from the memory selected by +CPMS command.

9.10.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CMGR=<index>

Response syntax for text mode:

+CMGR:<stat>,<oa>,[<alpha>,] <scts> [,<tooa>,<fo>,

<pid>,<dcs>,<sca>,<tosca>,<length>] <CR><LF> <data> (for SMS-DELIVER only)

+CMGR: <stat>,<da>,[<alpha>,] [,<toda>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>, [<vp>], <sca>,

<tosca>,<length>]<CR><LF> <data> (for SMS-SUBMIT only)

+CMGR: <stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st> (for SMS-

STATUS-REPORT only)

Response syntax for PDU mode:

+CMGR: <stat>, [<alpha>] ,<length> <CR><LF> <pdu>

A message read with status “REC UNREAD” will be updated in memory with the status “REC READ”.

Note: the <stat> parameter for SMS Status Reports is always “READ”. confidential ©

Page: 140 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Example:

Command

AT+CMGR=1

Note: Read the message

Possible responses

+CMTI: “SM”,1

Note: New message received

+CMGR: “REC UNREAD”,”0146290800”,

”98/10/01,18:22:11+00”,<CR><LF>

ABCdefGHI

OK

AT+CMGR=1

Note: Read the message again

+CMGR: “REC READ”,”0146290800”,

”98/10/01,18:22:11+00”,<CR><LF>

ABCdefGHI

OK

Note: Message is read now

AT+CMGR=2

Note: Read at a wrong index

AT+CMGF=0 ;+CMGR=1

Note: In PDU mode

+CMS ERROR: 321

Note: Error: invalid index

+CMGR: 2,,<length> <CR><LF><pdu>

OK

Note: Message is stored but unsent, no

<alpha>field

AT+CMGF=1;+CPMS=”SR”;+CNMI=,,,2 OK

Reset to text mode, set read memory to

“SR”, and allow storage of further SMS

Status Report into “SR” memory

AT+CMSS=3

Send an SMS previously stored

+CMSS: 160

OK

AT+CMGR=1

Read the SMS Status Report

New SMS Status Report stored in “SR” memory at index 1

+CMGR: “REC UNREAD”,6,160,

“+33612345678”,129,”01/05/31,15:15:0

9+00”, “01/05/31,15:15:09+00”,0

OK

See paragraph 9.1.

confidential ©

Page: 141 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

9.11 List message +CMGL

9.11.1 Description

This command allows the application to read stored messages, by indicating the type of the message to read. The messages are read from the memory selected by the +CPMS command.

9.11.2 Syntax

Command syntax

: AT+CMGL=<stat>

Response syntax for text mode:

+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,<da/oa>,[<alpha>], [<scts>, <tooa/toda>, <length>]

<CR><LF><data> (for SMS-DELIVER and SMS-SUBMIT, may be followed by other <CR><LF>+CMGL:<index>…)

+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st> (for

SMS-STATUS-REPORT only, may be followed by other

<CR><LF>+CMGL:<index> …)

Response syntax for PDU mode:

+CMGL: <index>,<stat>, [<alpha>], <length> <CR><LF> <pdu> (for SMS-

DELIVER, SMS-SUBMIT and SMS-STATUS-REPORT, may be followed by other

<CR><LF>+CMGL:<index>…) confidential ©

Page: 142 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Command

AT+CMGL=“REC UNREAD”

Note: List unread messages in text mode

AT+CMGL=”REC READ”

Note: List read messages in text mode

Possible responses

+CMGL: 1,”REC

UNREAD”,”0146290800”,,

<CR><LF> I will be late

+CMGL: 3,”REC UNREAD”, “46290800”,

<CR><LF>See you tonight !

OK

Note: 2 messages are unread, these messages will then have their status changed to “REC READ”

+CMGL: 2,”REC READ”,”0146290800”,,

<CR><LF> Keep cool

OK

AT+CMGL=”STO SENT” OK

Note: List stored and sent messages in text mode

Note: No message found

AT+CMGL=1

Note: List read messages in PDU mode

+CMGL: 1,1,,26

<CR><LF>

07913366003000F3040B913366920547

F40013001190412530400741AA8E5A9C

5201

OK

<stat> possible values (status of messages in memory):

Text mode possible values

PDU mode possible values

Status of messages in memory

“REC UNREAD” 0 received messages

“REC READ” 1 received read messages

“STO UNSENT”

“STO SENT”

2

3 stored unsent messages stored sent messages

“ALL”

Note: confidential ©

Page: 143 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

For SMS Status Reports, only “ALL” / 4 and “READ” / 1 values of the <stat> parameter will list messages ; other values will only return OK. confidential ©

Page: 144 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

9.12 Send message +CMGS

9.12.1 Description

The <address> field is the address of the terminal to which the message is sent. To send the message, simply type, <ctrl-Z> character (ASCII 26). The text can contain all existing characters except <ctrl-Z> and <ESC> (ASCII 27).

This command can be aborted using the <ESC> character when entering text.

In PDU mode, only hexadecimal characters are used (‘0’…’9’,’A’…’F’).


:

AT+CMGS= <da> [ ,<toda> ] <CR> text is entered <ctrl-Z / ESC >


:

AT+CMGS= <length> <CR>

PDU is entered

<ctrl-Z / ESC >

Command

AT+CMGS=”+33146290800”<CR>

Please call me soon, Fred. <ctrl-Z>

Note: Send a message in text mode

Possible responses

>

AT+CMGS=<length><CR>

Note: Send a message in PDU mode (1/3)

<pdu>

Note: Enter message in PDU mode (2/3)

<ctrl-Z>

Note: End the message (3/3)

OK


>

+CMGS: <mr>

OK

Note: Successful transmission confidential ©

Page: 145 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

The message reference, <mr>, which is returned to the application is allocated by the product. This number begins with 0 and is incremented by one for each outgoing message (successful and failure cases); it is cyclic on one byte (0 follows 255).

Note: this number is not a storage number – outgoing messages are not stored.

See paragraph 9.1.

confidential ©

Page: 146 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

9.13 Write Message to Memory +CMGW

9.13.1 Description

This command stores a message in memory (either SMS-SUBMIT or SMS-

DELIVERS). The memory location <index> is returned (no choice possible as with phonebooks +CPBW).

Text or PDU is entered as described for the Send Message +CMGS command.

9.13.2 Syntax


:

(<index> is returned in both cases)

AT+CMGW= <oa/da> [,<tooa/toda> [,<stat> ] ] <CR> enter text <ctrl-Z / ESC>


:

AT+CMGW= <length> [,<stat>] <CR> give PDU <ctrl-Z / ESC>

Response syntax:

+CMGW: <index> or +CMS ERROR: <err> if writing fails

Command

AT+CMGW=”+33146290800”<CR>

Hello how are you ?<ctrl-Z>

Note: Write a message in text mode

Possible responses

>

AT+ CMGW =<length><CR>

Note: Write a message in PDU mode (1/3)

<pdu>

Note: Enter message in PDU mode (2/3)

<ctrl-Z>

Note: End the message (3/3)

OK

Note: Message stored in index 4

>

+CMGW: <index>

OK

Note: Message stored in <index> confidential ©

Page: 147 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005


<oa/da> Originating or Destination Address Value in string format.

<tooa/toda> Type of Originating / Destination Address.

<stat> Integer type in PDU mode

(default 2 for +CMGW), or string type in text mode

(default “STO UNSENT” for +CMGW). Indicates the status of message in memory. If <stat> is omitted, the stored message is considered as a message to send.

0 “REC UNREAD”

1 “REC READ”

2 “STO UNSENT”

<length> Length of the actual data unit in bytes

9.14 Send Message From Storage +CMSS

9.14.1 Description

This command sends a message stored at location value <index>.

9.14.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CMSS=<index>[,<da> [,<toda>] ]

Response syntax:

+CMSS: <mr> or +CMS ERROR: <err> if sending fails

If a new recipient address <da> is given, it will be used instead of the one stored with the message

Command

AT+CMGW=0660123456<CR>

Today is my birthday

Note:

Possible responses

+CMGW: 5

OK

Note:Message stored with index 5

AT+CMSS=5, 0680654321 +CMSS:<mr>

OK

Note: Send the message 5 to a different destination number

Note: Successful transmission confidential ©

Page: 148 / 478




<index>

<da>

<toda>

<mr>

See above descriptions.

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008


Page: 149 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

9.15 Set Text Mode Parameters +CSMP

9.15.1 Description

This command is used to select a value for <vp>, <pid>, and <dcs>.

9.15.2 Syntax ;

Command syntax: AT+CSMP=<fo>, <vp>, <pid>,<dcs>

Command

AT+CSMP?

Possible responses

+CSMP: 0,0,0,0

Note: current values

OK

Note: No validity period

<dcs>= PCCP437 alphabet (8 bits " 7 bits)

AT+CSMP=17,23,64,244

Note:<vp> = 23 (2 hours, relative format)

<dcs> = GSM 8 bits alphabet

Remind to enter <fo> value in decimal notation.

OK

Note: Command correct


The <fo> byte comprises 6 different fields: b7 b6 B5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

RP UDH

I

SRR VPF RD MTI

Note: <fo> must be entered in DECIMAL format. Hexadecimal format would lead to unrelevant result.

RP: Reply Path, not used in text mode.

UDHI: User Data Header Information, b6=1 if the beginning of the User

Data field contains a Header in addition to the short message. This option is not supported in +CSMP command, but can be used in

PDU mode (+CMGS). confidential ©

Page: 150 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

SRR: Status Report Request, b5=1 if a status report is requested. This mode is supported.

VPF: Validity Period Format b4=0 & b3=0 -> <vp> field is not present b4=1 & b3=0 -> <vp> field is present in relative format

RD:

MTI:

Others formats (absolute & enhanced) are not supported.

Reject Duplicates, b2=1 to instruct the SC to reject an SMS-SUBMIT for an SM still held in the SC which has the same <mr> and the same <da> as the previously submitted SM from the same <oa>.

Message Type Indicator b1=0 & b0=0 -> SMS-DELIVER (in the direction SC to MS) b1=0 & b0=1 -> SMS-SUBMIT (in the direction MS to SC)

In text mode <vp> is only coded in “ relative” format. The default value is 167

(24 hours). This means that one byte can describe different values:

VP value

0 to 143

144 to 167

Validity period value

(VP + 1) x 5 minutes (up to 12 hours)

12 hours + ( (VP – 143) x 30 minutes )

168 to 196

197 to 255

(VP – 166) x 1 day

(VP – 192) x 1 week

<pid> is used to indicate the higher layer protocol being used or indicates interworking with a certain type of telematic device. For example, 0x22 is for group 3 telefax, 0x24 is for voice telephone, 0x25 is for ERMES (European

Radio Messaging System).

<dcs> is used to determine the way the information is encoded. Compressed text is not supported. Only GSM default alphabet, 8 bit data and UCS2 alphabet are supported. confidential ©

Page: 151 / 478



9.16 Delete message +CMGD

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

9.16.1 Description

This command is used to delete one or several messages from preferred message storage (“BM” SMS-CB ‘RAM storage’, “SM” SMSPP storage ‘SIM storage’ or “SR” SMS Status-Report storage).

Refer also to Preferred Message Storage +CPMS command.

9.16.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CMGD=<Index> [,<DelFalg>]


+CMTI:”SM”,3

AT+CMGR=3

Note: Read it

Note: New message received

+CMGR: “REC UNREAD”,”0146290800”,

“98/10/01,18:19:20+00” <CR><LF>

AT+CMGD=3

Note: Delete it

Message received!

Note: Unread message received from 0146290800 on the

01/10/1998 at 18H19m 20s

OK

Note: Message deleted

AT+CMGD=1,0 OK

Note: The message from the preferred message storage at the location 1 is deleted

AT+CMGD=1,1 OK

Note: All READ messages from the preferred message storage are deleted

AT+CMGD=1,2 OK

Note: All READ messages and SENT mobile originated messages are deleted

AT+CMGD=1,3 OK

Note: All READ, SENT and UNSENT messages are deleted

AT+CMGD=1,4 OK

Note: All messages are deleted confidential ©

Page: 152 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

• (1-20) if the preferred message storage is “BM”

• SIM dependant integer values (in the range of SIM location number) if the preferred message storage is “SM” or “SR”.

If DelFlag is different from 0, <index> is ignored.

<DelFlag>

0 Delete message at location <index> (default value).

1

2

3

Delete All READ messages

Delete All READ and SENT messages

Delete All READ, SENT and UNSENT messages

4 Delete All messages.

If <DelFlag> is ommited, default value is used.

Note: when the preferred message storage is “SR”, as SMS status reports are assumed to have a “READ” status, if <DelFlag> is greater than 0, all SMS status reports will be deleted.

9.17 Service center address +CSCA

9.17.1 Description

This command is used to indicate to which service center the message must be sent.

The product has no default value for this address. If the application tries to send a message without having indicated the service center address, an error will be generated.

Therefore, the application must indicate the SC address when initialising the

SMS. This address is then permanently valid. The application may change it if necessary. confidential ©

Page: 153 / 478



9.17.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CSCA=<sca>

Command

AT+CMGS= “+33146290800”<CR>

Hello, how are you?<ctrl-Z>

Note: Send a message

AT+CSCA=”0696741234”

Note: Service center initialization

AT+CMGS=”+33146290800”<CR>

Happy Birthday ! <ctrl-Z>

Note:

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

Possible responses

+CMS ERROR: 330

Note: service center unknown

OK

Note:

+CMGS: 1

OK


008

11 February 2005

<sca>

See above descriptions

9.18 Select Cell Broadcast Message Types +CSCB

9.18.1 Description

This command selects which types of CBMs are to be received by the ME. It is allowed in both PDU and text modes.

9.18.2 Syntax:

Command syntax: AT+CSCB= <mode>, [ <mids>, [ <dcss> ] ]

Important note: Test read command (AT+CSCB ?) is not supported. confidential ©

Page: 154 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005


AT+CSCB=0,”15-17,50,86”,”” OK

Note: Accept SMS-CB types, 15,16,17,50 and 86 in any language

Note: CBMs can be received

AT+CSCB=1

Note: Deactivate the reception of CBMs

00112233445566778899

Note: CBM length of a received Cell

Broadcast message (SMS-CB), CBM bytes in PDU mode)

OK

Note: CBM reception is completely stopped

The <bm> parameter of +CNMI command controls the message indication.

The activation of CBM reception (<mode>=0) can select only specific Message

Identifiers (list in <mids>) for specific Languages (list in <dcss>), but the deactivation stops any reception of CBMs (only AT+CSCB=1 is allowed)

Message Identifiers (<mids> parameter) indicates to which type of message identifiers the ME should listen.

<dcss>: Supported languages

3

4

5

0

1

2

German

English

Italian

French

Spanish

Dutch

6

7

8

9

Swedish

Danish

Portuguese

Finnish

10 Norwegian

11 Greek

12 Turkish

13 Hungarian

14 Polish confidential ©

Page: 155 / 478



32 Czech.

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008


Page: 156 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

9.19 Cell Broadcast Message Identifiers +WCBM

9.19.1 Description

This specific command is used to read the EF-CBMI SIM file.

Remark: The EF-CBMI file is not used with the +CSCB command.

The application should read this file (using AT+WCBM ?) and combine the

Message Identifiers with those required by the application.

Command

AT+WCBM=”10,100,1000,10000”

Note: Write 4 messages identifiers in EF-

CBMI

AT+WCBM?

Note: Read the CBMIs in EF-CBMI

Possible responses

OK

Note: CBMIs are stored in EF-CBMI

+WCBM=”10,100,1000,100000”

OK

Note: 4 CBMIs are stored in EF-CBMI

<mids>

See above descriptions confidential ©

Page: 157 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

9.20 Message status modification +WMSC

9.20.1 Description

This commands allow the manipulation of a message status. The accepted status changes are from READ to NOT READ and vice versa, and from SENT to

NOT SENT and vice versa.

9.20.2 Syntax:

Command

AT+CMGR=2

Possible responses

+CMGR: ”REC READ”,”+336290918”,,”99/05/01

14:19:44+04” <CR><LF>

Hello All of you !

OK

AT+WMSC=2,“REC UNREAD”

AT+CMGR=2 +CMGR: ”REC UNREAD”,”+336290918”,,”99/05/01

14:19:44+04” <CR><LF>

Hello All of you !

OK

Possible responses:

OK

+CMS ERROR: 321 if the location is valid if <loc> is invalid or free if the new <status> and the previous one are incompatible (1)

Note 1:

If all the parameters are correct, the product overwrites the whole SMS in SIM.

Only the first byte (Status byte) is changed.

<loc> location number of the stored message (integer)

<status> new status to be stored, as for +CMGL command: confidential ©

Page: 158 / 478



PDU Mode

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Text Mode

9.21 Message overwriting +WMGO

9.21.1 Description

The WMGO command is used to specify a location in the SIM, for the next

SMS storing with +CMGW command. The defined location is used only once:

+WMGO has to be used again to perform another overwrite.

Important notes:

• If the external application specifies a free location, and an incoming message is received before the AT+CMGW command occurs, the product may store the incoming message at the specified available location. If the user then issues an AT+CMGW command without changing the location with another AT+WMGO, the received message will be overwritten.

•

The location number is not kept over a software reset.

9.21.2 Syntax

Command

AT+CMGW=”+33146290800”<CR>

Possible responses

+CMGW: 4

Hello how are you ?<ctrl-Z> OK

Note: Write a message in text mode Note: Message stored in index 4

AT+WMGO=4

AT+CMGW=”+33146299704”<CR>

You are overwritten<ctrl-Z>

+CMGW: 4

OK

Note: New Message stored in index 4 confidential ©

Page: 159 / 478



AT+WMGO=999

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

OK

+CMS ERROR: 321

OK

<loc> location number of the SIM record to write or overwrite. Number depending of the SIM capacity. confidential ©

Page: 160 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

9.22 Un-change SMS Status +WUSS

9.22.1 Description

The +WUSS command allows to keep the SMS Status to UNREAD after

+CMGR or +CMGL.

9.22.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+WUSS = <mode>


AT+WUSS=? +WUSS(0,1)

OK

AT+WUSS=1 OK

Note: SMS has been received in index 10

AT+CMGR=10 +CMGR:

LF>

“REC

UNREAD”,”+33660669023”,,”03/02/13,18:36:35+00”<CR><

Do you want to change state ?

OK

AT+CMGR=10 +CMGR: “REC

UNREAD”,”+33660669023”,,”03/02/13,18:36:35+00”<CR><

LF>

Do you want to change state ?

OK

N ote: The state hasn’t be updated

AT+WUSS=0 OK

Note: SMS has been received in index 11


UNREAD”,”+33660669023”,,”03/02/13,18:56:55+00”<CR><

LF>

It is me again.

OK confidential ©

Page: 161 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005


READ”,”+33660669023”,,”03/02/13,18:56:55+00”<CR><LF>

It is me again.

OK

Note: The state has been updated

AT+WUSS? +WUSS:0

OK

<mode>

<mode>: 1 The SMS Status will not change.

<mode>: 0 The SMS Status will change.

9.23 More Messages to Send +CMMS

9.23.1 Description

This short message service-oriented AT command allows to keep the link opened while sending several short messages within a short delay.

9.23.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CMMS = <mode>

Command

AT+ CMMS=0

Note: Disable feature

AT+ CMMS=1

Note: Enable feature 1 time

AT+ CMMS=2

Note: Enable feature

AT+ CMMS?

AT+ CMMS=?

Possible responses

OK

Note: feature is disabled

OK

Note: feature is enabled, link is open

OK

Note: feature is enabled, link is open

+CMMS: 2

OK

+CMMS: (0-2)

OK confidential ©

Page: 162 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005


<mode>

0 Disable feature

1 Keep link opened while messages are sent. If the delay between two messages exceeds 5 seconds, the link is closed and the mode is reset to 0: the feature is disabled.

Notes:

2 Keep link opened while messages are sent. If the delay between two messages exceeds 5 seconds, the link is closed but the mode remains set to 2: the feature is still enabled.

• The delay of 5 seconds complies with Rec 3GPP 27.005 §3.5.6.

• Before sending the last SMS in the link, you must use AT+CMMS=0 command. This command will indicate that the FOLLOWING SMS will be the last one. confidential ©

Page: 163 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

10 Supplementary Services commands

10.1 Call forwarding +CCFC

10.1.1 Description

This commands allows control of the “call forwarding” supplementary service.

10.1.2 Syntax

Command syntax:

AT+CCFC= <reason>, <mode> [, <number> [,<type> [,<class> [,<subaddr> [,

<satype> [,<time> ] ] ] ] ] ]

Response syntax:

+CCFC: <status>, <class1> [, <number>, <type> [,<subaddr>,

<satype> [,<time> ] ] ] [ <CR><LF>+CCFC: <status>, <class2> [, <number>,

<type> [,<subaddr>, <satype> [,<time> ] ] ] [ … ] ]


AT+CCFC=0,3,”0146290800” OK

Note: Register to an unconditional call forwarding

Note: Command valid

AT+CCFC=0,2 +CCFC:1,1,”0146290800”,129

Note: Interrogate unconditional call forwarding

Note: Call forwarding active for voice

<CR><LF>+CCFC:1,2,”0146290802”,129

Note: Call forwarding active for data

<CR><LF>+CCFC:1,4,”0146290804”,129

AT+CCFC=0,4

Note: Erase unconditional call forwarding

OK

Note: Call forwarding active for fax

OK

Note: Command valid

+CCFC responses are not sorted by <class> parameter, but only by the order of network response.

<reason> confidential ©

Page: 164 / 478



0 Unconditional

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

4 All call forwarding

5 All conditional call forwarding

<mode>

0 Disable

1 Enable

2 Interrogate

3 Registration

4 Erasure

<type>: TON/NPI (Type of address byte in integer format) (default 145 when dialing string includes international access code character “+”, otherwise 129)

<class>

1 Voice

2 Data

4 Fax

Note: The combination of different classes is not supported, it will only result in the activation / deactivation / status request of all classes (7).

If the FDN phonebook is activated, the registration is restricted to the phone numbers written in it. if <Class> parameter is not given in the command, 7 is used as default value.

<satype> not managed

<time> For <reason> = 2 (No reply), 4 (all calls forwarding) and 5 (all conditional call forwarding), time to wait (1 to 30) in seconds before call is forwarded. Default value is 20. confidential ©

Page: 165 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

< status >

0: not active

1: active

10.2 Call barring +CLCK

10.2.1 Description

This command allows control of the call barring supplementary service.

Locking, unlocking or querying the status of call barring is possible for all classes or for a specific class, but not a combination of some.

Command Syntax: AT+CLCK= <fac>, <mode> [, <password> [, <class> ] ]

Response Syntax: (for <mode>=2 and command successful)

+CLCK: <status> [, <class1> [ <CR><LF>+CLCK: <status>, <class2> [… ] ]

Command

AT+CLCK=”AO”,1,1234

Note:


Note:


Note:

Possible responses

OK

Note: Command valid

+CME ERROR: 16

Note: Wrong password

OK

Note: Command valid

<fac>

“AO”, “OI”, “OX” barring for outgoing calls

“AI”, “IR” barring for incoming calls

“AG”, “AC”,”AB” for all calls barring (<mode>=0 only)

<mode>

0: Unlocks the facility

1: Locks the facility

2: Query status confidential ©

Page: 166 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

<class>: see description for +CLCK command (Facility lock) or +CCFC (Call forwarding).

Note: A combination of different classes is not supported. It will only result in the activation / deactivation / status request for all classes (7).

The password code is over 4 digits maximum.

< status >

0: not active

1: active

10.3 Modify SS password +CPWD

10.3.1 Description

This command is used by the application to change the supplementary service password.

Command Syntax: AT+CPWD=<fac>,<OldPassword>, <NewPassword>

Command

AT+CPWD=”AO”,1234,5555

Note: Change Call Barring password

AT+CPWD=”AO”,1234,5555

Note: Change password

AT+CPWD=”AO”,5555,1234

Note: Change password

Possible responses

OK

Note: Password changed

+CME ERROR: 16

Note: Wrong password

OK

Note: Password changed

<fac> see +CLCK command with only “P2” facility added (SIM PIN2).

Note: Whatever the facility specified, the change of password applies to all calls barring.

<OldPassword>, <NewPassword> confidential ©

Page: 167 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

The password code is over up to 8 digits for P2 facility (4 to 8 digits).

The password code is over up to 4 digits for the other facilities (1 to 4 digits) . confidential ©

Page: 168 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

10.4 Call waiting +CCWA

10.4.1 Description

This command allows control of the call waiting supplementary service.

The product will send a +CCWA unsolicited result code when the call waiting service is enabled.

10.4.2 Syntax

Command Syntax: AT+CCWA=<n>, [ <mode> [, <class> ] ]

Response Syntax: (for <mode>=2 and command successful)

+CCWA: <status> [, <class1> [ <CR><LF>+CCWA: <status>, <class2>

[ … ] ]

Unsolicited result: +CCWA: <number>, <type>, <class> [ ,<alpha>] (when waiting service is enabled)

Command

AT+CCWA=1,1,1

Note: Enable call waiting for voice calls

AT+CCWA=1,2

Note: Interrogate call waiting

AT+CCWA=1,0,7

Note: Erase call waiting

Possible responses

OK

Note: Command valid

+CCWA:1,1

OK

Note: Call waiting active for voice calls

+CCWA:”0146290800”,145,1,”FREDDY”

Note: Number and name of the waiting voice call or

+CCWA:”0146290800”,145,1,”80234596

78FFFF”

Note: Number and name of the waiting voice call (UCS2 format)

OK

Note: Command valid

+CCWA:,,1

Note: voice call waiting (no number) confidential ©

Page: 169 / 478



OK

OK

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

<n> result code presentation status in the TA

0 Disable

1 Enable

<mode> 0 Disable

1 Enable

2 Query status

<type> Type of address byte in integer format (please refer to Rec GSM

04.08 [8] subclause 10.5.4.7)

<class> 1 Voice

2 Data

4 Fax

7 All classes (voice, data and fax)

A combination of different classes is not supported. It will only result in the activation / deactivation / status request for all classes (7).

1 active

<alpha> optional string type alphanumeric representation of <number> corresponding to the entry found in the ADN or FDN phonebook. confidential ©

Page: 170 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

10.5 Calling line identification restriction +CLIR

10.5.1 Description

This command allows control of the calling line identification restriction supplementary service.

Command syntax: AT+CLIR=<n>

Response syntax: +CLIR:<n>,<m> (for AT+CLIR ?)

Command

AT+CLIR=2

Note:

AT+CLIR ?

Note: Ask for current functionality

Possible responses

OK

Note: Command valid

+CLIR:<n>,<m>

OK

Note: <n> and <m> as defined herebelow

<n>: sets the line ID restriction for outgoing calls

0: Presentation indicator is used according to the subscription of the CLIR service

1: CLIR invocation

2: CLIR suppression

<m>: shows the subscriber CLIR status in the network

0: CLIR not provisioned

1: CLIR provisioned in permanent mode

2: Unknown (no network…)

3: CLIR temporary mode presentation restricted

4: CLIR temporary mode presentation allowed confidential ©

Page: 171 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

10.6 Calling line identification presentation +CLIP

10.6.1 Description

This command allows control of the Calling Line Identifier presentation supplementary service. When presentation of the CLI (Calling Line Identifier) is enabled (and calling subscriber allows), +CLIP response is returned after every

RING (or +CRING) result code.

Command syntax: AT+CLIP=<n>

Response syntax:

+CLIP: <n>,<m>

(as response to AT+CLIP?)

+CLIP: <number>, <type>[ ,<subaddr>, <satype>, <alpha> ]

(for an incoming call, after each RING or +CRING indication)

Command

AT+CLIP=1

Note: Enable CLIP

Possible responses

OK

Note: CLIP is enabled

+CLIP:<n>,<m> AT+CLIP?


OK

Note: <n> and <m> defined as below

RING

Note: Incoming call

+CLIP: “0146290800”,129,1,,”FRED”

Note: Incoming call with number and name presentation

RING

Note: Incoming call

+CLIP:

“0146290800”,129,1,,”8000204212FFFF

”

Note: Incoming call with number and name presentation (UCS2 format)

AT+CLIP=0

Note: Disable CLIP presentation

OK


Page: 172 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005


<n>: parameter sets/shows the result code presentation in the TA

0: Disable

1: Enable

<m>: parameter shows the subscriber CLIP service status in the network

0: CLIP not provisioned

1: CLIP provisioned

2: Unknown (no network…)

10.7.1 Description

This command allows control of the connected line identification presentation supplementary service – useful for call forwarding of the connected line.

10.7.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+COLP=<n>

Response syntax:

+COLP: <n>,<m> (as response to AT+COLP?)

+COLP: <number>,<type> [ ,<subaddr>, <satype>, <alpha> ] after ATD command, before OK or CONNECT <speed> confidential ©

Page: 173 / 478



Command

AT+COLP=1

Note: Activate COLP

AT+COLP?


ATD146290928;

Note: Outgoing call

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Possible responses

OK

Note: Command valid

+COLP:1,1

OK

Note: COLP is enabled and provisioned

+COLP:”0146290928”,129,,”JOE” or

+COLP:“0146290800”,129,1,,”80002042

12FFFF”

(UCS2 format)

OK

Note: Connected outgoing line number and name presentation

OK

Note: Command valid

AT+COLP=0

Note: Deactivate COLP

<n>: parameter sets/shows the result code presentation status in the TA

0: Disable

1: Enable

<m>: parameter shows the subscriber COLP service status in the network

0: COLP not provisioned

1: COLP provisioned

2: Unknown (no network)

10.8 Advice of charge +CAOC

10.8.1 Description

This refers to the Advice of Charge supplementary service (GSM 02.24 and

GSM 02.86) which enables the subscriber to obtain information on call cost.

With <mode>=0, the command returns the current call meter value (CCM) from the ME.

If AOC is supported, the command can also enable unsolicited event reporting on CCM information. confidential ©

Page: 174 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

The unsolicited result code +CCCM: <ccm> is sent when the CCM value changes. Deactivation of unsolicited event reporting is performed with the same command.

If AOC is supported, the Read command indicates whether unsolicited reporting is activated or not.

10.8.2 Syntax

Command

AT+CAOC=0

Note: Query CCM value

Possible responses

+CAOC: “000A08”

OK

Note: Display Current Call Meter value

(CCM=2568)

AT+CAOC=1 OK

Note: Deactivate unsolicited report of CCM value

Note: CCM report deactivated

AT+CAOC=2 OK

Note: Activate unsolicited report of CCM value

Note: CCM report activated

AT+CAOC ?

Note: Request mode

AT+CAOC=?

Note: Request supported modes

+CAOC:<mode>

OK

Note: Display unsolicited report mode (1 or 2)

+CAOC: (0-2)

OK

Note: 0,1,2 modes supported


<mode>

0: query CCM value

1: deactivate the unsolicited reporting of CCM value

2: activate the unsolicited reporting of CCM value

<ccm> string type; three bytes of the current call meter value in hexadecimal format (e.g. “00001E” corresponds to the decimal value 30); value is in home units and bytes are coded in a similar way as the ACMmax value in SIM. confidential ©

Page: 175 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

10.9 Accumulated call meter +CACM

10.9.1 Description

This command resets the Advice of Charge for accumulated call meter value in

SIM file EF

ACM

. The ACM contains the total number of home units for both the current and preceding calls. SIM PIN2 is required to reset the value. If setting fails in an ME error, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned.

The Read command returns the current value of the ACM.

The ACM value (entered or displayed) is in hexadecimal format with 6 digits.

Command syntax: AT+CACM:<pin2 passwd>

Possible response: +CACM: <acm value>

Command

AT+CACM?

Note: Request ACM value

Possible responses

+CACM: “000400”

OK

Note: Display ACM value (ACM=1024)

AT+CACM= 1234 OK

Note: Request ACM reset, real PIN2 is

“1234”

Note: ACM value is reset

AT+CACM= 0000 +CME ERROR: 16

Note: Request ACM reset with wrong PIN2 value

Note: Incorrect password

AT+CACM ?

Note: Request ACM value

+CACM: “000000”

OK

Note: Display ACM value (ACM = 0)

<pin2 passwd> string type

<acm value> string type coded as <ccm> under +CAOC. confidential ©

Page: 176 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

10.10 Accumulated call meter maximum +CAMM

10.10.1 Description

The set command sets the Advice of Charge related to accumulated call meter maximum value in SIM file EF

ACMmax

. ACMmax contains the maximum number of home units the subscriber is allowed to spend. When ACM (see +CACM) reaches ACMmax, calls are prohibited. SIM PIN2 is required to set the value. If setting fails in an ME error, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned.

The Read command returns the current value of ACMmax.

The ACMmax value (entered or displayed) is in hexadecimal format with 6 digits.

10.10.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CAMM:<ACMmax>,<pin2 passwd>


AT+CAMM=”000400”,1234 OK

Note: Request ACMmax update, PIN2 is

“1234”

Note: ACMmax updated to 1024

AT+CAMM=”000400”,0000 +CME ERROR: 16

Note: Request ACMmax update, PIN2 is

“1234”


AT+CAMM ?

Note: Request ACMmax value

+CAMM: “000400”

OK

Note: ACMmax = 1024


<ACMmax> string type coded as <ccm> under +CAOC. Value 0 disables ACMmax feature.

<pin2 passwd> string type confidential ©

Page: 177 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

10.11 Price per unit and currency table +CPUC

10.11.1 Description

The set command sets the parameters for Advice of Charge related to price per unit and the currency table in SIM file EFPUCT. PUCT information can be used to convert the home units (as used in +CAOC, +CACM and +CAMM) into currency units. SIM PIN2 is required to set the parameters. If setting fails in an

ME error, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned.

10.11.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CPUC:<currency>,<ppu>,<pin2 passwd>


AT+CPUC=”FFR”,”0.82”,1234

Note: Request Currency and Price per unit update

OK

AT+CPUC=”FFR”,”0.82”,1111 + CME ERROR: 16

Note: Request Currency and PPU update

(wrong PIN2)


AT+CPUC?

Note: Request Currency and Price

+CPUC:”FFR”,”0.82”

OK

Note: Currency= “FFR”

Price per unit= “0.82”


<currency> string type

<ppu> string type

<pin2 passwd> string type confidential ©

Page: 178 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

10.12 Call related supplementary services +CHLD

10.12.1 Description

This command is used to manage call hold and multiparty conversation

(conference call). Calls can be put on hold, recovered, released or added to a conversation.

10.12.2 Syntax:

Command

AT+CHLD=<n>

AT+CHLD=?

Possible responses

OK

Note: if n is within the defined values

+CHLD: (0-4, 11-17, 21-27)

OK


<n>

0: Release all held calls or set User Determined User Busy (UDUB) for a waiting call.

1: Release all active calls (if any exist) and accepts the other (held or waiting) call.

1

X: Release a specific call X (active, held or waiting)

2: Place all active calls (if any exist) on hold and accepts the other (held or waiting) call.

2

X: Place all active calls on hold except call X with which communication is supported.

3: Adds a held call to the conversation.

4: Connects the two calls and disconnects the subscriber from both calls

(Explicit Call Transfer). confidential ©

Page: 179 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

10.13 List current calls +CLCC

10.13.1 Description

This command is used to return a list of current calls.

10.13.2 Syntax:

Command syntax: AT+CLCC

Response syntax: OK

(if no calls are available)

Else:

+CLCC: <id1>, <dir>, <stat>, <mode>, <mpty> [,<number>, <type>

[<alpha>]]

[<CR><LF>

+CLCC: <id2>, <dir>, <stat>, <mode>, <mpty> [ ,<number>, <type>

[<alpha>]][...]]]

<CR><LF>

OK

Command

RING

Note: Incoming call

AT+CLCC

Possible responses

+CLCC: 1,1,4,0,0,”0146294079”,129

OK

OK ATA

Note: Answering the cal

AT+CLCC +CLCC: 1,1,1,0,0,”0146294079”,129

OK

OK ATD0146299704;

Note: Outgoing call

AT+CLCC

Note: Before the phone called is ringing

AT+CLCC

Note: The phone called is ringing

AT+CLCC

Note: The call is being answered

+CLCC: 1,0,2,0,0,”0146294079”,129

OK

+CLCC: 1,0,3,0,0,”0146294079”,129

OK

+CLCC: 1,0,0,0,0,”0146294079”,129

OK confidential ©

Page: 180 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005


<id x> integer type, call identification as described in GSM 02.30

<dir> (direction of the call)

0: mobile originated (MO) call

1: mobile terminated (MT) call

<stat> (state of the call):

0: active

1: held

2: dialing (MO call)

3: alerting (MO call)

4: incoming (MT call)

5: waiting (MT call)

<mode> (teleservice):

0: voice

1: data

2: fax

9: unknown

<mpty> (multiparty)

0: call is not one of multiparty (conference) call parties

1: call is one of multiparty (conference) call parties

<number> string type phone number in format specified by <type>

<type> type of address byte in integer format

<alpha> optional string type alphanumeric representation of <number>, corresponding to the entry found in phonebook.

(for UCS2 format see commands examples +CLIP, +CCWA or +COLP) confidential ©

Page: 181 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

10.14 Supplementary service notifications +CSSN

10.14.1 Description

This command refers to supplementary service related network initiated notifications.

10.14.2 Syntax:

Command syntax: AT+CSSN= <n>, <m>

When <n>=1 and a supplementary service notification is received after a mobile originated call setup, intermediate result code

+CSSI:<code1>[,<index>] is sent before any other MO call setup result codes.

When <m>=1 and a supplementary service notification is received during a call, unsolicited result code +CSSU:<code2>[,<index>[,<number>,<type>]] is sent.


<n> (parameter sets/shows the +CSSI result code presentation status):

<m> (parameter sets/shows the +CSSU result code presentation status):

0 disable

1 enable

<code1>

0

1

4

5

Unconditional call forwarding is active

Some of the conditional call forwardings are active

closed User Group call, with CUG <index>

outgoing calls are barred

6

7

incoming calls are barred

CLIR suppression rejected confidential ©

Page: 182 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

<code2>

0

1

2

3

4

5

7

8

this is a forwarded call (MT call setup)

closed User Group call, with CUG <index>

call has been put on hold (during a voice call, <number> & <type> fields may be present)

call has been retrieved (during a voice call, <number> & <type> fields may be present)

multiparty call entered (during a voice call, <number> & <type> fields may be present)

call on hold has been released (during a voice call)

call is being connected (alerting) with the remote party in alerting state in Explicit Call Transfer operation (during a voice call)

call has been connected with the other remote party in Explicit Call

Transfer operation (during a voice call, <number> & <type> fields may be present)

<index>

<number>

<type>

Closed User Group index

String type phone number

Type of address

10.15 Unstructured supplementary service data +CUSD

10.15.1 Description

The USSD supplementary service is described in GSM 02.90.

It is based on sequences of digits which may be entered by a mobile user with a handset. A sequence entered is sent to the network which replies with an alphanumerical string, for display only, or for display plus request for the next sequence.

This command is used to:

•

• enable or disable the CUSD indication sent to the application by the product when an incoming USSD is received send and receive USSD strings

10.15.2 Syntax:

Command syntax: AT+CUSD = <n> [ ,<str> [ <dcs> ] ] confidential ©

Page: 183 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Note : in case of enabled presentation, a +CUSD (as direct answer to a send

USSD) is then indicated with:

+CUSD: <m> [,<str>,<dcs> ]


<n>

0

1

2

Disable the result code presentation

Enable the result code presentation

Cancel session (not applicable to read command response)

<m>

0 no further user action required (network initiated USSD-Notify, or no further information needed after mobile initiated operation)

1 further user action required (network initiated USSD-Request, or further information needed after mobile initiated operation)

2

4

USSD terminated by network

Operation not supported

<str>: network string (name), converted in the selected character set

<dcs>: the data coding scheme received (GSM TS 03.38).

10.15.4 Syntax To send and receive USSD:

Command syntax: AT+CUSD= <n> [,<str> [,<dcs>]]

Note: Please, be aware that the send USSD command needs the user to reenter the <n> parameter !

10.15.5 Defined values To send and receive USSD:

<str> is the USSD string to be sent.

<dcs> the default alphabet and the UCS2 alphabet are supported.

When the product sends a USSD, an OK response is first returned, and the intermediate +CUSD indication comes subsequently.

In case of error, a “+CUSD:4” indication is returned. confidential ©

Page: 184 / 478



10.16 Closed user group +CCUG

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

10.16.1 Description

The Closed User Group Supplementary Service enables subscribers to form groups with restricted access (both access to and from).

The CUG supplementary service is described in GSM 02.85. This service is provided on prior arrangement with the service provider. Subscription options should be selected at implementation.

The +CCUG command is used to:

•

•

•

• activate/deactivate the control of CUG information for all following outgoing calls, select a CUG index, suppress outgoing access (OA). OA allows or not a member of a CUG to place calls outside the CUG. suppress the preferential CUG. Preferential is the default CUG used by the network when it does not receive an explicit CUG index.

10.16.2 Syntax:

Command syntax: AT+CCUG = <n> [ ,<index> [ <info> ] ]


<n>

0

1

<index>

Disable CUG mode (default)

Enable CUG mode

0-9 CUG index (0 default)

10 Preferred CUG

<info>

0

1

No information (default)

Suppress OA

2 Suppress preferential CUG

3 Suppress OA and preferential CUG

Remark: to activate the control of the CUG information by call, add [G] or [g] to the ATD command. In this case, index and info values will be used. confidential ©

Page: 185 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

11 Data commands

11.1 Using AT Commands during a data connection

To use AT Commands during a data connection (e.g. while the product is in online mode), it is necessary either to switch to offline mode, or to use the specific +WMUX command to enable Commands / Data multiplexing.

11.1.1 Switch from online to offline mode

To switch from online mode to offline mode, the “+++” sequence must be sent. Following this, the product gets back to offline mode with an “OK” response, and a AT command can be sent.

Note: the “+++” sequence will only work with the +ICF command using one of the following settings:

•

•

8 data bits, with no parity

7 data bits, with even parity

11.1.2 Switch from offline to online mode

See the ATO command description.

11.2 Bearer type selection +CBST

11.2.1 Description

This command applies to both outgoing and incoming data calls, but in a different way. For an outgoing call, the two parameters (e.g. <speed> and

<ce>) are meaningful, whereas for an incoming call, only the <ce> parameter is used.

Note 1) For incoming calls, if <ce> is set to ‘T’ only and the network offers only ‘NT’ or vice versa, then the call is released.

Note 2) Values 2 and 3 for <ce> parameter are equivalent to former values

100 and 101. Those values are managed for compatibility purpose, but they shouldn’t be used in new code (2 as former 100, and 3 as former 101). confidential ©

Page: 186 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

11.2.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CBST= <speed>, <name>, <ce>

Command

AT+CBST=?

Note: Test command

AT+CBST=?

Note: Test command

AT+CBST=7,0,1

Note: Ask for a bearer

AT+CBST?

Note: Current values

AT+CBST=81,0,0

Note: Ask for a bearer

Possible responses

+CBST: (0-8,65,66,68,70,71),(0),(0-3)

OK

Note: Data 14,4 kbps not supported

+CBST: (0-

8,12,14,65,66,68,70,71,75),(0),(0-3)

OK

Note: Data 14,4 kbps supported

OK

Note: Bearer supported

+CBST:7,0,1

OK

Note: Command valid

+CME ERROR: 4

Note: Bearer not supported

<speed>

0 (default) Autobauding (modem type: none)

1

2

3

300 bps (modem type: V.21)


1200/75 bps (modem type: V.23)

4

5

6

2400 bps (modem type: V.22bis)

2400 bps (modem type: V.26ter)


7 9600 bps (modem type: V.32)

8 Specific

12

14(*)

65




66

68


2400 bps (modem type: V.110) confidential ©

Page: 187 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

70

71

75(*):




(*)This speed configures data and fax 14.4 kbps bearers.

<name>

No data compression is provided and only asynchronous modem is supported:

<name> = 0.

<ce>: Connection element

1(default) Non transparent only

3 Non transparent preferred

11.3 Select mode +FCLASS

11.3.1 Description

This command sets the product into a particular operating mode (data or fax). confidential ©

Page: 188 / 478



11.3.2 Syntax

Command

AT+FCLASS=?

Note: Test command

AT+FCLASS=?

Note: Test command

AT+FCLASS=0

Note: Data mode requested

AT+FCLASS=1

Note: Fax class 1 mode requested

AT+FCLASS?

Note: Current value


<n>

0: Data

1: Fax class 1

2: Fax class 2

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Possible responses

+FCLASS: (0,1)

OK

Note: Fax class 2 not supported

+FCLASS: (0,1,2)

OK

Note: Fax class 2 supported

OK

Note: Command valid

OK

Note: Command valid

+FCLASS: 1

OK


Page: 189 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

11.4.1 Description

This command enables a detailed type of service reporting in the case of incoming or outgoing data calls. Before sending the CONNECT response to the application, the product will specify the type of data connection that has been set up.

These report types are:

+CR: ASYNC For asynchronous transparent

+CR: REL ASYNC For asynchronous transparent non-

11.4.2 Syntax:

Command syntax: AT+CR=<mode>

Command

AT+CR=0

Note: Extended reports disabled

AT+CR=1

Note: Extended reports enabled

Possible responses

OK

Note: Command valid

OK

Note: Command valid

OK

OK

<mode>:

0: disable extended reports

1: enable extended reports confidential ©

Page: 190 / 478



11.5 Cellular result codes +CRC

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

11.5.1 Description

This command allows more detailed ring information for an incoming call

(voice or data). Instead of the string “RING”, an extended string is used to indicate which type of call is ringing (e.g. +CRING: VOICE).

These extended indications are:

+CRING: ASYNC for asynchronous transparent

+CRING: REL ASYNC for asynchronous non-transparent

+CRING: VOICE for normal speech.

+CRING: FAX for fax calls

11.5.2 Syntax:

Command syntax: AT+CRC=<mode>

Command

AT+CRC=0


AT+CRC=1


Possible responses

OK

Note: Command valid

OK

Note: Command valid

OK

OK

<mode>:

0: disable extended reports

1: enable extended reports confidential ©

Page: 191 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

11.6 DTE-DCE local rate reporting +ILRR

11.6.1 Description

This parameter controls whether the extended-format “+ILRR:<rate>” information text is transmitted from the DCE to the DTE or not. The <rate> value reported represents the current (negotiated or renegotiated) DTE-DCE speed rate.

If enabled, the intermediate result code is transmitted in an incoming or outgoing data call, after any data compression report, and before any final result code (CONNECT).

11.6.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+ILRR = <value>

Command

AT+ILRR=0

Note: Local port rate report disabled

AT+ILRR=1

Note: Local port rate report enabled

Possible responses

OK

Note: Command valid

OK

Note: Command valid

OK

OK

<value>:

0: disable local port rate report

1: enable local port rate report

<rate> can take the following values: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,

19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 (kbps). confidential ©

Page: 192 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

11.7 Radio link protocol parameters +CRLP

11.7.1 Description

This command modifies the radio link protocol parameters used for non transparent data transmission.

11.7.2 Syntax

Command

AT+CRLP=?

Note: Test command

AT+CRLP=?

Note: Test command

AT+CRLP=61,61,48,6,0

Note: Set new parameters

AT+CRLP?


Possible responses

+CRLP: (0-61),(0-61),(40-255),(1,255),(0)

OK

Note: V42bis not supported

+CRLP: (0-61),(0-61),(40-

255),(1,255),(0,1)

OK

Note: V42bis supported

OK

Note: Command valid

+CRLP: 61,61,48,6,0

Note: Command valid


<iws>: Down window size, (default is 61)

Range 0 to 61

<mws>: Up window size, (default is 61)

Range 0 to 61

<T1>: Acknowledgement timer in units of 10ms, (default is 48)

Range 40 to 255

<N2>: Retransmission attempts, (default is 6),

Range 1 to 255 confidential ©

Page: 193 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

<ver>: Version number.

0: V42bis is not supported.

1: V42bis is supported

11.8 Others radio link parameters +DOPT

11.8.1 Description

This Wavecom specific command modifies some supplementary radio link protocol parameters.

11.8.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+DOPT=<reset_allowed>,<dtx_allowed>

Command

AT+DOPT=?

Note: Test command

Possible responses

AT+DOPT=1 OK

Note: Set new parameters (2 nd default one)

value is the Note: Command valid

(0,1),(0,1)

OK

Note: DTX is supported

AT+DOPT=1,1


AT+DOPT?


OK

Note: Command valid

1,1

OK

Note: Command valid

<reset_allowed>

0 Data communication is hung up in case of bad radio link.

1 Data communication is held, even in case of bad radio link (possible loss of data). Default value

< dtx_allowed >

0

1

Normal mode

Economic battery mode (not supported by all networks), default value confidential ©

Page: 194 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

11.9 Select data compression %C

11.9.1 Description

This command enables or disables data compression negotiation if this feature is supported by the product.

11.9.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT%C<n>

Command

AT%C0

Note: Command

AT%C2

Note: Command

AT%C?

Note: Current value

Possible responses

OK

Note: Feature supported

OK

Note: V42bis supported

2

OK

Note: Command valid

<n>

0: no compression (default value)

2: V42bis compression if supported confidential ©

Page: 195 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

11.10 V42 bis data compression +DS

11.10.1 Description

This command enables or disables V.42bis data compression if this feature is supported by the product. Beware that the product only allows the MNP2 protocol.

11.10.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+DS=<dir>,<neg>,<P1>,<P2>

Command

AT+DS=?

Note: Test command

AT+DS=3,0,4096,250


AT+DS?


Possible responses

+DS: (0-3),(0,1),(512-4096),(6-250)

OK

Note:

OK

Note: Command valid

+DS: 3,0,4096,250

OK

Note: Command valid


< dir >: specifies the desired direction(s) of operation of the data compression function; from the DTE point of view

0 Negotiated … no compression

3 Both directions, accept any direction (default value)

< neg >: specifies whether or not the DCE should continue to operate if the desired result is not obtained

0 Do not disconnect if V.42 bis is not negotiated by the remote DCE as specified in <dir> (default value)

1

Disconnect if V.42 bis is not negotiated by the remote DCE as specified in <dir>

< P1 >: specifies the maximum number of dictionary entries that should be negotiated, (default is 4096) confidential ©

Page: 196 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Range 512 to 4096

< P2 >: specifies the maximum string length to be negotiated, (default is 20).

Range 6 to 250

11.11 V42 bis data compression report +DR

11.11.1 Description

This command determines whether or not the use of V42bis is allowed for an incoming or outgoing data call, if the feature is provided by the product.

The intermediate result code represents current DCE-DCE data compression type. The format of this result code is as follows:

+DR: NONE

+DR: V42B

Data compression is not in use

Rec. V.42 bis is in use in both directions

+DR: V42B RD Rec. V.42 bis is in use in receive direction only

+DR: V42B TD Rec. V.42 bis is in use in transmit direction only

The +DR intermediate result code, if enabled, is issued before the final result code, after the service report control +CR and before the +ILRR intermediate report.

11.11.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+DR=<status>

Command

AT+DR=?

Note: Test command

AT+DR=1

Note: Reporting enabled

AT+DR?

Note: Current value

Possible responses

+DR: (0,1)

OK

Note:

OK

Note: Command valid

+DR: 1

OK


Page: 197 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005


<status>: state of the V42bis enabling

0: disabled (default value)

1: enabled

11.12 Select data error correcting mode \N

11.12.1 Description

This command controls the preferred error correcting mode for a data connection, if the feature is provided by the product. It can only be used for transparent data transmission.

If the MNP2 feature is provided, the product authorizes MNP error correction mode.

11.12.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT\N<n>

Command

AT\N0

Note: no error correction

AT\N?

Note: Current value

AT\N4

Possible responses

OK

0

OK

Note: Command valid

+CME ERROR: 3


<n>

0: Disables error correction mode (default value)

5: Selects MNP error correction mode

Note: +E prefixed commands of V.25 ter are not used. confidential ©

Page: 198 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

12 Fax commands

The fax service provided by the product is class 1 compatible. However, only the core commands defined by ITU T.31 are supported. This means that commands such as AT+FAR, +FCC, etc. are not supported.

Autobauding must be enabled to set up the product for fax.

All commands described hereafter will return an ERROR response code if they are not issued during communication.

12.1 Transmit speed +FTM

12.1.1 Description

This command sets the fax transmit speed.

12.1.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+FTM=<speed>

Command

AT+FTM=?

Note: Test command

Possible responses

(24,48,72,73,74,96,97,98,121,122,145,1

46)

OK

Note: Fax 14.4 kbps supported


<speed>

24

48

72

2400 bps (modem type V.27ter)

4800 bps (modem type V.27ter)

7200 bps (modem type V.29)

73

74

96

97

98

121

122

7200 bps (long) (modem type V.17)

7200 bps (short) (modem type V.17)





12000 bps (short) (modem type V.17) confidential ©

Page: 199 / 478



145

146

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005



12.2 Receive speed +FRM

12.2.1 Description

This command sets the fax receive speed.

12.2.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+FRM=<speed>

Command

AT+FRM=?

Note: Test command

Possible responses

(24,48,72,73,74,96,97,98,121,122,145,1

46)

OK

Note: Fax 14.4 kbps supported


The speed values are identical to those of the +FTM command

(see 12.1).

12.3 HDLC transmit speed +FTH

12.3.1 Description

This command sets the fax transmit speed, using the HDLC protocol.

12.3.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+FTH=<speed>

Command

AT+FTH=?

Note: Test command

Possible responses

(3)

OK

Note: confidential ©

Page: 200 / 478




<speed>

3: V.21 channels 300 bps.

12.4 HDLC receive speed +FRH

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

12.4.1 Description

This command sets the fax receive speed, using the HDLC protocol.

12.4.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+FRH=<speed>

Command

AT+FRH=?

Note: Test command

Possible responses

(3)

OK

Note:

<speed>

3: V.21 channels 300 bps.

12.5 Stop transmission and wait +FTS

12.5.1 Description

This command stops transmission for the specified period. confidential ©

Page: 201 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

12.5.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+FTS=<n>

Command

AT+FTS=?

Note: Test command

Possible responses

(0-255)

OK

Note:

AT+FTS=50 OK

Note: Stops transmission and waits for

0.5s

Note: Command valid

<n>: silence period (unit is 10 ms).

12.6 Receive silence +FRS

12.6.1 Description

This command causes the modem to stop listening to the network and report back to the DTE after the specified period.

It is aborted if any character is received from the application.

Command syntax: AT+FRS=<n>


AT+FRS=?

Note: Test command

(0-255)

OK

Note:

AT+FRS=50 OK

Note: Stops transmission and waits for

0.5s

Note: Command valid

<n>: no-listening period (units is 10 ms). confidential ©

Page: 202 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

12.7 Setting up the PC fax application:

The recommended fax application is

Delrina WinFax v8.0.

It should be configured as follows (menu Setup/Fax Modem Setup):

•

•

•

Port: any com

Model: Generic Class 1 (hardware flow control). A generic class 1 with software flow control can also be selected.

Init: default string is suitable for the product

•

•

Reset: default string is suitable for the product

Maximum Transmit Rate: 9600 baud (if higher, rate will be automatically cut back to 9600 baud).

Other settings are of no relevance for the GSM unit: they can be modified. confidential ©

Page: 203 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

13 Fax class 2 commands

If the feature is supported, the commands +FDT, +FDR, +FET, +FPTS and +FK must be used during call only.

The other commands, +FBOR, +FBUF, +FCQ, +FCR, +FDCC, +FDIS, +FLID and

+FPHCTO, cannot be used during call.

13.1 Transmit Data +FDT

13.1.1 Description :

This command prefixes data transmission.

13.1.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+FDT

No parameter

13.2 Receive Data +FDR

13.2.1 Description

This command initiates data reception.

13.2.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+FDR


Page: 204 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

13.3 Transmit page ponctuation +FET

13.3.1 Description

This command ponctuates page and document transmission after the +FDT command. It indicates that the current page is complete, and if there are additional pages to send.

13.3.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+FET=<ppm>

The remote station should respond with +FPTS:<ppr>


<ppm>

0 Another page next, same document

1 Another document next

2 No more pages or documents

3 Another partial page next

4 Another page, procedure interrupt

5 Another document, procedure interrupt

6 All done, procedure interrupt

13.4 Page transfer status parameters +FPTS

13.4.1 Description

This command sets post page transfer response.

13.4.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+FPTS=<ppr>

<ppr>

1 Page good

2

3

Page bad ; retry requested

Page good ; retrain requested confidential ©

Page: 205 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

4

5

Page bad ; interrupt requested

Page good ; interrupt requested

13.5 Terminate Session +FK

13.5.1 Description

This command causes the product to terminate the session.

13.5.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+FK

No parameter

13.6 Page transfer bit order +FBOR

13.6.1 Description

This command sets the bit order for negotiation and fax page transfer. The order is related to the bit order on radio link.

13.6.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+FBOR=<n>

Command

AT+FBOR=?

Note: Test command

Possible responses

(0-3)

OK

Note:


<n> Bit order for negotiation

0(default) Same

1 Same

2 Reverse

3 Reverse

Bit order for page transfer

Same

Reverse

Same

Reverse confidential ©

Page: 206 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

13.7 Buffer size report +FBUF

13.7.1 Description

This command requests the size of the exchange buffer between the modem and the fax application.

Note: Only the read command is supported.

13.7.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+FBUF

Command

AT+FBUF?

Note: Current value

Possible responses

1024

OK

Note: Command valid

No parameter

13.8 Copy quality checking +FCQ

13.8.1 Description

This command controls Copy Quality checking for receiving faxes.

Command syntax: AT+FCQ=<n>

Command

AT+FCQ=?

Note: Test command

Possible responses

(0)

OK

Note:

<n> confidential ©

Page: 207 / 478



0: default value, the only supported

13.9 Capability to receive +FCR

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

13.9.1 Description

This commands controls the capability of the modem to accept incoming faxes.

13.9.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+FCR=<n>

Command

AT+FCR=?

Note: Test command

Possible responses

(0,1)

OK

Note:

<n>

0 The modem will not accept incoming faxes.

1 The modem will accept incoming faxes (default value). confidential ©

Page: 208 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

13.10 Current sessions parameters +FDIS

13.10.1 Description

This command allows the DTE to parameter the capabilities used for the current session.

13.10.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+FDIS=<vr>,<br>,<wd>,<ln>,<df>,<ec>,<bf>,<st>

Command

AT+FDIS=?

Note:

Possible responses

(0,1),(0-5),(0-2),(0-2),(0-3),(0),(0),(0-7)

OK

Note: Fax ECM not supported

Fax 14,4 kbps supported

(0,1),(0-3),(0-2),(0-2),(0-3),(0),(0),(0-7)

OK


Fax 14,4 kbps not supported


This command accepts eight numeric parameters (of the T30 standard).

<vr>: Vertical Resolution,

0 Normal: 98 lpi (default value)

<br>: Bit Rate,

0 2400 bps (modem type V.27 ter)

1

2

4800 bps (modem type V.27 ter)


3 9600 bps (modem type V.29, V.17). Default value if 14,4 kbps data feature IS NOTsupported.

4(*) 12000 bps (modem type V.33, V.17)

5(*) 14400 bps (modem type V.33, V.17). Default value if 14,4 kbps data feature IS supported.

(*) Only when product supports 14,4 kbps data feature confidential ©

Page: 209 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

<wd>: Page Width,

0

1

2

1728 pixels in 215 mm (default value)

2048 pixels in 255 mm

2432 pixels in 303 mm

<ln>: Page Length,

0 A4, 297 mm

1 B4, 364 mm

2 Unlimited (default value)

<df>: Data Compression Format,

0 1-D modified Huffman (default value)

1 2-D modified read

2

3

2-D uncompressed mode

2-D modified modified read

<ec>: Error Correction,

0: Disable Fax ECM. Default value if fax ECM feature IS NOT supported.

1(*): Enable Fax ECM, 64 bytes/frame

2(*): Enable Fax ECM, 256 bytes/frame. Default value if fax ECM feature IS supported.

(*) Only when product supports fax Error Correction Mode feature

<bf>: Binary File Transfer,

Only <bf>: 0 is supported. confidential ©

Page: 210 / 478



<st>: Scan Time per line,

<st>

0 (default)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Description if <vr>=0

0 ms

5 ms

10 ms

10 ms

20 ms

20 ms

40 ms

40 ms

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Description if <vr>=1

0 ms

5 ms

5 ms

10 ms

10 ms

20 ms

20 ms

40 ms confidential ©

Page: 211 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

13.11 DCE capabilities parameters +FDCC

13.11.1 Description

This command allows the DTE to parameter the capabilities used for any session.

13.11.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+FDCC=<vr>,<br>,<wd>,<ln>,<df>,<ec>,<bf>,<st>

Command

AT+ FDCC=?

Note: Test command

Possible responses

(0,1),(0-5),(0-2),(0-2),(0-3),(0-2),(0),(0-7)

OK

Note: Fax ECM supported


(0,1),(0-5),(0-2),(0-2),(0-3),(0),(0),(0-7)

OK



(0,1),(0-3),(0-2),(0-2),(0-3),(0-2),(0),(0-7)

OK

Note: Fax ECM supported


(0,1),(0-3),(0-2),(0-2),(0-3),(0),(0),(0-7)

OK




The parameters and default values are the same as for the +FDIS command

(see 13.10.3).

confidential ©

Page: 212 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

13.12 Local ID string +FLID

13.12.1 Description

This command allows the local ID string to be defined.

13.12.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+FLID=”<string>”

Command

AT+FLID=?

Note: Test command

Possible responses

(20),(32-127)

OK


<string>

The string has a limited size of 20 characters, and accepts any characters between 32 and 127 as ASCII codes..

13.13 Page transfer timeout parameter +FPHCTO

13.13.1 Description

This command sets the time interval during which the modem expects another page before it assumes there are no more pages and aborts.

13.13.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+FPHCT0=<n>

Command

AT+FPHCTO=?

Note: Test command

Possible responses

(0-255)

OK


<n>: waiting period for another page in seconds.

Range: 0 to 255, default value is 30. confidential ©

Page: 213 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

13.14 Fax Class 2 indication messages

The following messages are used to indicate DCE Responses. They are used in communication only.

+FCON:

This response indicates connection with a fax machine.

+FDCS <vr>,<br>,<wd>,<ln>,<df>,<ec>,<bf>,<st>:

This response reports current session capabilities. The parameters are the

same than those of AT+FDIS command (see 0).

+FDIS <vr>,<br>,<wd>,<ln>,<df>,<ec>,<bf>,<st>:

This response reports remote capabilities. The parameters are the same

than those of AT+FDIS command (see 0).

<vr>

Combinations of the following values are also allowed.

<vr> Coding

0x01

R8 × 7.7 l/mm, Fine (196 lpi)

0x02

0x04

R8 × 15.4 l/mm

R16 × 15.4 l/mm

0x08

200 dpi × 100 l/25.4 mm

0x10

200 dpi × 200 l/25.4 mm

0x20

0x40

200 dpi × 400 l/25.4 mm

300 dpi × 300 l/25.4 mm

+FCFR:

This response indicates confirmation to receive.

+FTSI “<string>”:

This response reports the received transmit station ID string.

+FCSI “<string>”:

This response reports the received called station ID string.

+FPTS <ppr>:

This response reports received page transfer status. The parameter is the

same than the one of AT+FPTS command (see 13.4).

+FET <ppm>:

This response reports post page message response. The parameter is the

same than the one of AT+FET command (see 13.2.3).

+FHNG <cause>: confidential ©

Page: 214 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

This response reports the hang-up cause. It indicates that the call has been terminated.

<cause>

0: Normal end of connection.

10: Unspecified transmit phase A error.

20: Unspecified transmit phase B error.

40: Unspecified transmit phase C error.

50: Unspecified transmit phase D error.

70: Unspecified receive phase B error.

90: Unspecified receive phase C error.

100: Unspecified receive phase D error. confidential ©

Page: 215 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

14 V24-V25 commands

14.1 Fixed DTE rate +IPR

14.1.1 Description

This commands specifies the data rate at which the DCE will accept commands.

Notes:

• Autobauding is supported (operating from 2400 to 57600 baud).

• Autobauding is supported ony when framing is set to 8N1. Other framings such as 7E1 are not supported.

• Any AT command issued by the DTE must start with both capital ‘A’ and ‘T’ (or ‘/’) or both lower case ‘a’ and ‘t’ (or ‘/’), otherwise the DCE may return some garbage characters and become desynchronized.

Should this happen, the DTE simply issues ‘AT\r’ (at 2400 or 4800 bauds) once or twice or just ‘AT’ (at 9600 bauds) to resynchronize the modem.

• The DTE waits for 1ms after receiving the last character of the AT response (which is always ‘\n’ or 0x0A) to send a new AT command at either the same rate or a new rate. Should this delay be ignored, the DCE can become desynchronised. Once again, sending ’AT\r’ once or twice or just ‘AT’ causes the DCE to recover.

Caution: when starting up, if autobauding is enabled and no AT command has yet been received, the product sends all unsolicited responses (like RING) at 9600 bauds. confidential ©

Page: 216 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

14.1.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+IPR=<rate>

Command

AT+IPR?

Note:

AT+IPR=?

Note:

AT+IPR=38400

Note:

AT+IPR=0

Note:

Possible responses

+IPR: 9600

OK

Note: Current rate is 9600 bps

+IPR:

(0,2400,4800,9600,19200,38400,57600),(300,600,1200,1

15200)

OK

Note: Possible values, according to V25 ter

Recommandation: the first set of values indicates the range of auto-detectable baud rates (including 0). The second set of values indicates the baud rates supported by the DCE but not auto-detectable.

OK

Note: Disable autobauding and set rate to 38400 bps

OK

Note: Enable autobauding

•

•

•

•

•

•

<rate>: baud rates that can be used by the DCE

•

0 (enables autobauding)

•

300

600

1200

2400

4800

•

9600

19200

38400

•

57600

•

115200 confidential ©

Page: 217 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

14.2 DTE-DCE character framing +ICF

14.2.1 Description

This command is used to determine the local serial port start-stop

(asynchronous) character framing used by the DCE.

14.2.2 Syntax

Command

AT+ICF?

Note:

AT+ICF=?

Note:

Possible responses

+ICF: 3,4

OK


+ICF: (1-6),(0-4)

OK


OK

Note: New values

AT+ICF=2,0

Note:


<format>

0: Autodetect (not supported)

1: 8 Data 2 Stop

(supported)

<parity> parameter is ignored.

2: 8 Data 1 Parity 1 Stop (supported) if no <parity> provided, 3 is used by default as <parity> value.

3: 8 Data 1 Stop

(supported)


4: 7 Data 2 Stop

(supported)


5: 7 Data 1 Parity 1 Stop (supported) if no <parity> provided, 3 is used by default as <parity> value.

6: 7 Data 1 Stop

(supported)

<parity> parameter is ignored. confidential ©

Page: 218 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

<parity>

0: Odd

(supported)

1: Even

(supported)

2: Mark (supported)

3: Space

(supported)

4: None

(supported)

Notes:

• Setting a character framing different from 8N1 will disable autobauding if it was activated. Setting it back to 8N1 will not re-enable autobaud.

• Setting the framing to 8N1 will let the autobauding enabled, if it was already enabled (implying framing was already 8N1).

14.3 DTE-DCE local flow control +IFC

14.3.1 Description

This command is used to control the operation of local flow control between the DTE and DCE.

14.3.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+IFC=<DCE_by_DTE>,<DTE_by_DCE>

Command

AT+IFC?

Note:

AT+IFC=?

Note:

AT+IFC=0,0

Note:

Possible responses

+IFC: 2,2

OK


+IFC: (0,2),(0,2)

OK


OK

Note: New values confidential ©

Page: 219 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005


< DCE_by_DTE >

0: none

(supported)

1: Xon/Xoff local circuit 103

(not supported)

2: RTS

(supported)

3: Xon/Xoff global on circuit 103

(not supported)

Important note

: when this parameter is set to 2 (DTE invokes flow control through RTS) DCE behaviour is as follows:

If the DCE has never detected RTS in the high (or ON) condition since startup, then it ignores RTS (assuming this signal is not connected).

As soon as the DCE detects RTS high the signal acts on it. Therefore subsequent RTS transition to OFF will prevent the DCE from sending any further data in both online and offline modes.

This behaviour allows the user to use the default settings (hardware flow control) and leave RTS disconnected. In the case where RTS is connected and is high at least once, it acts on the DCE.

< DTE_by_DCE >

0: none

(supported)

1: Xon/Xoff circuit 104

(not supported)

2: CTS

(supported)

When this parameter is set to 0 (none) then CTS is kept high all the time.

14.4 Set DCD signal &C

14.4.1 Description

This commands controls the Data Carrier Detect (DCD) signal. confidential ©

Page: 220 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Note: Wavecom products slightly differ from V25ter Recommendation. DCD signal (“Circuit 109”) is turned ON at the same time the CONNECT message is sent, whereas the specification states the DCD should be turned ON after the

CONNECT message was received.

14.4.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT&C<n>

Command

AT&C0

Note: DCD always on

Possible responses

OK

Note: Command valid

AT&C1 OK

Note: DCD matches state of the remote modem’s data carrier

Note: Command valid

<n>

0: DCD always on

1: DCD matches state of the remote modem’s data carrier

14.5 Set DTR signal &D

14.5.1 Description

This commands controls the Data Terminal Ready (DTR) signal.

14.5.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT&D<n>

Command

AT&D0

Note: The DTR signal is ignored

Possible responses

OK

Note: Command valid

AT&D1 OK

Note: Modem switches from data to command mode when DTR switches from

ON to OFF

Note: Command valid

AT&D2 OK

Note: Upon DTR switch from ON to OFF, the call is released


Page: 221 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

<n>

0: The DTR signal is ignored

1: Modem switches from data to command mode when DTR switches from

ON to OFF

2: Upon DTR switch from ON to OFF, the call is released

14.6 Set DSR signal &S

14.6.1 Description

This commands controls the Data Set Ready (DSR) signal.

14.6.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT&S<n>


AT&S0

Note: DSR always on

OK

Note: Command valid

AT&S1 OK

Note: DSR off in command mode, DSR on in data mode

Note: Command valid

<n>

0: DSR always on

1: DSR off in command mode, DSR on in data mode

14.7 Back to online mode O

14.7.1 Description

If a connection has been established and the ME is in command mode, this command allows you to return to online data mode. confidential ©

Page: 222 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

14.7.2 Syntax

Command syntax: ATO

Command

ATO

Return from offline mode to online mode

Possible responses

OK

No parameter

14.8 Result code suppression Q

14.8.1 Description

This command determines whether the mobile equipment sends result codes or not

14.8.2 Syntax

Command syntax: ATQ<n>


ATQ0

Note: DCE transmits result codes

OK

Note: Command valid

ATQ1

Note: Result codes are suppressed and not transmitted

Note: No response

<n>

0: DCE transmits result codes

1: Result codes are suppressed and not transmitted confidential ©

Page: 223 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

14.9 DCE response format V

14.9.1 Description

This command determines whether the DCE response format uses or not the header characters <CR><LF>, and the result codes are provided as numeric or verbose.

14.9.2 Syntax

Command syntax: ATV<n>


ATV0 0

Note: DCE transmits limited headers and trailers and numeric result codes

Note: Command is valid (0 means OK)

ATV1 OK

Note: DCE transmits full headers and trailers and verbose response text

Note: Command valid

<n>=0 <n>=1

Information responses <text><CR><LF> <CR><LF>

<text><CR><LF>

Result codes <numeric code><CR> <CR><LF>

<verbose code><CR><LF>

14.10 Default configuration Z

14.10.1 Description

This command restores the configuration profile. Any call is released. confidential ©

Page: 224 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

14.10.2 Syntax

Command syntax: ATZ

Command

ATZ

Note:


No parameter

14.11 Save configuration &W

Possible responses

Ok

Note: Command valid

14.11.1 Description

This commands writes the active configuration to a non-volatile memory

(EEPROM). Description of the stored parameters is given in appendix

Parameters storage (§19.10)

14.11.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT&W


AT&W OK

Note: Writes current configuration to

EEPROM

Note: Command valid


No parameter

14.12 Auto-tests &T

14.12.1 Description

This command allows to trigger various auto-tests. confidential ©

Page: 225 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

14.12.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT&T<n>

Command

AT&T0

Note: Perform software auto-tests

AT&T1

Note: Do the audio loop test (close)

AT&T2

Note: Stop the audio loop test (open)

Possible responses

OK

Note: No software problem detected, all checksums are correct

OK

Note: Command valid

OK

Note: Command valid


<n>

0: Perform software auto-tests

The response will be OK if no software problem is detected (EEPROM,

RAM and ROM checksums), otherwise a simple ERROR response is sent.

1: Do the audio loop test (close)

This is used to validate the audio loop (microphone to speaker).

2: Stop the audio loop test (open)

This is used to validate the audio loop (microphone to speaker).

14.13 Echo E

14.13.1 Description

This command is used to determine whether the modem echoes characters received by an external application (DTE) or not.

14.13.2 Syntax

Command syntax: ATE<n>

Command

ATE0

Note: Characters are not echoed

ATE1

Note: Characters are echoed

Possible responses

OK

Note: Done

OK

Note: Done confidential ©

Page: 226 / 478




<n>

0: Characters are not echoed

1: Characters are echoed

14.14 Restore factory settings &F

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

14.14.1 Description

This command is used to restore the factory settings from EEPROM.

It only restores the parameters that can be found in table 19.10 (Parameters storage) with AT&F column checked. Those parameters are restored in RAM

and in E2P, owerwriting the profile set with AT&W.

14.14.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT&F[<n>]

Command

AT&F

Note: Ask for restoring the factory settings

AT&F0

Note: idem

Possible responses

OK

Note: Done

OK

Note: Done


<n>

0: restore factory setting

No other value supported

14.15 Display configuration &V

14.15.1 Description

This command is used to display the modem configuration.

14.15.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT&V<n> confidential ©

Page: 227 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

The parameters displayed are the following:

Q: val1, V:val2, S0:val3, S2:val4, S3:val5, S4:val6, S5:val7,

+CR: val8, +CRC:val9, +CMEE:val10, +CBST:val11,

+SPEAKER: val12, +ECHO:val13, &C:val14, &D:val15, %C:val16

+IPR: val17, +ICF:val18, +IFC:val19


AT&V

Note: Display active parameters in

RAM

Q:0 V:1 S0:000 S2:043 S3:013 S4:010 S5:008

+CR:0 +CRC:0 +CMEE:0 +CBST:0,0,1

+SPEAKER:0 +ECHO:0,0 &C:1 &D:2 %C:0

+IPR:9600 +ICF:3,4 +IFC:2,2

OK

Note: Done

For Echo the first value corresponds to Echo cancellation 1.


<n>

0 Display the modem configuration in RAM. (default value if no parameter provided)

1

2

Display the modem configuration in EEPROM.

Display the modem factory configuration. confidential ©

Page: 228 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

14.16 Request identification information I

14.16.1 Description

This command causes the product to transmit one or more lines of specific information text.

14.16.2 Syntax

Command syntax: ATI<n>


ATI0 WAVECOM MODEM

Note: Manufacturer and model identifications

900P

OK

Note: GSM 900 MHz primary band

ATI3

Note: Revision identification

ATI6

Note: Modem data features

ATI7

Note: Modem voice features

440_09gm.Q2406A 1266500 020503

17:06

OK

Note: Software release 4.40, generated on the 05 th

of February 2003

DATA RATES:

AUTOBAUD,300,1200,1200/75,2400,480

0,9600,14400

DATA MODES: T/NT,ASYNCHRONOUS

FAX CLASS 1,2

OK

Note: Done

SPEECH CODINGS: FR,EFR,HR,AMR

OK

Note: Done


<n>

0

3

4

Display manufacturer followed by model identification.

(equivalent to +CGMI and +CGMM, refer to these commands for more precisions).

Display revision identification (equivalent to +CGMR).

Display modem configuration in RAM (equivalent to &V0). confidential ©

Page: 229 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

5

6

Display modem configuration in EEPROM (equivalent to &V1).

Display modem data features. Lists the supported data rates, data modes, and fax classes.

7 Display modem voice features.

Other values “OK” string is sent back.

14.17 Data / Commands Multiplexing +WMUX

14.17.1 Description

This specific command allows to manage the data / AT commands

multiplexing mode. See appendix 19.13 for the Data / Commands multiplexing protocol description.

14.17.2 Syntax

Command syntax AT+WMUX=<mode>


AT+WMUX=? +WMUX: (0-1)

OK

AT+WMUX? +WMUX: 0

OK

AT+WMUX=1

Note: Enable Data / Commands multiplexing.

Note: Data / Commands multiplexing disabled.

OK


<mode>

0: Multiplexing disabled. When the product is online (data communication in progress), no AT command can be used (default).

1: Multiplexing enabled. Data flows and AT commands are multiplexed while in online mode (data communication in progress). confidential ©

Page: 230 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15 Specific AT commands

15.1.1 Description

This command can be used by the application to retrieve the parameters of the main cell and of up to six neighbouring cells.

There are two possible methods for the external application to ascertain these cell parameters:

• on request by the application or

• automatically by the product every 5 seconds.

Automatic mode is not supported during registration.

15.1.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CCED=<mode>[, <requested dump>]


AT+CCED=0

Note: last request was AT+CCED=0,3

(main cell and neighbors 1 to 6): you can see MCC,MNC sequences (here

208,20)

+CCED:208,20,0002,0418,37,706,24,,,0

,,,0,208,20,0006,989b,37,835,20,208,2

0,0002,02a9,37,831,12,208,20,0101,79

66,34,818,13,208,20,0006,9899,39,713

,9,208,20,0002,0a72,33,711,12,208,20,

0101,03fb,36,824,10,1

OK

AT+CCED=0,1

Note: Only Main cell request

+CCED:208,20,0002,0418,37,706,25,,,0

,,,0

OK

AT+CCED=0,1 +CCED:208,10,189C,,19,85,,31,32,,0,0,

Note: Call in progress: RXLev and

RXQual are empty, RxLevFull,

RxLevSub, RxQualFull and RxQualSub have data.

OK confidential ©

Page: 231 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005


<mode>

0: One shot requested

1: Automatic shots requested

2: Stop automatic shots

<requested dump>

1: Main Cell:

• if the Cell Identity is available

MCC, MNC, LAC, CI, BSIC, BCCH Freq (absolute), RxLev, RxLev Full,

RxLev Sub, RxQual, RxQual Full, RxQual Sub, Idle TS

• if the Cell Identity is not available

MCC, MNC, LAC,, BSIC, BCCH Freq (absolute), RxLev, RxLev Full, RxLev

Sub, RxQual, RxQual Full, RxQual Sub, Idle TS

2: Neighbour1 to Neighbour6:

• if the Cell Identity is available

MCC, MNC, LAC, CI, BSIC, BCCH Freq (absolute), RxLev

• if the Cell Identity is not available

MCC, MNC, LAC,, BSIC, BCCH Freq (absolute), RxLev

4: Timing Advance

8: Main cell RSSI indications (RxLev), in a range from 0 to 31

•

Notes:

•

The response for the requested dump 1, 2 and 4 will be:

+CCED:<value1>, … , <valuen>

OK where <value> is the ASCII string of the values (in decimal form except the LAC and CI values which are in hexadecimal form) of the parameters.

If a field cannot be measured – or is meaningless – the parameter is not filled in, and two consecutive commas are sent.

The response for the requested dump 8 will be a +CSQ response and not a +CCED response. The 07.07 format for +CSQ is respected. The <ber> is not evaluated by this command, so the <ber> value will always be 99.

+CSQ:<rssi>, 99

OK confidential ©

Page: 232 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

When automatic shots are selected, this +CSQ response is sent every time the <rssi> measured by the product changes. Automatic shots are supported in idle mode and during communication. The activation or deactivation of this flow (8) does not affect the other flows.

• In idle mode, only RxLev measurements (on the main cell and on the neighboring cells) are made.

• Combination of the requested dump is supported (addition of the values

1, 2, 4 and 8):

Value Requested dump Value Requested dump

1

2

3

4

5

+CCED response: Main

Cell only

9

+CCED response:

Neighbors 1 to 6

+CCED response: Main

Cell, then Neighbors 1 to

6

+CCED response: Main 13

Cell, then Timing

Advance

11

+CCED response: Timing

Advance only

12

+CSQ response, then

+CCED response with Main

Cell only

+CSQ response, then

+CCED response with

Neighbors 1 to 6

+CSQ response, then


Cell, then Neighbors 1 to 6

+CSQ response, then

+CCED response with

Timing Advance only

+CSQ response, then


Cell, then Timing Advance

6

7

Neighbors 1 to 6, then

Timing Advance

14

+CCED response: Main 15

Cell, then its Timing

Advance, then Neighbors

1 to 6, with each Timing

Advance inserted between cells results

+CSQ response, then

+CCED response with

Neighbors 1 to 6, then

Timing Advance

+CSQ response, then


Cell, then its Timing

Advance, then Neighbors 1 to 6, with each Timing

Advance inserted between cells results

8 +CSQ response: Main

Cell RSSI indications

No value

Last value used for a CCED request, or 15

• If <requested dump> parameter is not provided, the one of the last

+CCED command will be used, or 15 (default value). confidential ©

Page: 233 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

• Values of MCC/MNC are set to 0 in the case of “No service”.

15.2 General Indications +WIND

15.2.1 Description

Wavecom has introduced a general mechanism to send unsolicited nonstandardized indications to the application. These indications are:

• indication of a physical change on the SIM detect pin from the connector

(meaning SIM inserted, SIM removed)

• indication during mobile originated call setup that the calling party is ringing.

• Indication of the availability of the product to receive AT commands after boot.

• NITZ indication (Network Information and Time Zone).

For each indication, a “bit flow” has to be indicated.

15.2.2 Syntax:

Command syntax: AT+WIND= <IndLevel >


OK

AT+WIND=255 OK

Note: The SIM presence pin has been detected as “SIM removed”

Note: The SIM presence pin has been detected as “SIM inserted”

Note: The network service is available for an emergency call

+WIND: 7

Note: The initialization has been completed

+WIND: 4 confidential ©

Page: 234 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Note: The modem received a NITZ information message

+WIND: 15,1,”Cingular

Extend”,2,”Cingular”,3,”+08”,4,”03/14/2

7,16:59:48+08”,5,”123456”,6,”2”

The AT+WIND? command is supported and indicates the <allowed bit flows>.

AT+WIND settings are automatically stored in non volatile memory (EEPROM).

This means the &W command does not need to be used and the selected flows are always activated after boot.

Default value is 0: no flow activated, no indication.

AT+WIND=? gives the possible value range (0-4095)

The unsolicited response will then be:

+WIND: <event> [ ,<idx> ]

<idx>: Call identifier, defined in +CLCC command.

Or for event 10:

+WIND: <event>,<phonebook>,<status>,…,<phonebook>,<status>

Or for event 11:

+WIND: <event>,[“<checksum of SM>”],[“<checksum of FD>”],[“<checksum of ON>”],[“<checksum of SN>”] ,[“<checksum of EN>”],[“<checksum of LD>”]

Or for event 15 (NITZ indication):

+WIND: <event>[,1,”<Full name>”][,2,”<Short name>”][,3,”<Local time zone>”][,4,”<Universal time and local time zone>”][,5,”<LSA

Identity>”][,6,”<Daylight Saving time>”] confidential ©

Page: 235 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

<IndLevel>

0 no unsolicited “+WIND: <IndNb>” will occur (default value)

1 (bit 0)

2 (bit 1)

Hardware SIM Insert / Remove indications or SIM presence after software reset

Calling party alert indication

8 (bit 3)

Product is ready to process AT commands (except phonebooks, AOC, SMS), but still in emergency mode. the product is ready to process all AT commands, at the end of init or after swapping to ADN in case of FDN configuration

4) a new call identifier has been created (after an ATD command, +CCWA indication)

32 (bit 5) an active, held or waiting call has been released by network or other party

Network service available indication 64 (bit 6)

128 (bit 7) Network lost indication

256 (bit 8) Audio ON indication

512 (bit 9) SIM Phonebooks reload status

1024 (bit 10) SIM phonebooks checksum indication

2048 (bit 11) Interruption indication (only if FTR_INT is activated)

4096 (bit12) Hardware Rack Open/Closed Indication

8192 (bit13) NITZ indication

Combination (addition of the values) is used to allow more than one indication flow: 0 ≤ IndLevel ≤ 16383

The response is OK if the values are in the previous range. confidential ©

Page: 236 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

The supported events are:

<event>

Event

0

1

Meaning

The SIM presence pin has been detected as “SIM removed”

The SIM presence pin has been detected as “SIM inserted”

2 Calling party is alerting

3 Product is ready to process AT commands (except phonebooks, AOC, SMS), at init or after AT+CFUN=1

4 Product is ready to process all AT commands, end of phonebook init or swap (FDN to ADN)

5 Call <idx> has been created (after ATD or +CCWA…)

6

7

8

Call <idx> has been released, after a NO CARRIER, a +CSSU: 5 indication, or after the release of a call waiting

The network service is available for an emergency call.

The network is lost.

10 Show reload status of each SIM phonebook after init phase

(after Power-ON or SIM insertion).

11 Show the checksum of SIM phonebooks after loading

12 An interruption has occurred

13 The rack has been detected as Closed.

14

15

The rack has been detected as Opened.

The modem received a NITZ information message from the network. confidential ©

Page: 237 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

• for event 10:

<phonebook>: SIM phonebook

“SM”

“FD”

“ON”

“SN”

“EN”

<status>:

0: Not Reloaded from SIM (no change since last init or SIM removal)

1: Reloaded from SIM to internal memory (at least one entry has changed)

• for event 11:

<checksum>: 128-bit “fingerprint” of the phonebook.

Note: If the service of the phonebook is not loaded or not present, the checksum is not displayed and two comas without checksum are displayed (,,).

• for event 15:

<Full name>: String, updated long name for current network

<Short name>: String, updated short name for current network

<Local time zone>: Signed integer, The Time Zone indicates the difference, expressed in quarters of an hour, between the local time and

GMT.

<Local time zone>: String, Universal Time and Time Zone , in format

“yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss±zz”

(Year/Month/Day,Hour:Min:Seconds±TimeZone).

The Time Zone indicates the difference, expressed in quarters of an hour, between the local time and GMT.

<LSA Identity>: Hexa String, LSA identity of the current cell in hexa format (3 bytes) confidential ©

Page: 238 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

<Daylight Saving Time>: Integer (0-2), When the LTZ is compensated for

DST (Day Saving time, or summertime), the serving PLMN shall provide a

DST parameter to indicate it. The adjustment for DST can be +1h or +2h.

Note: For NITZ indication, all the fields indicated here are optional. That is why there is an index related to each information:

• 1: Full name for network

• 2: Short name for network

• 3: Local time zone

• 4: Universal time and local time zone

• 5: LSA Identity

• 6: Network Daylight Saving Time

Refer to 3GPP TS 24.008, 3GPP TS 23.040, 3GPP TS 22.042 for more information. confidential ©

Page: 239 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15.3.1 Description

This command gets the (DC level * 1024) of ADC A, ADC B, and possibly ADC

C. These voltages are coded on 10 bits..

The command returns average values, computed every 10 seconds. The same set of values will be returned between two computings. At initialization

(module start-up), <ADCValA> is set to value 3789, and <ADCValB> and

<ADCValC> are set with instant values read on physical ADCs. Measured

(instant read) values are then stored during 10 seconds until a new set of average values is computed (with instant values measured during this period) and returned in response to an AT+ADC? command. The stabilization of the signals may take time, and the computed values will tend towards useable values within some 10-seconds periods.

15.3.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+ADC=<n>

Response syntax: +ADC: <ADCValA>,<ADCValB>[,<ADCValC>]


AT+ADC=?

Note: Ask for the list of possible values

AT+ADC=0

Note: Select 2 converters (mode 0)

+ADC: (0-1)

Note: possible values 0 or 1

OK

Note: 2 converters mode selected

AT+ADC?

Note: Ask for the current values of converters in mode 0

+ADC: 500,412

OK

Note: Adc A, Adc B on 10 bits

AT+ADC=1

Note: Select 3 converters (mode 1)

OK

Note: 3 converters mode selected

AT+ADC?

Note: Ask for the current values of converters in mode 1

+ADC: 712,698,997

OK

Note: Adc A, Adc B, Adc C on 10 bits confidential ©

Page: 240 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

<n>

0: Select 2 converters

1: Select 3 converters

<ADCValA>

ADC A value, coded on 10 bits. The value returned includes the resistor bridge. Displayed on modes 0 and 1.

<ADCValB>

ADC B value, coded on 10 bits. Displayed on modes 0 and 1.

<ADCValC>

ADC C value, coded on 10 bits. Displayed only on mode 1.

Please refer to description paragraph above for interpretation of the returned values during start-up phase.

Here is the correspondance table between module and parameters values description:

ADC

ADCValA

Q24XX

BAT_VOLT

ADCValB

ADCValC

<BAT_VOLT>: Battery voltage

BAT_TEMP

ADC_AUX

<BAT_TEMP>: Battery temperature

<ADC_AUX>: Pin for customer usage (AUXV0 pin) confidential ©

Page: 241 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15.4.1 Description

This command enables or disables sending of unsolicited result codes in the case of a key press.

15.4.2 Syntax:

Command Syntax: AT+CMER=<mode>,<keyp>,<disp>,<ind>,<bfr>

Response syntax (key press event report): +CKEV: <key>, <press>

Response syntax (indicator event report): +CIEV: <indresp>,<value>.

Command

AT+CMER=,1

Note: Ask key press event report

Possible responses

OK

+CKEV:12,1

+CKEV:12,0

Note: Key 12 has been pressed and released.

OK


Important note: The parameters <mode>, <disp> and <bfr> are not handled.

<keyp> (keypad):

0: No keypad event reporting.

1: Keypad event reporting are routed using unsolicited code. Only the key pressings not caused by +CKPD are indicated.

2: Keypad event reporting are routed using unsolicited code. All key pressings are indicated. confidential ©

Page: 242 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Note: As AT software does not manage the emulation of key press, the values

1 and 2 lead to the same results.

<ind>

0: no indicator event reporting

1: indicator event reporting using unsolicited result code. Only the indicator events not caused by +CIND shall be indicated by the TA to the TE

2: indicator event reporting using unsolicited result code. All indicator events shall be directed from TA to TE

<key>: Keyboard map is (5,5)

0 1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8 9

10 11 12 13 14

15 16 17 18 19

20 21 22 23 24

<press>

1: key press

0: key release

<indresp>: indicator order number (as specified for +CIND)

<value>: new value of the indicator confidential ©

Page: 243 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15.5 Indicator control +CIND

15.5.1 Description

This command is used to read or set the values of ME indicators. If ME does not allow setting of indicators or ME is not currently reachable, an error code is returned.

15.5.2 Syntax

Command Syntax: AT+CIND=[<ind>[,<ind>[,…]]]

Response syntax:

+CIND: <ind>[,<ind>[,…]] or

+CIND: (<descr>,(list of supported <ind>s))[,(<descr>,(list of supported <ind>s)) [,…]]

Command

AT+CIND=[<ind>[,<ind>[,…]]]

Possible responses

+CME ERROR: <err>

Note: ME not reachable

AT+CIND?

Note: read ME indicators current values

+CIND: <ind>[,<ind>[,…]]

OK

AT+CIND=? +CIND: (<descr>,(list of supported

<ind>s))[,(<descr>,(list of supported <ind>s))

[,…]]

Note: read ME indicators possible values

OK

Note: battchg:1 – max=5, signal:2 – max=5, service:1 – we are registered on the network, message:1 – a SMS has been received, call:0 – no call in progress, roam:0 – not roaming, smsfull:0 –

SIM card is not full of SMS

AT+CIND=? +CIND: (“battchg”,(0-5)),(“signal”,(0-

5)),(“service”,(0-1)),(“message”,(0-1)),(“call”,(0-

1)),(“roam”,(0-1)),(“smsfull”,(0-1))

Note: read possible value for ME indicators

OK confidential ©

Page: 244 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005


<ind> integer type value, which shall be in range of corresponding <descr>:

0: indicator is OFF or in state which can be identified as “OFF” state

1: indicator is ON or in a state that is more substantial than “OFF” state

2: this value is more substantial than 1, and so on.

Note: If the indicator is a simple ON/OFF style element, it has values 0 and 1.

<descr>:

“battchg”: battery charge level (0 – 5)

“signal”: signal quality (0 – 5)

“service”: service availability (0 – 1)

“message”: message received (0 – 1)

“call”: call in progress (0 – 1)

“roam”: roaming indicator (0 – 1)

“smsfull”: SMS memory storage status in the MT (0 – 1)

0: memory locations are available

1: memory full

15.6.1 Description

This command selects the equipment which operates ME keypad, writes to ME display and sets ME indicators. If operation mode is not allowed by the ME,

+CME ERROR: <err> is returned

15.6.2 Syntax

Command Syntax: AT+CMEC=[<keyp>[,<disp>[,<ind>]]] confidential ©

Page: 245 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Response syntax: +CMEC: <keyp>,<disp>,<ind>


AT+CMEC=[<keyp>[,<disp>[,<ind>]]] +CME ERROR: <err>

AT+CMEC=[<keyp>[,<disp>[,<ind>]]] OK

OK

OK

Note: no change allowed


<keyp>:

0: ME can be operated only through its keypad (execute command of +CKPD cannot be used)

1: ME can be operated only from TE (with command +CKPD)

2: ME can be operated from both ME keypad and TE

<disp>:

0: only ME can write to its display (command +CDIS can only be used to read the display)

1: only TE can write to ME display (with command +CDIS)

2: ME display can be written by both ME and TE

<ind>:

0: only ME can set the status of its indicators (command +CIND can only be used to read the indicators)

1: only TE can set the status of ME indicators (with command +CIND)

2: ME indicators can be set by both ME and TE confidential ©

Page: 246 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15.7 Read Language Preference +WLPR

15.7.1 Description

Read a Language Preference value of EF-LP. The first indices should have the highest priority.

15.7.2 Syntax

Command

AT+WLPR?

Note: Read command

AT+WLPR=1

Note: Read first EF-LP index value

Possible responses

+WLPR: 4

OK

Note: Four language preferences are available in EF-LP

+WLPR: 5

OK

Note: Language preference is 5

<index> offset in the available languages range (SIM dependant).

<value>

Exemple of values for language: (see 23038)

<value> Language

0 German

1 English

2 Italian

3 French

4 Spanish

5 Dutch

6 Swedish confidential ©

Page: 247 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

7 Danish

8 Portuguese

9 Finnish

10 Norwegian

11 Greek

12 Turkish

13 Hungarian

14 Polish

32 Czech

33 Hebrew

34 Arabic

35 Russian

36 Icelandic confidential ©

Page: 248 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15.8 Write Language Preference +WLPW

15.8.1 Description

Write a Language Preference value in EF-LP

15.8.2 Syntax

Response syntax: OK or +CME ERROR: <err>


AT+WLPW=1,5 OK

Note: Write Lang Pref equal to 5 in EF-LP with index 1

Note: EF-LP correctly updated

<index>: offset in the available languages range (SIM dependant).

<value>

See <value> examples above.

15.9 Read GPIO value +WIOR

15.9.1 Description

Read the requested GPI or GPIO pin value.

• Note: by default (e.g. after a reset), the I/O ports configuration is set by the +WIOM command.

• This command is allowed only on a Gpio not allocated by an Open-AT embedded application or for bus operations.

15.9.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+WIOR=<index> confidential ©

Page: 249 / 478



Command

AT+WIOR=0

Read I/O (number 0) value

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Possible responses

+WIOR: 0

OK

GPIO number 0 is reset

<index>

Up to ten I/O ports are available. The <index> value is between 0 and 9.

<value>

0: I/O port number <index> is reset.

1: I/O port number <index> is set.

15.10 Write GPIO value +WIOW

15.10.1 Description

Set the requested GPO or GPIO pin value.

Note:

• by default (after a reset), the I/O ports configuration is set by the +WIOM command.

• This command is allowed only on a GPIO not allocated by the Open-AT embedded application or for bus operations.

15.10.2 Syntax

Command

AT+WIOW=2,0

Reset I/O (number 2)

Possible responses

OK

GPIO value is written


<index>

Up to ten I/O ports are available. The <index> value is between 0 and 9.

<value> confidential ©

Page: 250 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

0: I/O port number <index> is reset.

1: I/O port number <index> is set.

15.11 Input/Output Management +WIOM

15.11.1 Description

This specific command allows to set the default GPIOs configuration (input or output) after reset, and each GPIO default value (if set as an output) after reset.

Note:

• This command is allowed only on a GPIO not allocated by the Open-AT embedded application or for bus operations.

15.11.2 Syntax

Command Syntax AT+WIOM=[<GpioDir>],[<GpioVal>]


AT+WIOM? +WIOM:

OK

Note: On reset, all GPIOs are set to 0, as an output.

AT+WIOM=? +WIOM:

OK

AT+WIOM=254

Note: Range allowed for the parameters.

OK

Note: Set GPIO 0 as an input, and all other

GPIOs as outputs (not relevant for Q31x6 product).

AT+WIOM=,128 OK

Note: Set GPIO 8 (on P32X6 product) or

GPO 3 (on Q24X6 product) default output value to 1. or GPIO12 (on P51x6 product) or GPIO7 (on Q31x6 product).

AT+WIOM? +WIOM:

OK


<GpioDir>: Bit table parameter indicating each GPIO direction. confidential ©

Page: 251 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

0: input

1:

Default value:

• 1023 (all GPIOs set as outputs) for Q2xxx and P3xxx modules.

• 0 (all GPIOs set as inputs) for Q31 and P51 modules. output.

<GpioVal>: Bit table parameter indicating each output-configurated GPIO value

(each bit gives the corresponding GPIO default value).

0: reset (default value)

1: set

Remark: the GPIOs set as inputs by the <GpioDir> parameter are not affected by the value set by the <GpioVal> parameter.

Notes:

• <GpioDir> bit values for GPI and GPO are ignored.

• <GpioVal> bit values for GPI are ignored.

• GPO0 is used for the SIM level shifter, if any, for Q24x6 and P32x6 products. If SIM5VONLY or SIM3AND5V features are active, it must not be modified by AT commands. Its default value depends on SIM feature

(see AT+WFM command): or

SIM3AND5V feature

Use of SIM 3V card default value = 0

Use of SIM 5V card default value =1

AT+WIOM is ignored for GPO0. confidential ©

Page: 252 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

• Here is the corresponding table between Module GPIO Pin Names and parameters values (<index>) for AT commands:

Param value for

AT

Commands

Wismo

Quik

Q2xx3 Pin

Names

Wismo

Pac

P3xx3

Pin

Names

Wismo Quik

Q24X6 Pin

Names

Wismo

Pac

P32X6

Pin

Names

Wismo

Pac

P51x6

Pin

Names

Wismo

Quik

Q31x6

Pin

Names

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

GPIO 0

GPO 1

GPO 2

GPI

GPIO 4

GPIO 0

GPI

GPIO 2

GPIO 3

GPIO 4

GPIO 0

GPO 1

GPO 2

GPI

GPIO 4

GPIO 0

GPI

GPIO 2

GPIO 3

GPIO 4

GPIO 0

GPIO 4

GPIO 5

GPIO 8

GPIO 9

GPI

GPO 1

GPO 2

GPIO 3

GPIO 4

GPIO 5 GPIO 5 GPIO 5

(no GPIO affected)

(no GPIO affected)

GPO 0

GPIO 5

GPO 0

GPIO 10 GPIO 5

GPIO 11 GPIO 6

(no GPIO affected)

(no GPIO affected)

GPO 3 GPIO 8 GPIO 12 GPIO 7

(no GPIO affected)

(no GPIO affected)

(no GPIO affected)

(no GPIO affected)

GPO 0 (no GPIO affected)

(no GPIO affected)

(no GPIO affected)

(no GPIO affected)

(no GPIO affected)

GPO 1 (no GPIO affected)

15.12 Abort command +WAC

15.12.1 Description

This specific command allows SMS, SS and PLMN selection related commands to be aborted.

15.12.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+WAC

Command Syntax Return

AT+WAC

AT+WAC=? OK

AT+WAC? OK confidential ©

Page: 253 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Example:

Command

AT+COPS=?

Note: Available PLMN

AT+WAC

Note: Abort the request of PLMN list


No parameter

15.13 Play tone +WTONE

Possible responses

OK

Note: PLMN list request aborted

15.13.1 Description

This specific command allows a tone to be played on the current speaker or on the buzzer. Frequency, gain and duration can be specified.

15.13.2 Syntax

Command syntax:

AT+WTONE=<mode>[,<dest>,<freq>[,<gain>[,<duration>[,<freq2>,[<ga in2>]]]]]


Command

AT+WTONE=1,1,300,9,50

Note: Play a tone

AT+WTONE=0

Note: Stop playing

AT+WTONE=?

Note: Test command

AT+WTONE?

Note: Current value

OK

Note: Done

OK

Note: Done

OK

Note: Done

ERROR

Note:

Possible responses confidential ©

Page: 254 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Command

AT+WTONE=1,1,300,9,50,600,9

Note: Play a tone with 2 frequencies (only allowed with the speaker)

AT+WTONE=1,2,300,9,50,600,9

Note: Play a tone with 2 frequencies with the buzzer

OK

Note: Done

Possible responses

+CME ERROR: 3

Note: Dual frequency only for the speaker


<mode>

0: Stop playing.

1: Play a tone

<dest>: This parameter sets the destination (mandatory if <mode>=1)

1: Speaker

2: Buzzer

<freq>: This parameter sets tone frequency (in Hz) (mandatory if <mode>=1).

<freq2>: This parameter sets the 2 nd the speaker)

tone frequency (in Hz) (only available with

If <dest> = 1 (speaker), range is 300Hz to 3400 Hz for P51xx modules range is 1 Hz to 3999 Hz for other modules.

If <dest> = 2 (buzzer), range is 1 Hz to 50000 Hz. confidential ©

Page: 255 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

<gain>: This parameter sets the tone gain for the <freq>. The default value is

9.

<gain2>: This parameter sets the tone gain for the <freq2>. The default value is 9.

Range of values is 0 to 15.

<gain> Speaker (db) Buzzer (db)

0 0 -0.25

1 -0.5 -0.5

2 -1 -1

3 -1.5 -1.5

4 -2

5 -3

6 -6

7 -9

-2

-3

-6

-9

8 -12 -12

9 -15 -15

10 -18

11 -24

-18

-24

12 -30

13 -36

-30

-40

14 -42 -infinite

15 -infinite -infinite

<duration>: This parameter sets tone duration (in unit of 100 ms).

Range of values is 0 to 50 (0 is default value, 1 -> 0,1 s., 50 -> 5 s.)

Remark: when <duration> = 0, the duration is infinite, and the tone should be stopped by AT+WTONE=0.

Note : The 2 nd the speaker.

frequency <freq2> and the gain <gain2> are only allowed for confidential ©

Page: 256 / 478



15.14 Play DTMF tone +WDTMF

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15.14.1 Description

This specific command allows a DTMF tone to be played on the current speaker. DTMF, gain and duration can be specified.

Remark: This command is only used to play a DTMF tone. To send a DTMF over the GSM network, use the +VTS command.

15.14.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+WDTMF=<mode>[,<dtmf>,<gain>,<duration>]


Command

AT+WDTMF=1,”*”,9,50

Note: Play a DTMF tone

AT+WDTMF=0

Note: Stop playing

AT+WDTMF=?

Note: Test command

AT+WDTMF?

Note: Current value

Possible responses

OK

Note: Done

OK

Note: Done

+WDTMF: (0-1),(0-9,*,#,A,B,C,D),(0-

15),(0-50)

OK

Note: Done

ERROR

Note:


<mode>

0: Stop playing.

1: Play a DTMF tone

<dtmf>: This parameter sets the DTMF to play (mandatory if

<mode>=1).

Value must be in {0-9,*,#,A,B,C,D}

<gain>: This parameter sets tone gain. The values are identical to those of the

+WTONE (speaker) command. The default value is 9.

Range of values is 0 to 15 (see array on §15.14.3)

confidential ©

Page: 257 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

<duration>: This parameter sets the tone duration (in unit of 100 ms).

Range of values is 0 to 50 (0 is default value, 1 -> 0,1 s., 50 -> 5 s.)

Remark: when <duration> = 0, the duration is infinite, and the DTMF tone can be stopped by AT+WDTMF=0.

.

15.15 Wavecom Downloading +WDWL

15.15.1 Description

This specific command switches the product to download mode.

Downloading is performed using the 1K-XMODEM protocol.

Important note: Software damages may occur if power is lost or if an hardware reset occurs during the downloading phase. This would seriously affect modem behavior.

15.15.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+WDWL

Command

AT+WDWL

Note: Switch on downloading mode

Possible responses

+WDWL: 0

Note: Start the downloading

…

Note: Downloading in progress

AT+CFUN=1

Note: Reset the product at the end

OK

Note: reset completed, new software running

OK



Page: 258 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15.16 Wavecom Voice Rate +WVR

15.16.1 Description

This specific command allows the voice rate for bearer voice to be configured for outgoing and ingoing calls.

Note: According to the module capabilities, the following voice coding types are allowed: o Module supporting AMR: FR, EFR, AMR-FR, AMR-HR are supported. o Module not supporting AMR: FR, EFR, HR are supported.

15.16.2 Syntax

Command syntax:

AT+WVR=<out_coding_type>[,<in_coding_type>]

AT+WVR=[<out_coding_type>],<in_coding_type>

OK

Note: <out_coding_type> is related to outgoing calls, and <in_coding_type> to incoming calls.


AT+WVR=1 OK

Note: Configure voice type FR and EFR for outgoing calls only

Note: Bearer is configured for outgoing calls

AT+WVR=1,4 OK

Note: Configure voice type FR and EFR for outgoing calls and HR and EFR for incoming calls

Note: Bearer is configured for outgoing and incoming calls

AT+WVR=,4 OK

Note: Configure voice type HR and EFR for incoming calls

Note: Bearer is unchanged for outgoing calls and configured for incoming calls

AT+WVR=6

Note: Syntax error

AT+WVR?

Note: Ask for the current values

+CME ERROR: 3

Note: Syntax error

+WVR: 1,1

OK confidential ©

Page: 259 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005


Note: If Half Rate available

Note: If EFR available

Note: If neither HR nor EFR available

Note: If HR and EFR available

AT+WVR=? +WVR:

(0,2,3,10,11,12,13,14),(0,2,3,10,11,12,13

,14)

Note: If Half Rate and AMR available

AT+WVR=? +WVR:

(0,1,6,9,10,12,13),(0,1,6,9,10,12,13)

Note: If EFR and AMR available

Note: If AMR available

Note: If HR, EFR and AMR available

1.1.2 Defined values confidential ©

Page: 260 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

<n>: Voice coding type.

Voice coding type

Preferred type

Other supported types

Default values

0 FR default incoming voice calls rate default outgoing voice calls rate

EFR,

HR

HR,

EFR

FR,

HR

15.17 Wavecom Data Rate +WDR

15.17.1 Description

This specific command allows the data rate for bearer data to be configured for outgoing and incoming calls. confidential ©

Page: 261 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15.17.2 Syntax

Command syntax:

AT+WDR=<out_coding_type>[,<in_coding_type>]

AT+WDR=[<out_coding_type>],<in_coding_type>

OK

Note: <out_coding_type> is related to outgoing calls, and <in_coding_type> to incoming calls.


OK

Note: If Half Rate available in both directions

OK

Note: If Half Rate not available.


AT+WDR=1 OK

Note: Configure data type FR, HR with HR preferred, for outgoing calls

(<in_coding_type> parameter is ommited)

Note: Bearer is configured

AT+WDR=,1 OK

Note: Configure data type FR for incoming calls (<out_coding_type > parameter is ommited)

Note: Bearer is configured

AT+WDR=3

Note: Illegal value

AT+WDR?

Note: Ask for the current value

+CME ERROR: 3

Note: Syntax error

+WDR: 1,1

OK confidential ©

Page: 262 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005


<out_coding_type>: Data coding type for outgoing calls.

Data coding type

Preferred type

Other supported types

0 FR

Default values

1 HR FR

2 FR HR default outgoing voice calls rate

<in_coding_type>: Data coding type for incoming calls.

Data coding type

0 HR

1 FR default incoming data calls rate

15.18 Hardware Version +WHWV

15.18.1 Description

This specific command gets the hardware version.

15.18.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+WHWV

Command

AT+WHWV

Note: Request Hardware Version

AT+WHWV

Note: Request Hardware Version

Possible responses

Hardware Version 4.14

OK

Note: Hardware version is 4.14

Hardware Version -.—

OK

Note: No hardware version available confidential ©

Page: 263 / 478




No parameter

15.19 Date of Production +WDOP

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15.19.1 Description

This specific command gets the date of production. Format of the date is

Week/Year (ww/yyyy).

15.19.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+WDOP

Command

AT+WDOP

Note: Request Date of Production

AT+WDOP

Note: Request Date of Production

Possible responses

Production date (W/Y): 01/2000

OK

Note: Date of production is WEEK: 01 /

YEAR: 2000 (1 st

week of year 2000)

Production date (W/Y): --/----

OK

Note: No date of production available


No parameter

15.20 Wavecom Select Voice Gain +WSVG

15.20.1 Description

The product has 2 voice gain controllers, this specific command selects the microphone gain controller. confidential ©

Page: 264 / 478



15.20.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+WSVG = <n>

Command

AT+WSVG=<n>

AT+WSVG=0

Note: Select Controller 1 (Default)

AT+WSVG=1

Note: Select Controller 2 (Default)

AT+WSVG=?

Note: Get the list of possible values

AT+WSVG?

Note: Get the current value


<n> Controller

0: Controller 1 (Default)

1: Controller 2

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

Possible responses

OK

Note: Controller 1 selected

OK

Note: Controller 2 selected

+WSVG: (0-1)

Note: possible values 0 or 1

+WSVG: 1

Note: Controller 1 is selected

-

008


Page: 265 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15.21 Wavecom Status Request +WSTR

15.21.1 Description

This specific command returns some operation status. It can be used for example to check the state of the initialisation sequence; the different values returned are Not started, Ongoing, Finished.

15.21.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+WSTR=<status>

Response syntax: +WSTR: <status>,<value>


AT+WSTR=<status> +WSTR:<status>,<value>

AT+WSTR=1

Note: Select the status 1 (INIT SEQUENCE)

+WSTR: 1,2

OK

Note: Init finished

AT+WSTR=2 +WSTR: 2,1

Note: Select the status 2 (NETWORK

STATUS)

OK

Note: The network is available

AT+WSTR=?


+WSTR: (1-2)

Note: possible values : 1 and 2


<status>

1: Initialisation sequence

<value>

0: Not started

1: On going

2: Finished

2: Network status

<value>

0: No network confidential ©

Page: 266 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15.22.1 Description

This specific command displays the received signal strength indication (<rssi>) for a specified frequency (in absolute format).

This command is not allowed during communication.

15.22.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+WSCAN=<absolute frequency>

Response syntax: +WSCAN: <rssi>


AT+WSCAN=50 +WSCAN: 23

OK

Note: Request <rssi> of absolute frequency

50

Note: <rssi> is 23.

AT+WSCAN=1025 CME ERROR: 3

Note: Request power of absolute frequency

1025

Note: 1025 is not a valid absolute frequency


<absolute frequency>: frequency in absolute format<rssi>

0: -113 dBm or less

1: -111 dBm

2-30: -109 to –53 dBm

31: -51dBm or more

99: not known or not detectable

15.23 Wavecom Ring Indicator Mode +WRIM

15.23.1 Description

This specific command sets the state of the Ring Indicator Mode.

• Up-down RI mode: no pulses are sent before unsolicited AT response.

Up-down signals are sent when receiving an incoming call.

• Pulse RI mode: an electrical pulse is sent on the Ring Indicator signal just before sending any unsolicited AT response, in order to lose no AT confidential ©

Page: 267 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005 responses when client tasks are in sleep state. Still in RI mode, when receiving incoming calls, electrical pulses are sent on the RI signal.

• Pulse RI Mode + Pulse On Packet Downloaded: based on Pulse RI mode but an electrical pulse is also sent on the Ring Indicator signal just before sending a downloaded data packet (GPRS or CSD) if the remote client tasks has dropped down his RTS signal.

15.23.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+WRIM=<mode>[,<n>]

Command

AT+WRIM=0

Note: Select up-down RI mode

AT+WRIM=1

Note: Select pulse RI mode

AT+WRIM=?


OK

Note: pulse RI mode selected

AT+WRIM=2,0 OK

Note: Select mode pulse RI + Pulse on downloaded packet, pulse duration is 5 µs

Note: mode pulse RI + Pulse on downloaded packet selected

+WRIM: (0-2),(0-33)

OK

Note: possible values 0,1 or 2

AT+WRIM?

Note: Ask for the current value

Possible responses

OK

Note: up-down RI mode selected

+WRIM: 1,0

OK

Note: current RI mode is pulse RI.


<mode>

0 Up-down RI mode

1 Pulse RI mode

2 Pulse RI mode + Pulse on Downloaded Packet

<n>: used only in mode RI Pulse + Pulse on Downloaded packet (<mode>=2).

0 Duration of pulse is 5 µs.

1-33 Duration of pulse is n x 30µs.

Warning: Pulse duration may be increased by up to 3 ms, due to interrupt processes overhead.

Note: Remind that this mode corresponds to the case where the remote equipment has dropped its RTS signal, to stop its flow control. confidential ©

Page: 268 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15.24 Wavecom 32kHz Power down Mode +W32K

15.24.1 Description

This specific command allows the 32kHz power down mode to be enabled or disabled.

Note:

• When power down mode is entered, the product uses a 32kHz internal clock during inactivity stages (despite of its nominal internal clock).

• When enabled, power down mode is active after 1 to 15 minutes. The mode is not stored in EEPROM: the command has to be repeated after a reset.

For additional information on power down mode, see APPENDIX F:

Specification of Power Down Control via RS232.

15.24.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+W32K=<mode>

Command

AT+W32K=1

Note: Enable 32kHz power down mode

AT+W32K=0

Note: Disable 32kHz power down mode


<mode>:

0: Disable 32kHz power down mode

1: Enable 32kHz power down mode

Possible responses

OK

Note: 32kHz power down mode is enabled

OK

Note: 32kHz power down mode is disabled confidential ©

Page: 269 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15.25 Wavecom Change Default Melody +WCDM

15.25.1 Description

This specific command allows the selection of a manufacturer specific melody..

This default melody will be played for any new incoming voice call, either on the buzzer or on the speaker.

15.25.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+WCDM=<melody>,<player>

Command

AT+WCDM=0

Note: Select no melody

Possible responses

OK

AT+WCDM=5

Note: Select melody n°5

AT+WCDM?

Note: Indicate the current melody

OK

+WCDM: 5,0

OK

Note: Melody n°5 is currently selected, and the buzzer is selected to play it.

RING

Note: An incoming call occurs, and the melody n°5 is played on the buzzer.

AT+WCDM=,1

Note: Select the speaker to play the melody on.

OK

AT+WCDM? +WCDM:

OK

Note: Now the speaker is selected to play the melody if an incoming call occurs.


<melody>

0: No melody (default)

1 – 10: Melody 1 to 10

<player>

0: Melody n°<melody> will be played on the buzzer for any new incoming voice call. (default) confidential ©

Page: 270 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

1: Melody n°<melody> will be played on the speaker for any new incoming voice call.

15.26 Wavecom Software version +WSSW

15.26.1 Description

This specific command displays some internal software reference.

15.26.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+WSSW

Command

AT+WSSW

Note: Get Software version

Possible responses

A00_00gm.2c 000000008F5DC6EA

OK

Note: internal software information



Page: 271 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15.27 Wavecom Custom Character Set +WCCS

15.27.1 Description

This specific command allows to edit and display the custom character set tables. These tables are used by the “CUSTOM” mode of +CSCS and the

+WPCS commands. In this CUSTOM mode, when the user enters a string, it is converted into GSM alphabet using the Custom To GSM table. In a similar way, when the user requests a string display, the string is converted from

GSM alphabet using the GSM To Custom table.

In edition mode, the session is terminated by <ctrl-Z>, or aborted by <ESC>.

Only hexadecimal characters (‘0’…’9’, ‘A’…’F’) can be used. The number of characters entered must be equal to the edition range requested, otherwise the command will return “+CME ERROR: 3”.

15.27.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+WCCS=<mode>,<table>,<char 1>[,<char 2>]


AT+WCCS=0,0,120,130

Note: Display from character 120 to character 130 of the Custom To GSM conversion table

+WCCS: 11,

78797A2020202020097E05

OK

Note: 11 characters displayed

AT+WCCS=1,0,115<CR>

20<ctrl-Z>

Note: Edit character 115 of the Custom To

GSM conversion table

OK

Note: Edition successful

AT+WCCS=1,1,0,4<CR>

40A324A5E8<ctrl-Z>

Note: Edit the 5 first characters of the GSM

To Custom conversion table

OK

Note: Edition successful

AT+WCCS=1,1,200 +CME ERROR: 3

Note: Edit character 200 of GSM To

Custom conversion table

Note: Index out of range


<mode> confidential ©

Page: 272 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

0: Display the table

1: Edit the table

<table>

0: Custom To GSM conversion table

1: GSM To Custom conversion table

<char 1>, <char 2>: Character range to display/edit.

0-127: for GSM To Custom conversion table

0-255: for Custom To GSM conversion table

Note: If only <char 1> is provided, only this char is displayed/edited.

See section 20.6 for informative examples on phonebooks.

confidential ©

Page: 273 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15.28 Wavecom LoCK +WLCK

15.28.1 Description

This specific command allows the ME to be locked on a specific network operator.

Note: Test SIM cards (with MCC=001 & MNC=01) doesn’t check these locks.

15.28.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+WLCK=<fac>,<passwd>,<NetId>[,<GID1>[,GID2]]

[,<CnlType>[,<CnlData>]]


AT+WLCK=”PN”,12345678,20810 OK

Note: Activate network lock on SFR

(208,10)

Note: Network lock activated

AT+WLCK=”PS”,12345678,20810592356

8974

Note: Activate SIM lock

OK

Note: SIM lock activated

AT+WLCK=”PU”,12345678,2081035 OK

Note: Activate Network Subset lock on SFR

(208, 10, 35).

Note: Network Subset lock activated

AT+WLCK=”PU”,12345678,20810 +CME ERROR: 3

Note: Need 7 digits of IMSI to perform a service provider lock

AT+WLCK=”PP”,12345678,20810,”E5” OK

Note: Activate Service Provider lock on SFR

(208, 10) and GID1 (0xE5).

Note: Service Provider lock activated.

AT+WLCK=”PC”,12345678,20810,”E5”,”1

0”

OK

Note: Activate Corporate lock on SFR (208,

10), GID1 (0xE5) and GID2 (0x10).

Note: Corporate lock activated.

AT+WLCK=”PN”,12345678,20810,0 OK

Note: Activate Network lock on SFR (208,

10) using co-operative network list from

SIM file EFCNL (must be present in SIM)

Note: Network lock activated on SFR and co-operative network list present in SIM confidential ©

Page: 274 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

AT+WLCK=”PN”,12345678,20801,1,”02F8

02FFFFFF02F801FFFFFF”

OK

Note: Activate Network lock on F ORANGE

(208, 01) with manual co-operative network list including SFR (208, 10) and

Bouygues Telecom (208, 20)

Note: Network lock activated on F

ORANGE (primary network), SFR and

Bouygues Telecom (co-operative networks)


<fac>:

“PS”: SIM lock facility with a 8 digits password (PCK).

“PN”: Network lock with a 8 digits password (NCK).

“PU”: Network subset lock with a 8 digits password (NSCK).

“PP”: Service provider lock with a 8 digits password (SPCK).

“PC”: Corporate lock with a 8 digits password (CCK).

<CnlType>: Type of lock for cooperative network list (CNL)

0: Automatic (co-operative network list retrieved from EFCNL SIM file)

Note: EFCNL file must be present in SIM to use automatic mode.

1: Manual (cooperative network list is given in the <CnlData> parameter)

<CnlData>: Co-operative network list (hexa string type) using same format as in EFCNL SIM file (ETSI GSM 11.11 or 3GPP 04.08).

Note: Only if <CnlType> = 1

15.29 CPHS command: +CPHS

15.29.1 Description

This specific command is used to activate, deactivate or interrogate a CPHS feature (e.g. Voice Mail Indicator, Mail Box Number…)

Note: This command may answer +CME ERROR: 3 if the CPHS feature is disabled (cf. +WFM command), or if the SIM card does not support this CPHS feature. confidential ©

Page: 275 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15.29.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CPHS=<Mode>,<FctId>[,<precision>]


AT+CPHS=<Mode>,<FctId>[,<precision>] OK

AT+CPHS=<Mode>,<FctId>[,<precision>] +CME ERROR: 3

AT+CPHS?

+CPHS: <FctId1>,<Status><CR<LF>

+CPHS: <FctId2>,<Status><CR<LF>

…

+CPHS: <FctIdn>,<Status><CR<LF>

OK

AT+CPHS=? OK


<Mode>

0: Deactivate a CPHS feature

1: Activate a CPHS feature

2: Interrogate a CPHS status

Note: The deactivate or activate command has not effect for Alternate line service, Network Operator Name, CPHS information and Customer Profile

Service features.

<FctId>

1: Voice Mail Indicator

2: Mail Box Number

3: Alternate Line Service

4: Diverted Call Indicator

5: Network Operator Name

6: CPHS Information

7: Customer Service Profile

Note: The Customer Service Profile and Alternate Line Service features are activated if the field is set in CPHS information and CSP files. The Network confidential ©

Page: 276 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Operator Name is activated if at least one of the two format names exist (Long or Short format).This is done at initialization.

<precision>: only used if <Mode>=2 and <FctId>= 5 to 7 if <FctId>=5, this field is <type format> (See +WNON) if <FctId>=6, this field is <data field> (See +WCPI) if <FctId>=7, this field is <service> (See +WCSP)

<Status>

0: CPHS feature disabled

1: CPHS feature enabled

15.29.4 Examples

AT+CPHS?

+CPHS: 1,0

+CPHS: 2,0

+CPHS: 3,1

+CPHS: 4,0

+CPHS: 5,1

+CPHS: 6,1

+CPHS: 7,1

OK

AT+CPHS=3,1

+CME ERROR: 3

AT+CPHS=1,1

OK

Interrogate the status of CPHS functionality

The voice mail indicator functionality is deactivated

The mail box number functionality is deactivated

The Alternate Line Service functionality is activated

The Divert Call Indicator functionality is deactivated

The Network Operator Name functionality is activated

The CPHS Information functionality is activated

The Customer Service Profile functionality is activated

Syntax error

Activate the voice mail indicator functionality confidential ©

Page: 277 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

AT+CPHS?

+CPHS: 1,1

+CPHS: 2,0

+CPHS: 3,1

+CPHS: 4,0

+CPHS: 5,1

Interrogate the status of CPHS functionality

The voice mail indicator functionality is activated

The mail box number functionality is deactivated






+CPHS: 6,1

+CPHS: 7,1

OK

**** the message box contains 1 message *****

+WVMI: 1,1 A message is waiting on Line 1

***** The message box contains a second message ***

+WVMI: 2,1 A message is waiting on Line 2

AT+CPHS=1,4

AT+CPHS=1,2

Activate the divert call indicator functionality

OK

**** the call forwarding is active on Line 1 *****

+WDCI: 1,1 Call forwarding is activated on Line 1

AT+CPHS=2,1

+WVMI: 1,1

+WVMI: 2,1

+WVMI: 3,0

+WVMI: 4,0

OK

Interrogate the status of voice mail indicator functionality a message is waiting on LINE 1 a message is waiting on LINE 2 no Data waiting no Fax waiting

Activate the mail box number functionality

OK

AT+WALS=1

+WALS: 2

OK

Interrogate the status of activated Line

The current line is number 2

AT+CPHS=0,4 Deactivate the divert call indicator functionality

OK

AT+CPHS?

Interrogate the status of CPHS functionality confidential ©

Page: 278 / 478



+CPHS: 1,1

+CPHS: 2,1

+CPHS: 3,1

+CPHS: 4,0

+CPHS: 5,1

+CPHS: 6,1

+CPHS: 7,1

OK

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

The voice mail indicator functionality is activated

The mail box number functionality is activated

AT+CPHS=2,2

Query current mail box numbers in SIM

+WMBN: 1,”19254871234”,129,,1

Mail box number for Line 1

+WMBN: 2,,,1

+WMBN: 3,,,1

+WMBN: 4,,,1

OK

Mail box number for Line 2

Mail box number for Data Line

Mail box number for Fax Line

Only Line1 can be updated






15.30 Unsolicited result: Wavecom Voice Mail Indicator:

+WVMI

15.30.1 Description

This unsolicited indication gives the status of the LINE 1, LINE 2, DATA or FAX mailboxes. The +CPHS command can be used to know the status of voice mail indicator for each line. confidential ©

Page: 279 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15.30.2 Syntax

Response syntax: +WVMI: <LineId>,<Status>

Response syntax (to AT+CPHS=2,1)

+WVMI = <LineId>,<Status>


AT+CPHS=1,1 OK

Note: Activate the Voice Mail indicator feature.

AT+CPHS=2,1 +WVMI: 1,1 a message is waiting on LINE 1

Note: Get the current status of Voice mail indicator.

+WVMI: 2,1 a message is waiting on LINE 2

+WVMI: 3,0 no Data waiting

+WVMI: 4,0

no Fax waiting

AT+CPHS=2,1 +CME ERROR: 3

Note: CPHS Feature is not allowed

OK AT+CPHS=1,1

Note: Activation of Voice mail indicator feature.

Note: The Voice mail indicator feature is activated

Note: A message is waiting on Line 1


<LineId>

1: Line 1

2: Line 2

3: Data

4: Fax

<Status>

0: No message waiting.

1: At least one message is waiting confidential ©

Page: 280 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Unsolicited result: Wavecom diverted call indicator: +WDCI

15.31.1 Description

This indication provides the call forwarding flags. The +CPHS command can be used to know the status of Divert call indicator for each line.

15.31.2 Syntax

Response syntax: +WDCI:<LineId>,<flag>


+WDCI = <LineId>,<Status>


AT+CPHS=1,4 OK

Note: Activate the Divert Call indicator feature.

AT+CPHS=2,4 +WDCI: 1,1 divert call indicator is active on LINE 1

Note: Get the current status of Divert call indicator.

+WDCI: 2,1 divert call indicator is active on LINE 2

+WDCI: 3,0 divert call indicator is deactivate on Data

+WDCI: 4,1

divert call indicator is active on Fax



OK AT+CPHS=1,4

Note: Activation of Divert call indicator feature.

Note: The Divert call indicator feature is activated

Note: Call forwarding is activate on Line 1


<LineId>

1: Line 1

2: Line 2

3: Data

4: Fax

<flag>, <status> confidential ©

Page: 281 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

0: Call forwarding is deactivated

1: Call forwarding is activated

Note: The call forwarding SS is set by the AT+CCFC command.

11 February 2005

15.32 Wavecom network operator name: +WNON

15.32.1 Description

This indication provides the name of the network operator (as a character string). This command is the response to the AT+CPHS 2,5[,<type format>] command.

15.32.2 Syntax

Command: AT+CPHS=2,5[,<type format>]

Response syntax: +WNON:<type format>,<operator name>


AT+CPHS=2,5

Note: Get the operator name

+WNON: 0,”Orange F”

OK

AT+CPHS=2,5,1

AT+CPHS=2,5,1

+WNON: 1,”Orange”

Note: Get the short format operator name.

AT+CPHS=2,5,0

OK

+CME ERROR: 3

Note: When CPHS Feature is not allowed or format name no accessible

+CME ERROR: 3

AT+CPHS=0,5

Note: When NON Feature is not allowed or format name no accessible

OK

Note: Deactivation of Network Operator

Name feature.

Note: No effect.


<type format>

0: Long format operator name confidential ©

Page: 282 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

1: Short format operator name (default value)

<operator name>

The name of the operator, in long or short format

15.33 Wavecom CPHS information: +WCPI

15.33.1 Description

This indication provide CPHS information; ie. which data field are present in the SIM. This command is the response to the AT+CPHS 2,6[,<data field>] command.

15.33.2 Syntax

Command: AT+CPHS=2,6[,<data field >]

Response syntax: +WCPI: <data field>,<status>


AT+CPHS=2,6 +WCPI: 0,”0033000F”

Note: Get the current status for all

CPHS info field

AT+CPHS=2,6,13

OK

+WCPI: 13,1

Note: Get the current status for Call

Forward Activated indicator for Line 1.

OK

AT+CPHS=2,6,22

Note: Call Forward is active for Line 1.

+WCPI: 22,0

Note: Get the current status for Line 2

Mailbox number.

OK

AT+CPHS=2,6,17

Note: Mailbox number for Line2 is not available.

+CME ERROR: 3

AT+CPHS=2,6,22

Wrong data field

+CME ERROR: 3

Note: Get the current status for Line 2

Mailbox number.

AT+CPHS=0,6


OK

Note: Deactivation of CPHS Info feature.

Note: No effect. confidential ©

Page: 283 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005


<data field>: value indicating the field of CPHS information (see appendix

19.14)

If <precision> field omitted in the AT+CPHS command, all field of CPHS Info will be displayed.

<status>

0: data field is set

1: data field is unset

When all CPHS information are requested, the status correspond to a bit field

(see appendix 19.14)

Note: The field CSP service (<data field> = 1) is used to set or not the CSP feature at the initialisation.

15.34 Wavecom customer service profile: +WCSP

15.34.1 Description

This indication indicates if a service is accessible to the customer. This is the response to the AT+CPHS 2,7,<service > command. confidential ©

Page: 284 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15.34.2 Syntax

Command: AT+CPHS=2,7,<service>

Response syntax: +WCSP: <service>,<status>


AT+WCSP=? ERROR

AT+WCSP? ERROR


Note: Syntax error

+WCSP: 9,1 AT+CPHS=2,7,9

Note: Get the current status for

Barring of All Outgoing Calls.

OK

AT+CPHS=2,7,11

Note: Barring of All Outgoing Calls is customer accessible.

+WCSP: 11,1

Note: Get the current status Barring of

Outgoing International Calls

OK

AT+CPHS=2,7,2

Note: Barring of Outgoing International

Calls is customer accessible.

+CME ERROR: 3

Note: Get the current status Call forwarding on user Busy.

AT+CPHS=0,7


OK

Note: Deactivation of CPHS Info. Note: No effect.


<service> value indicating the field of CSP field to display (see appendix 19.15,

column External Value)

<status>

0: service is not customer-accessible

1: service is customer-accessible

Note: The field Alternate Line Service (CPHS Teleservices Group) is used to set or not the ALS feature at the initialisation. confidential ©

Page: 285 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15.35 Wavecom Battery Charge Management +WBCM

15.35.1 Description

This specific command allows the management of the battery charging operations (start and stop the charge, enable or disable unsolicited +WBCI

Battery Charge Indications). It also sets the battery charge parameters.

15.35.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+WBCM=<Mode>[,[<ChargeInd>][,[<BattLevelMax>],

[<BattLevelMin>],[<TPulseInCharge>],

[<TPulseOutCharge>],[<BattIntRes>]]]


AT+WBCM=0

Note: Stop the battery charging.

AT+WBCM=1,1

Start the battery charging with charge indications.

OK

OK

Note:

Unsolicited charge indication: the current battery voltage is 4.06 V. (See

+WBCI description)

AT+WBCM=1,0 OK

Note: Start the battery charging without charge indications.

AT+WBCM=2

Note: Get the battery voltage during the charging.

+WBCI: 2,4110

OK

Note:

See the description of +WBCI unsolicited response. The current battery voltage is 4.11 V.

Note: The battery voltage has reached the max level. The battery is considered as charged and the charging is stopped. confidential ©

Page: 286 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005


AT+WBCM? +WBCM:

OK

AT+WBCM=0,1

Note: Enable the battery charge unsolicited indications out of charge.

Note: Current values.

OK

AT+WBCM=3,0,3800,3000,500,3000

,0

Note: The current battery voltage is

4.195 V.

OK

Note: Configure the battery charging parameters.

AT+WBCM=?

Note: Get the parameters range.

+WBCM: (0-3),(0-1),(4000-5000),(2800-

3800), (100-10000),(100-10000),(0-255)

OK

Note:

The battery voltage has reached the min level. The battery is considered as discharged, and the product is turned off, with the +CPOF command behavior.


<Mode>

0: Stop the battery charging (default).

1: Start the battery charging.

2: Get the current battery voltage.

3: Set the battery charge parameters.

Note:

When <Mode> = 0 or 1, only the <ChargeInd> parameter can be set. When

<Mode> = 2, no additional parameter can be set.

When <Mode> = 3, all others parameters can be set.

<ChargeInd>

0: Disable the battery charge unsolicited indications (default value).

1: Enable the battery charge unsolicited indications (see +WBCI description). confidential ©

Page: 287 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

<BattLevelMax>: Maximum level for the battery voltage.

When reached, the battery is considered as charged.

The allowed range is [4000 ; 5000] (in mV, default value is 4200)

<BattLevelMin>: Minimum level for the battery voltage.

When reached, the battery is considered as discharged, and the product is turned off (with the +CPOF command behavior).

The allowed range is [2800 ; 3800] (in mV, default value is 3300)

Note:

The <BattLevelMax> and <BattLevelMin> parameters cannot be changed during the battery charging (when <Mode> = 1).

<TPulseInCharge> Time between pulses for the pulsed charge.

The pulse duration lasts one second. When the battery charging is started with unsolicited charging indications (<ChargeInd> = 1), +WCBI responses are returned by the ME with a period equals to (<Pulse Time>

(= 1s.) + <TPulseInCharge>).

The allowed range is [100 ; 10000]. (unit is ms, default value is 100).

<TPulseOutCharge> Time between +WBCI unsolicited responses

(case <ChargeInd> = 1). The allowed range is [100;10000] (in ms, default value is 5000).

<BattIntRes>: Battery Internal Resistor.

This parameter must be set to have correct values with +WBCI unsolicited results.

The allowed range is [0 ; 255] (in mΩ, default value is 0)

Note:

When the <BattIntRes> parameter is changed, the product must be reset to take the modification into account.

Remind that <BattLevelMax>, <BattLevelMin>, <TPulseInCharge>,

<TPulseOutCharge>, <BattIntRes> parameters values are saved in EEPROM, and <ChargeInd> parameters value is not saved in EEPROM. After a reset, unsolicited battery charge indications are always disabled. confidential ©

Page: 288 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15.35.4 Module-specific charging features

Auto charging and pre-charging features are implemented on WISMO QUIK series Q31x6 and PAC P51x6.

Pre-charging process:

When the battery level is too low (this voltage is a component-dependant value), the module powers off. As soon as the module is plugged again to a battery charger, it switches automatically to pre-charging mode. This hardware process triggers a limited current charging with respect to the component requirements. When an hardware threshold (of about 3,2 V.) is reached, the pre-charging process ends, and the auto-charging is triggered. This behavior preserves the battery life.

Auto charging mode:

The module switches to auto-charging mode in 2 cases:

- after a pre-charging process

- when both events happen simultaneously: o the battery level is low (less than 3,3 V, that is a non customizable value) o a module reset occurs;

The battery auto charging is similar as a normal battery charging.

15.36 Unsolicited result: Wavecom Battery Charge

Indication +WBCI

15.36.1 Description

This unsolicited indication returns information about the battery charge

(maximum level reached, current battery voltage).

15.36.2 Syntax

Unsolicited response syntax: +WBCI: <Status>[,<BattLevel>]


<Status>

0: Minimum battery level reached. The battery is considered as discharged. confidential ©

Page: 289 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

The product is turned off (as with the +CPOF command).

1: Maximum battery level reached. The battery is considered as charged.

The battery charging is stopped.

2: Battery currently in charge.

3: Battery currently out of charge.

<BattLevel>: Current battery voltage during or out of the charging.

The possible range is [2800 ; 5000]. (in mV)

Note:

<Status> = 2 and 3 are solicited, by the AT+WBCM=2 command, or unsolicited when the <ChargeInd> parameter of the +WBCM command is set to 1. With these <Status> values, the <BattLevel> parameter is also present. confidential ©

Page: 290 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15.37 Features Management +WFM

15.37.1 Description

This specific command allows some features to be enabled or disabled.

Note:

After a modification, the changes will be taken into account only after a reset of the product.

15.37.2 Syntax

Command syntax AT+WFM=<mode>[,<FtrID>]


AT+WFM=2,”BI9001800” +WFM: “BI9001800”,1,0

OK

Note: Dual-band mode 900/1800 is enabled

AT+WFM=1,11 +CME ERROR: 3

Note: Enable the Mono-band 900 mode

Note: Band selection are not allowed with AT+WFM command

AT+WFM=0,61 +CME ERROR: 3

AT+WFM=0,”EFR”

Note: Disable the Enhanced Full Rate feature

Note: <mode>=0 is not allowed on

<FtrID> values with 2 digits

OK confidential ©

Page: 291 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Command

AT+WFM=2

Note: Interrogate all <FtrID> status

Possible responses

+WFM: “MONO900”,0,0

+WFM: “MONO1800”,0,0

+WFM: “MONO1900”,0,0

+WFM: “BI9001800”,1,0

+WFM: “BI9001900”,0,0

+WFM: “MONO850”,0,0

+WFM: “BI8501900”,0,0

+WFM: “QUADBAND”,0,0

+WFM: “EFR”,0,1

+WFM: “NOHR_NOECHO”,0,0

+WFM: “HR”,1,0

+WFM: “ECHO”,0,0

+WFM: “HR_ECHO”,0,0

+WFM: “DTXDATA”,1,0

+WFM: “DATA144”,1,0

+WFM: “SIM3VONLY”,0,0

+WFM: “SIM5VONLY”,0,0

+WFM: “SIM3AND5V”,1,0

+WFM: “SIMREMOVE”,1,0

+WFM: “NOINTERRUPT”,0,0

+WFM: “OFFWHENUNPLUG”,0,0

+WFM: “INTERRUPT”,1,0

+WFM: “SWITCHATT”,1,0

+WFM: “CPHS”,1,0

+WFM: “SIMSPEEDENH”,0,0

+WFM: “LOCA”,0,0

+WFM: “AMR”0,0

+WFM: “NT_6K”,1,0

OK

Note: The modified features have their

<resetFlag> parameter set to 1


<mode>

0: disable feature <FtrID>

1: enable feature <FtrID>

2: interrogate the status of the <FtrID> feature.

If the <FtrID> parameter is not used, the status of all the features are listed (with several +WFM responses). confidential ©

Page: 292 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

B

C

D

E

81

83

84

9

A

33

34

4

5

61

62

63

7

<FtrID>

Numeric value

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

2

31

32

String value

“MONO900”

“MONO1800”

“MONO1900”

“BI9001800”

“BI9001900”

Meaning

Mono-band mode 900 MHz (def. 0)



Dual-band mode 900/1800 MHz (def. 1)


“MONO850”

“BI8501900”

“QUADBAND”



Quad-band mode 850/900/1800/1900

MHz

Enhanced Full Rate feature (def. 1) “EFR”:

“NOHR_NOECHO” HR and ECHO features are disabled

“HR” Half Rate feature (def. 1 if AMR not available, see note below)

“ECHO” Echo Cancel (def. 0)

“HR_ECHO”

“DTXDATA”

HR and ECHO features are enabled

Data with DTX feature (def. 1)

“DATA144”

“SIM3VONLY”

“SIM5VONLY”

“SIM3AND5V”

“SIMREMOVE”

Data 14.4 kbit/s feature (def. 1)

3V SIM voltage mode (def. 0)

5V SIM voltage mode

Both 3 and 5V SIM voltage mode (def. 1)

SIM removal feature (def. 1)

“NOINTERRUPT” No management of interruption (def. 0)

“OFFWHENUNPLUG” Off when unplug mode (def. 0)

“INTERRUPT” interruption for customer (def. 1)

“SWITCHATT”

“CPHS”

Switch Attenuation feature (def. 1)

CPHS feature (def. 1)

“SIMSPEEDENH” SIM speed enhancement feature (def.0)

“LOCA” Location feature (def. 0)

“AMR” AMR feature (see note below)

“NT_6K” Data up to and including 4,8 kb/s, full rate, non-transparent, 6 kb/s radio interface rate is requested (def .1) confidential ©

Page: 293 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Notes:

• The +WFM response only use alphabetical values for the <FtrID> parameter.

• For <FtrID> values with two digits (like 1x, 6x or 8x), the <mode> 0 value is not allowed. When a « xa » feature is enabled, enabling an other

« xb » feature will automatically disable the « xa » feature.

For example, if the “MONO900” feature is enabled, if the “BI9001800” feature is activated, the “MONO900” feature gets automatically disabled.

• The HR and ECHO features have a particular behavior, due to historical reasons. The appropriate way to activate or deactivate this pair of features is to use the corresponding <FtrId>:

“HR” HR only, no ECHO

“ECHO”

“NOHR_NOECHO”

“HR_ECHO”

ECHO only, no HR

Neither HR nor ECHO

Both HR and ECHO

• “MONO900”, “MONO850”, “MONO1800”, “MONO1900”, “BI9001900”,

“BI9001800”, “BI8501900” and “QUADBAND” features are read-only. In order to change the Band selection use AT+WMBS command, see §

15.53.

• When the SIMREMOVE feature is activated if the SIM is removed an

unsolicited response +WIND: 0 is received and if the SIM is inserted an unsolicited response +WIND: 1 is received.

• When the NOINTERRUPT feature is activated if the pin interrupt is set no action is taken.

• When the OFFWHENUNPLUG feature is activated if the pin interrupt is set an AT+CPOF is executed.

• When the INTERRUPT feature is activated if the pin interrupt is set an unsolicited response +WIND: 12 is received.

• When the SWITCHATT feature is activated the SWITCHATT algorithm is available to the AT+ECHO command.

• If feature SIM5VONLY or SIM3AND5V is used, the user must take care of not using GPO0 pin: it is reserved for SIM level shifter.

• AMR feature can only be activated for AMR product. If the AMR function is not available, its activation or deactivation has no effect and no

ERROR response. WISMO P5186 and Q2426 modules can support AMR feature. If feature is available, default <mode> value is 1. It is 0 in the other cases (AMR not supported or not available).

• HR can not be activated when AMR feature is available. If AMR feature is available, default <mode> value for HR is 0. confidential ©

Page: 294 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

<status>

0: the <FtrID> feature is disabled

1: the <FtrID> feature is enabled

<resetFlag>

0: the feature has not been modified since the last boot of the product.

1: the feature has been modified since the last boot of the product; a reset must be performed to take the modifications into account.

Note: If a feature is reset to its initial value after a modification, the <resetFlag> parameter will be reset to 0. confidential ©

Page: 295 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15.38 Commercial Features Management +WCFM

15.38.1 Description

This command enables ou disables Wavecom specific features. Disabling a feature can be done with no restriction, but a password is required to enable features.

Note: Once a feature successfully enabled or disabled, the product needs to be reset to take the modification into account.

15.38.2 Syntax

Command syntax AT+WCFM=<mode>,[<FtrMask>[,<Password>]]

Command

AT+WCFM=0,”0A00”

Note: Disable some features

AT+WCFM=2

Note: Display of the feature status

AT+WCFM=1,”0003”,”1234567890A

BCDEF1234567890ABCDEF12345678

90ABCDEF1234567890ABCDEF”

Note: Enable features

AT+WCFM=1,”0050”,”1234567890A

BCDEF1234567890ABCDEF12345678

90ABCDEF1234567890FFFFFF”

Note: Enable features

Possible responses

OK

+WCFM:0000

OK

OK

Note: The features are enabled (the password is correct)

+CME ERROR: 3



<mode>

0: disable some features of <FtrMask>

1: enable some features of <FtrMask>

2: display the features state

<FtrMask>: features mask

16 bits hexadecimal string (4 characters from 0 (zero) to ‘F’)

<PassWord>: Password confidential ©

Page: 296 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

256 bits hexadecimal string (64 characters from 0 (zero) to ‘F’)

11 February 2005

15.39 Wavecom Customer storage mirror +WMIR

15.39.1 Description

This specific command allows to make a mirror copy of the current configuration parameters in the EEPROM. In case of memory problem for the storage, if a customer mirror already exists, this one will be restored.

Otherwise, the Wavecom default mirrored parameters are restored.

Warning: this command should only be used on special advice from

WAVECOM support team.

15.39.2 Syntax

Command syntax AT+WMIR


AT+WMIR=? OK

AT+WMIR

Note: Build the Customer Mirror

OK



Page: 297 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15.40 Wavecom Change Default Player +WCDP

15.40.1 Description

This specific command allows the default melody player to be selected.

15.40.2 Syntax

Command syntax AT+WCDP = <player>


AT+WCDP=0

Note: Select the buzzer.

AT+WCDP?

OK

OK

+WCDP: 0

OK


<player>

0: Buzzer

1: Speaker confidential ©

Page: 298 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15.41 Wavecom CPHS Mail Box Number: +WMBN

15.41.1 Description

This specific command sets the different mailbox numbers in SIM. The +CPHS command can be used to know which mailbox numbers can be updated.

15.41.2 Syntax

Command syntax AT+WMBN = <LineId>,<number>,<type>,<name>


+WMBN = <LineId>,<number>,<type>,<name>,<status>


AT+WMBN=? OK

AT+WMBN? OK

AT+CPHS=2,2 +WMBN: 1,”0123456789”,129,”Maison”,1

Note: Get the current Mail Box

Numbers in SIM

+WMBN: 2,”9876543210”,129,”Travail”,1

+WMBN: 3,,,,1

+WMBN: 4,,,,1

OK

AT+WMBN=1,”+33122334455”,145

Note: Set mailbox number for line1.

AT+WMBN=2

OK

Note: Mailbox number for Line1 is set.

OK

Note: Erase mailbox number & name for line2

AT+CPHS=2,2 +WMBN: 1,”+33122334455”,145,,1

Note: Get the current Mail Box

Numbers again

+WMBN: 2,,,,1

+WMBN: 3,,,,1

+WMBN: 4,,,,1

OK


<LineId>

1: Line 1

2: Line 2

3: Data

4: Fax confidential ©

Page: 299 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

<number>: Phone number in ASCII format.

<type>: TON/NPI

(Type of address byte in integer format).

<name>: name of mailbox.

Notes:

• For the <name> parameter all strings starting with “80”, “81” or “82”

are considered in UCS2 format. See the APPENDIX E: Coding of Alpha fields in the SIM for UCS2. If a wrong UCS2 format is entered, the string

is considered as an ASCII string.

• The AT command +WPCS affect the format of the Mailbox <name> entry.

<status>

When checked with “AT+CPHS=2,2”, it indicates if the number can be updated or not:

0: Update is not possible

1: Update is possible

15.42 Wavecom Alternate Line Service: +WALS

15.42.1 Description

This specific command allows to set and to get the active line. The +CPHS command can be used to know which line is activated.

15.42.2 Syntax

Command syntax AT+WALS = <CmdType>[,<LineId>]


+WALS = <LineId> confidential ©

Page: 300 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Command

AT+WALS = 0,1

Note: Activate Line 1

AT+WALS = 0,2

Note: Activate Line 2

AT+WALS = 1

Note: Get the current activate Line

AT+WALS = 1,2

AT+CPHS=0,3

Note: Deactivation of ALS feature.

AT+CPHS=2,3

Note: Interrogate of ALS Feature

Possible responses

OK

Note: Display the current active line

OK

+WALS: 1

OK

+CME ERROR: 3

Note: When the ALS feature is not allowed

+WALS: 1


+CME ERROR: 3

Note: Syntax error

OK

Note: No effect.

+WALS: 1


+CME ERROR: 3

Note: in the case where the ALS feature is not allowed


<CmdType>

0: Set active line

1: Get active line

<LineId>:

Only used for <CmdType> = 0

1: Line 1

2: Line 2 confidential ©

Page: 301 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15.43 Wavecom Open AT control command +WOPEN

15.43.1 Description

This specific command allows to start, stop, delete and get information about the current Open AT embedded application.

Note:

This command is only available if the Open AT feature is enabled (cf

+WCFM command).

15.43.2 Syntax

Command syntax AT+WOPEN=<Mode>


AT+WOPEN=? +WOPEN: (0-4)

OK

AT+WOPEN? +WOPEN: 0

OK

AT+WOPEN=2 +WOPEN: 2, “AT v2.00”, “AT v2.00”

OK

Note: Get the Open-AT library versions. Note: Open-AT v2.00 library version. An embedded application has been downloaded on this product.

AT+WOPEN=3 OK

Note: The objects flash are erased

AT+WOPEN=1

Note: Start the embedded application.

AT+WOPEN = 3

OK

+WIND: 3

Note: Product reset in order to start the embedded application.

+CME ERROR: 532

Note: the embedded application is activated so the objects flash are not erased.

AT+WOPEN = 4

AT+WOPEN=0

Note: Stop the embedded application.

+CME ERROR: 532

Note: the embedded application is activated so it cannot be erased

OK

+WIND: 3

Note: Product reset in order to stop the embedded application. confidential ©

Page: 302 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005


AT+WOPEN=3 OK

Note: The objects flash are erased

AT+WOPEN=4 OK

Note: the embedded application is erased

AT+WOPEN? +CME ERROR: 3

Note: The Open AT feature is disabled.


<Mode>

0: Stop the Open-AT embedded application.

If the product was running, it resets.

1: Start the Open-AT embedded application.

If the product was stopped, it resets.

2: Get the Open AT library versions.

3: Erase the objects flash of the Open-AT embedded application.

4: Erase the Open-AT embedded application.

Note: Mode = 3 and 4 are only available if Open-AT embedded application is stopped (AT+WOPEN=0).

<IntVersion>

Ascii string giving the internal Open AT library version.

<ExtVersion>

Ascii string giving the external Open AT library version.

Note:

If no embedded application is loaded, the <ExtVersion> parameter does not appear. confidential ©

Page: 303 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15.44 Wavecom Reset +WRST

15.44.1 Description

This specific command resets the module after the time specified by the

<delay> parameter.

15.44.2 Syntax

Response syntax: +WRST: <Mode>,<Delay>,<RemainTime>


AT+WRST=? OK

AT+WRST=0

Note: Disable timer

AT+WRST=1,”001:03”

Note: Enable timer and set delay at 1 hour 3 minutes

OK

OK

OK

Note: Timer activated to reset after 1 hour and 3 minutes. At this point, 1 hour and 1 minute remain before next reset.


<val1>:

0: timer reset is disabled

1: timer reset is enabled

<Delay>: sets the time before reset

Range “000:01”- “168:59” (format hhh:mm)

<RemainTime>: time before next reset

Range “000:01”- “168:59” (format hhh:mm) confidential ©

Page: 304 / 478



15.45 Set Standard Tone +WSST

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15.45.1 Description

This specific command allows to set/get the sound level of the Standard Tones.

15.45.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+WSST=[<sound level>][,<ring tone level>]

Command

AT+WSST=0

Note: Set volume to Max.

Possible responses

OK

AT+WSST=15

Note: Set volume to Min.

AT+WSST=,5

Note: Set ring tone level to 5

OK

OK

AT+WSST? +WSST: 15,5

Note: get current standard tones sound level

OK

Note: current standard tones level is

15 (mini.), and ring tone level is 5.

AT+WSST=?


+WSST: (0-15),(0-15)

OK


<sound level>

Range [0 ; 15]

0: Maximum volume (default)

15: Minimum volume

<ring tone level>

Range [0 ; 15]

0: Maximum volume (default)

15: Minimum volume confidential ©

Page: 305 / 478



15.46 Wavecom Location +WLOC

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15.46.1 Description

This specific command can be used by the application to retrieve the following local informations: MCC-MNC, LAC, CI, Network measurement, BCCH channel list, Timing Advance, Date and Time.

Two ways exist for the external application to get these information: on request of the application, or automatically by the module every x seconds (x has to be a multiple of 5 different from 0).

The location feature has to be activated to get information. if the feature is not activated,”ERROR” is sent.

If the data are not valid at the requested time, the network measurement,

BCCH list and Timing Advance cannot be displayed (“,,” is displayed instead).

15.46.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+WLOC =< mode > [,< time period/dump >]

AT+WLOC?

+WLOC: <mode>,<timeperiod>,<dump> with <mode>:

0: no automatic mode

1: automatic mode

<timeperiod>, <dump>:see below.


AT+WLOC=0

Note: stops the display of local information

OK

AT+WLOC=3,255

Note: set the wished information to display

(255 -> complete information)

OK confidential ©

Page: 306 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Command

AT+WLOC=1

Note: displays once the local information

Possible responses

+WLOC:

02f802,0006,7772,f13101b04cf51278

91138e95a846d160,8b49d08d0797c419e

272e10889a000009302170399020403c1

020a03c5020a03,00,010121111349ff

OK

+CME ERROR:3 AT+WLOC=2,6

Note: 6 is not a multiple of 5

AT+WLOC=2,10 OK

Note: displays OK then the current local information immediately for the first time and then every 10 seconds.

+WLOC:

02f802,0006,7772,ed3001af4cf492780 b040889c74acc23,8b49d08d0797c419e2

72e1

0889a000009302160399020503c1020a0

3c5020 a03,00,010121111354ff

+WLOC:

02f802,0006,7772,f02d01ae4cf41278

4b03c889c846dba5,8b49d08d0797c

419e272e10889a0000093021703990

20403c1020a03c5020903,00,010121

111404ff

… confidential ©

Page: 307 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Command

AT+WLOC=?

Note: The feature “loca” is not activated

Possible responses

+CME ERROR:3

AT+WLOC?

Note: The feature “loca” is not activated

+CME ERROR:3

AT+WLOC=?

Note: The feature “loca” is activated

OK

AT+WLOC?

+WLOC: 0,5,255

OK

Note: The location is not in mode automatic, the period value is set to 5 seconds, the configuration value is set to

255

AT+WLOC? +WLOC: 1,10,20

Note: The location is in mode automatic, the period value is set to 10 seconds, the configuration value is set to 20

OK


<mode>

0: Stop automatic shots

1: One shot requested

2: Automatic shots requested (every x seconds)

3: Configuration of the wished information for <mode> = 2:

<time period> optional parameter –

Range: [5 – 255] – in seconds it has to be a multiple of 5. default value of time period: 5 seconds

The automatic mode for location is saved in EEPROM, so will be taken into account after an Init (+WLOC:… will be displayed). confidential ©

Page: 308 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Fields of the response to AT+WLOC=1 or AT+WLOC=2:

The format of these fields are as specified in 04.08:

Parameter Type

Network measurement 16 bytes

BCCH channel list Maximum 48 bytes (if version V0 of

GSM Rec 11.14-800 )

Or 129 bytes (if version V1 of GSM

Rec 11.14-800). The version number in indicated in TERMINAL PROFILE information in EEPROM. It is not user-customizable. It is configurated at production-time.

Timing Advance

Date and Time

1 byte

7 bytes: Date, time and timezone at

STLK Format for mode = 3:

<dump> optional parameter

Range: [1-255] (at least 1 bit set to 1). if bit 0 set to 1 (value 1): DaT will be returned in the response if bit 1 set to 1 (value 2): TA will be returned in the response if bit 2 set to 1 (value 4): BCCH will be returned in the response if bit 3 set to 1 (value 8): NetMeas will be returned in the response if bit 4 set to 1 (value 16): CI will be returned in the response if bit 5 set to 1 (value 32): LAC will be returned in the response if bit 6 set to 1 (value 64): MNC-MCC will be returned in the response

Notes:

• After having downloaded the EEPROM configuration: default value of

<dump> is 0xFF (all information returned).

• The <dump> value set with the command “at+wloc=3,xx” is saved in

EEPROM, so it will be taken into account after an Init.

• See Appendix C for details on BCCH channel list. confidential ©

Page: 309 / 478



15.47 Wavecom Bus Read +WBR

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15.47.1 Description

This specific command allows to read a buffer from a specific bus (SPI, I2C

Soft or Parallel).

Note: Bus configuration is set by the +WBM command.

15.47.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+WBR=<BusId>,<Size>[,<Address>[,<Opcode>]]

Response syntax: +WBR: <Data><CR><LF>

OK


AT+WBR=0,9,”ABFF”,”C9”

Note: Read 9 bytes from the SPI bus, after having sent the 0xC9 Opcode byte and

ABFF Address.

AT+WBR=1,5,”2A”

+WBR: 0A5F98231012345678

OK

+WBR: 0102030405

Note: Read 5 bytes from the I2C Soft bus, at the 0x2A slave address.

AT+WBR=2,2,0

OK

+WBR: A000

Read 2 bytes from the Parallel bus with the

A2 pin set to 0.

OK


< BusId >

0: SPI bus.

1: I2C Soft bus.

2: Parallel bus.

<Size>

Size of data to read, in bytes (max 256 bytes). confidential ©

Page: 310 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

<Address>

• For SPI bus:

On Q24X3 and P32X3 products:

Up to 2 address bytes as an ASCII hexadecimal string, usable only is the <opcode> byte is set.

If the address field is not used, the parameter must not be set

(default).


Up to 4 address bytes as an ASCII hexadecimal string.

If the <address> field is not used, the parameter must not be set

(default).

• For Parallel bus:

0: set the A2 pin to 0 (default)

1: set the A2 pin to 1

• For I2C Soft bus:

Slave address byte, in hexadecimal format (default is 0x00).

This is a 7-bits address, shifted to left from 1 bit, padded with the

LSB set to 1 (to read), and sent first on the I2C bus before performing the read operation.

<Opcode> (for SPI bus only)


Up to 1 opcode byte as an ASCII hexadecimal string.

If the <opcode> field is not used, the parameter must not be set

(default).


Up to 4 opcode bytes as an ASCII hexadecimal string.

If the <opcode> field is not used, the parameter must not be set

(default). confidential ©

Page: 311 / 478



15.48 Wavecom Bus Write +WBW

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15.48.1 Description

This specific command allows to write a buffer on a specific bus (SPI, I2C soft or parallel).

Note: Bus configuration is set by the +WBM command.

15.48.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+WBW=<BusId>,<Size>[,<Address>]<CR>

<Data Buffer> <ctrl-Z >


AT+WBW=0,10<CR>

0123456789ABCDEF0123<ctrl-Z>

OK

Note: Data buffer is written on SPI bus.

Note: Write 10 bytes on the SPI bus.

AT+WBW=1,5<CR>

0246801234<ctrl-Z>

Note: Write 5 bytes on the I2C Soft bus.

AT+WBW=2,2,0<CR>

OK

Note: Data buffer is written on I2C Soft bus.

OK

434F<ctrl-Z>

Note: Write 2 bytes on the Parallel bus with the A2 pin set to 0.

Note: Data buffer is written on PARALLEL bus.


<BusId>

0: SPI bus.

1: I2C Soft bus.

2: Parallel bus.

<Size>

Size of data buffer, in bytes. (max. 256 bytes)

<Address>

• For SPI bus:

Not Used confidential ©

Page: 312 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

• For Parallel bus:

0: set the A2 pin to 0 (default)

1: set the A2 pin to 1

• For I2C Soft bus:

Slave address byte, in hexadecimal format (default “00”).

This is a 7-bits address, shifted to left from 1 bit, padded with the LSB set to 0 (to write), and sent first on the I2C bus before performing the writing operation.

<Data Buffer>: Data buffer to write on the specific bus.

This parameter must only contain hexadecimal characters (0-9, A-F) Its length must be twice the <Size> parameter.

15.49 Wavecom Bus Management +WBM

15.49.1 Description

This specific command allows to manage specific buses (SPI, I2C Soft, Parallel) with a given configuration.

15.49.2 Syntax

• Command Syntax for SPI bus

AT+WBM=<BusId>,<Mode>,[<Clock_Speed>],[<Clock_Mode>],

[<ChipSelect>],[<ChipSelectPolarity>],[<LsbFirst>],

• Command Syntax for I2C bus

AT+WBM=<BusId>,<Mode>,[<Scl_Gpio>],[<Sda_Gpio>]

• Command Syntax for parallel

The parameters depend on ChipSelect configuration: if CS is Gpio 5:

AT+WBM=<BusId>,<Mode>,[<Chip_Select>],[<Order>],[<Gpio_NbWaitS tate>] if CS is LCD_EN

AT+WBM=<BusId>,<Mode>,[<Chip_Select>],[<Order>], confidential ©

Page: 313 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

[<LCDEN_AddressSetupTime>],

[<LCDEN_SignalPulseDuration>],

[<LCDEN_PolarityControl>]

Command

AT+WBM=0,1,1,3,1,0,1

Open SPI bus with configuration:

(on Q24X3 product)

Clock Speed: 812 kHz

Clock Mode: 3

ChipSelect: LCDEN

ChipSelectPolarity: LOW

LsbFirst: MSB

Possible responses

OK

AT+WBM=1,1,0,4

Open I2C Soft bus with configuration:

Scl Gpio: 0

Sda Gpio: 4

AT+WBM=2,1,0,1,10, 31,0

Open PARALLEL bus with configuration:

(on P32X3 product)

ChipSelect: LCDEN

Order: Direct

LcdenAddressSetUpTime: 10

LcdenSignalPulseDuration: 31

OK

OK

PolarityControl: low

0,1,1,3,1,0,1,0,0

OK

AT+WBM=1,0 OK

Close I2C bus.

0,0,0,4

OK

AT+WBM=1,1

Open I2C Soft bus with the last configuration:

Scl Gpio: 0

Sda Gpio: 4

OK

AT+WBM = 1,2 +WBM: 1,1,0,4

OK confidential ©

Page: 314 / 478




<BusId>

0: SPI bus.

1: I2C bus.

2: Parallel bus.

(Only on Wismo Pac products)

<Mode>

0: close bus.

1: open bus.

2: get bus status.

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15.49.3.1 for SPI bus:

<Clock Speed>

Q24X3 and P32X3 products Q24X6 and P32X6 products

Value Frequency Value

0 (default) 101 kHz 0 (default)

Frequency

13 MHz

1

2

812 kHz

1.625 MHz

1

2

6.5 MHz

4.33 MHz

3.25 MHz 3 3.25 MHz

P51xx products

3

4

5 2.167 MHz

0 (default)

1

2

2.167 MHz

3.23 MHz

4.33 MHz

3 6.5 MHz

Note for the P51xx products:

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

1.625 MHz

1.44 MHz

1.3 MHz

1.181 MHz confidential ©

Page: 315 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

To enable the SPI bus on this product, the +WHCNF command should be used to set up SPI clock and data lines, instead of the RI and DCD signals.

<Clock Mode>

0: rest state is 0, the data is valid on rising edge (default value).

1: rest state is 0, the data is valid on falling edge.

2: rest state is 1, the data is valid on rising edge.

3: rest state is 1, the data is valid on falling edge.

<ChipSelect> (default 0)

0: GPIO (default value)

Note: See <GpioChipSelect> ans <GpioHandling> parameters.

1: SPI_EN on Q24X3 and P32X3 products

Note: on Q24X6 product, the SPI_EN pin is replaced by the GPO 3 output

(Gpio ChipSelect = 7, refer to +WIOM command) on P32X6 product, the SPI_EN pin is replaced by the GPIO 8 output

(Gpio ChipSelect = 7, refer to +WIOM command)

2: SPI_AUX on Q24X3 and P32X3 products

Note: on Q24X6 and P32X6 products, the SPI_AUX pin is replaced by theGPO 0 output (Gpio ChipSelect = 6, please refer to the +WIOM command)

<ChipSelectPolarity>

0: LOW (Chip select signal is valid on low state). (Default value).

1: HIGH (Chip select signal is valid on high state)

<LsbFirst>

0: LSB (Data are sent with LSB first)

1: MSB (Data are sent with MSB first) (default value)

<Gpio ChipSelect > if ChipSelect = GPIO (default GPIO 0, see § 15.11.3)

The GPIO value is between 0 and 7.

It must be a GPIO or a GPO (not a GPI), and not allocated by any Open-AT embedded application.

Please refer to +WIOM command

<Gpio Handling > if ChipSelect = GPIO

0: SPI BYTE (GPIO signal pulse on each written or read byte) confidential ©

Page: 316 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

1: SPI FRAME (GPIO signal works as a standard Chip Select signal) (default value)

<Scl Gpio> (default value is 0)

The Scl GPIO value is between 0 and 7.

It must be a GPIO (not a GPI or GPO) and not allocated by an Open-AT embedded application.

<Sda Gpio> (default value is 4)

The Sda GPIO value is between 0 and 7.

It must be a GPIO (not a GPI or GPO) and not allocated by an Open-AT embedded application.

15.49.3.3 for Parallel bus (only on Pac products):

<ChipSelect> (default value is 1)

0: GPIO 5 (it must not be allocated by any Open-AT application)

1: LCDEN (same pin as SPI_EN, and Gpio 8 on P32X6 products (it must not be allocated by any Open-AT application))

<Order> (default value is 0)

0: DIRECT

1: REVERSE confidential ©

Page: 317 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

<LCDEN AddressSetUpTime> if ChipSelect = LCDEN (default value is 0)

The <Lcd AddressSetUpTime> value is between 0 and 31.

The resulting time is:

For P32X3 product: ( X * 38.5 ) ns ;

For P32X6 product: ( 1 + 2 X ) * 19 ns.

This is the time between the setting of an address on the bus, and the activation of the LCD_EN pin (T1 on the figure bellow).

<LCDEN SignalPulseDuration> if ChipSelect = LCDEN (default value is 0)

The <Lcd LcdenSignalPulseDuration> value is between 0 and 31.

The resulting time is:

For P32X3 product: ( X + 1.5 ) * 38.5 ns ;

For P32X6 product: ( 1 + 2 * ( X + 1 ) ) * 19 ns

(Warning, for this product, the 0 value in considered as 32).

This is the time during which the LCD_EN signal is valid (T2 on the figure above).

<LCDEN PolarityControl> if ChipSelect = LCDEN (default value is 0)

0: LOW (LCD_EN signal is valid on low state)

1: HIGH (LCD_EN signal is valid on high state)

<GPIO NbWaitState> if ChipSelect = GPIO (default value is 0)

This is the time during which the data is valid on the bus.

0: 62 ns confidential ©

Page: 318 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

1: 100 ns

2: 138 ns

3: 176 ns

Notes:

•

•

If one or two IOs are needed by a bus, they are not available any more for the +WIOR , +WIOW, +WIOM commands. When the corresponding bus is closed, these commands resume the control of the IOs.

A bus may not be available for an open operation if an Open-AT embedded application has opened it before with the same parameters.

In this case, the +WBM command will return +CME ERROR: 3.

15.50 Wavecom Hang-up +WATH

15.50.1 Description

This specific command is used by the application to disconnect the remote user, specifying a release cause and the location. In the case of multiple calls, all calls are released (active, on-hold and waiting calls).

15.50.2 Syntax

Command Syntax AT+WATH=<RelCause>,<location>

AT+WATH=31 OK

Note: Ask for disconnection with release cause=normal and location=USER

AT+WATH=?


+WATH: (1-127),(0-5,7,10)

AT+WATH=17,2 OK

Note: Ask for disconnection with release cause=user busy and location= public network serving the local user



<RelCause>:

decimal value from 1 to 127 (see the table in appendix 18.4 “Failure Cause from GSM 04.08 recommendation)

<location>: confidential ©

Page: 319 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005 optional parameter (default value =0) values as defined in 04.08

0: user

1: private network serving the local user

2: public network serving the local user

3: transit network

4: public network serving the remote user

5: private network serving the remote user

7: international network

10: network beyond interworking point

Notes:

In order to have a “Normal Release”, use ATH command (see paragraph

15.50)

15.51 Write IMEI +WIMEI

15.51.1 Description

The download of the IMEI is available through this specific command. This operation is possible only if the module contains the default IMEI.

The IMEI can only be downloaded once.

No password is needed. If the download is not correct, only Wavecom can reset the IMEI. confidential ©

Page: 320 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15.51.2 Syntax

Command syntax AT+WIMEI=<IMEI>


AT+WIMEI?

Request IMEI

+WIMEI: 123456789012345

OK

Note: Default IMEI present in EEPROM

OK AT+WIMEI=123456789099995

First Download

AT+WIMEI=12345 +CME ERROR: 24

First Download with wrong length of the string

AT+WIMEI=123456789999996 +CME ERROR: 3

Try to overwrite an IMEI already downloaded

AT+WIMEI?

Request IMEI

AT+WIMEI=?

+WIMEI: 123456789099995

OK

Note: IMEI present in EEPROM

OK

Note: Command valid


<IMEI>

14 or 15 digits as defined by GSM 03.03. confidential ©

Page: 321 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15.52 Write IMEI SVN: +WSVN

15.52.1 Description

The update of the IMEI SVN is available through this specific command.

15.52.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+WSVN=<IMEISVN>

Command

AT+WSVN?

Note: Request IMEI SVN

AT+WSVN=11

Note: Update the IMEI SVN

AT+WSVN=256

Possible responses

+WSVN: 10

OK

Note: IMEI SVN present in

EEPROM

OK

+CME ERROR: 24

Note: wrong length of the string.

1 <= IMEI SVN <= 255

OK

Note: Command valid


<IMEI SVN> IMEI SVN value between 1 and 255 confidential ©

Page: 322 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15.53 Wavecom multi-band selection command: +WMBS

15.53.1 Description

This command permits to select the GSM bands on which the module has to work. This command is allowed only if the selected bands are supported.

The user can choose if the change is immediate or not:

• either the module has to be reset to take this change into account

(this is the default case)

• or the GSM stack restarts immediately on the specified band(s). In this mode, the command +WMBS is forbidden during the initialization phase of the modem and during calls.

15.53.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+WMBS=<Band>[,<param>]

Command

AT+WMBS=<Band>

Possible responses

OK

Note: Module has to be reset for change to be effective.

AT+WMBS=<Band>,0 OK

Note: Module has to be reset for change to be effective.

AT+WMBS=<Band>,1 OK

Note: Band mode selected and GSM stack restarted.

AT+WMBS=<Band> +CME ERROR: 3

Note: Band not allowed

AT+WMBS?

+WMBS: <Band>,<ResetFlag>

OK

Note: current selected band mode is returned confidential ©

Page: 323 / 478



Command

AT+WMBS=?

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Possible responses

+WMBS: (0,3,4),(0-1)

OK

Note: Only 850 mono-band or 850-1900 bi-band are available

OK

Note: all bands are available


<Band>: frequency band configuration to be supported

0: mono-band mode 850 MHz

1: mono-band mode 900 extended MHz (900E)



4: dual-band mode 850/1900 MHz

5: dual-band mode 900E (extended) / 1800 MHz

6: dual-band mode 900E (extended) / 1900 MHz

<Param>: indicates the type of change

0: The module will have to be reset to start on specified band(s).

<ResetFlag> is set to 1.

1: The change is effective immediately: the GSM stack is restarted with specified band(s). <ResetFlag> stays at 0. This mode is forbidden while in communication and during modem initializtion.

Note: If <Param> is not given, the module has to be reset to start on specified band(s), as for <param>=0.

<ResetFlag>

0: the feature was not modified since the last boot of the product.

1: the feature has been modified since the last boot of the product: it has to be reset in order to take the modification into account. This is the case when the band was changed with “AT+WMBS=<band>” or

“AT+WMBS=<band>,0”. confidential ©

Page: 324 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15.54 Module Serial Number +WMSN

15.54.1 Description

This specific command returns the serial number of the module.

15.54.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+WMSN

Command

AT+WMSN

AT+WMSN

Possible responses

Serial Number 12345678901234567

OK

Note: Serial number present in Non Volatile

Memory is 12345678901234567

Serial Number -----------------

OK

Note: No serial number present in Non Volatile

Memory


No parameters.

15.55 Cellular Text telephone Modem +WCTM

15.55.1 Description

This command allows to activate and deactivate Cellular Text telephone

Modem (CTM) capability for outgoing voice call as specified in GSM 04.08

(3GPP 24.008).

CTM mode is used to send audio signals from an external text terminal (ex: a

TTY typewriter) within a voice call made by the ME. The text terminal must have a special mobile phone input/output to work correctly.

When the ME indicates support of CTM text telephony for an outgoing voice call, the network shall select a speech CODEC and additionally CTM text telephony detection and conversion functions. confidential ©

Page: 325 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

To guaranty optimal audio management of CTM signals, it is mandatory to

deactivate Acoustic Echo Cancellation (see Echo Cancellation +ECHO

command) and Side Tone (see SideTone modification +SIDET command).

Voice gain of transmitter and receiver (see Gain control +VGR, +VGT

commands) have to be calibrated according to the external text terminal audio characteristics.

15.55.2 Syntax

Command Syntax: AT+WCTM=<mode>

Command

AT+WCTM=1

AT+ WCTM?

Possible responses

OK

+CME ERROR: <error>

+WCTM:1

OK

OK


<mode>: integer type

0 Deactivate CTM mode

1 Activate CTM mode

Note: if <mode> is set to 0, all incoming CTM calls will be rejected. Caller will receive a « No carrier » indication. confidential ©

Page: 326 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15.56 Modem Behaviour Configuration +WBHV

15.56.1 Description

This command allows the user to configure the behaviour of Wavecom modem.

If parameter1 = 0, the command is useful to configure the way the modem responds on outgoing voice calls:

The modem response may be sent when the call is established (default mode), or when the audio path is opened.

If parameter1 = 1, the behavior at init is normal or powerless. In this case, no calls (even emergency calls) are available.

If parameter1 = 2, the module will respond immediately OK after a dial (ATD command).

15.56.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+WBHV = <parameter1>,<parameter2>

According to parameter1:

AT+WBHV = 0,<mode>

AT+WBHV = 1,<mode>

AT+WBHV=2,<mode>

Command

AT+WBHV=0,0

Note: Set modem response to default mode

Possible responses

OK

Note: modem response is sent on call establishment

AT+WBHV=0,1 OK

Note: Set modem response when audio path is opened

Note: modem response is sent on audio path opened

AT+WBHV=1,0

Note: Modem normal (and default) mode

AT+WBHV=1,1

Note: Modem powerless mode

OK

OK

AT+WBHV? OK

+WBHV: 1,(0-1)

+WBHV: 2,(0-1)

OK confidential ©

Page: 327 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Command

AT+WBHV=2,3

Note: Illegal parameters

Possible responses

+CME ERROR:3

Note: Wrong parameters

AT+WBHV=2,1

Note: OK will be displayed just after the ATD command

OK

AT+WBHV=2,0

Note: OK will be displayed when connection is performed.

OK


<parameter1>: mode, 0 – 2

0: configure modem response on outgoing voice calls (default value)

<parameter2>: modem response sending (with parameter1 = 0)

0: modem response sent on call establishment (default value)

1: modem response sent when audio path is opened

1: configure modem mode

<parameter2>: modem init mode (with parameter1 = 1)

0: modem init mode is normal (default value)

1: modem init mode is powerless

2: configure the response delay for a call

<parameter2>: modem response mode on a call

0: response when the remote part hangs up (default value)

1: OK will be displayed immediately after the ATD command

Parameter1 value Parameter2 value Meaning

0 0 modem response is sent on call establishment (default)

0 1

1 0 modem response is sent when audio path is opened

Modem normal mode (default)

1

2

1

0

Modem powerless mode

Call response (default) confidential ©

Page: 328 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

15.57 Hardware Configuration AT+WHCNF

15.57.1 Description

This command permits to change configuration of v24 (V24-RI & v24-DCD) to

SPI (SPI-CLOCK & SPI-IO). This feature is available only on P5186 product.

Note: At start-up, the module uses the last configuration. There is no need to perform an explicit saving of this parameter. Default configuration is V24.

15.57.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+WHCNF = <type>,<mode>[,<param1>]

Command

AT+ WHCNF=0,0

Possible responses

+WHCNF: 0

OK

Note: Read info about V24-RI & v24-DCD and SPI-CLOCK & SPI-IO

Note: V24-RI & v24-DCD are available

AT+ WHCNF=0,1,1 OK

Note: Change state to SPI-CLOCK & SPI-IO Note: SPI-CLOCK & SPI-IO are available

AT+ WHCNF?

AT+ WHCNF=?

OK

OK


<type>

0: V24-RI & v24-DCD or SPI-CLOCK & SPI-IO

1: Reserved for internal use.

2: Reserved for internal use.

<mode> confidential ©

Page: 329 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

For Type = 0

0: read information about V24-RI & v24-DCD and SPI-CLOCK & SPI-IO

1: change state between (V24-RI & v24-DCD) and (SPI-CLOCK & SPI-IO)

<param1>

For Type = 0

0: V24-RI & v24-DCD active

(default value)

1: SPI-CLOCK & SPI-IO active

15.58 SIM Holder Status AT+WSHS

15.58.1 Description

This command permits to check at any time if the SIM Holder is closed or open.

Notes:

• This command is an addition to the existing unsolicited message indication, available by activating +WIND at the appropriate level.

• This command does not give any information concerning SIM card presence since this information is available differently (by unsolicited indication or using AT+CPIN).

15.58.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+WSHS

Command

AT+WSHS

Note : Ask for the current SIM Holder state

AT+WSHS=?

AT+WSHS?

Possible responses

+WSHS: 0

OK

Note : the SIM Holder is open

+WSHS: (0-1)

OK

ERROR confidential ©

Page: 330 / 478




< ReturnCode > : Current state of the SIM Holder

0 : The SIM Holder is open

1 : The SIM Holder is closed

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008


Page: 331 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

16 SIM TOOLKIT

16.1 Overview of SIM Application ToolKit

16.1.1 Summary

SIM ToolKit, also known as “SIM Application ToolKit” introduces functionalities, which open the way to a broad range of value added services.

The principle is to allow service providers to develop new applications

(e.g.. for banking, travel, ticket booking, etc.) for subscribers and to download them into the SIM.

This solution allows new services to be accessible to the user by adding new

SIM-based applications without modifying the handset.

16.1.2 Functionality

SIM Toolkit refers to the functionalities described in the GSM Technical specification 11.14.

It introduces twenty five commands for the SIM. Three classes of increasing

ToolKit functionalities have been defined, with class 1 offering a subset of commands and class 3 offering the full range of commands (See table 1 in

APPENDIX B).

The SIM Application Toolkit supports:

• profile download,

• proactive SIM,

• data download into SIM.

• menu selection,

• call control by SIM.

The Profile Download instruction is sent by the customer application to the

SIM as part of the initialization. It is used to indicate which SIM Application

Toolkit features is supported by the customer application.

The AT command used for this operation is +STSF

(SIM ToolKit Set Facilities).

A proactive SIM provides a mechanism whereby the SIM can ask the customer application to perform certain actions. confidential ©

Page: 332 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

These actions include:

• display menu,

• display given text,

• get user input,

• send a short message,

• play the requested tone,

• set up a call,

• provide location information.

This mechanism allows SIM applications to generate powerful menu-driven sequences on the customer application and to use services available in the network.

The commands used for this operation are:

+STIN (SIM Toolkit Indication),

+STGI

(SIM Toolkit Get Information),

+STGR

(SIM Toolkit Give Response).

16.1.5 Data Download to SIM

Data downloading to the SIM

(SMS, phonebook…) allows data or programs

(Java applets) received by SMS or by Cell Broadcast to be transferred directly to the SIM Application.

This feature does not need any AT command. It is transparent to the customer application.

A set of menu items is supplied by the SIM Application ToolKit. The menu selection command can then be used to signal to the SIM Application which menu item is selected.

The commands used for this operation are +STIN, +STGI and +STGR.

16.1.7 Call control by SIM

The call control mechanism allows the SIM to check all dialed numbers, supplementary service control strings and USSD strings before connecting to the network. This gives the SIM the ability to allow, bar or modify the string before the operation starts.

The commands used for this operation are:

+STCR

(SIM Toolkit Control Response),

+STGR (SIM Toolkit Give Response). confidential ©

Page: 333 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

16.2 Messages exchanged during a SIM ToolKit operation.

The following scheme shows the SIM Toolkit commands and unsolicited results that are exchanged.

+

STSF

=X,XXXXXXXX

STEP 1: Configuration and Activation

WAVECOM

Product

+STIN=X

STEP 2: SIM sends pro-active d

+STGI=X

+STGI response

STEP 3: Customer application gets all the i f ti

+STCR:X

+STGR=X,XXXXXX

Step 4: User response is sent to the SIM.

Customer

Application

On the first step, the customer application informs the WAVECOM product which facilities are supported. This operation is performed with the +STSF

(SIM ToolKit Set Facilities) command, which also allows to activate or deactivate the SIM Toolkit functionality.

On the second step, an unsolicited result +STIN

(SIM ToolKit indication) is sent by the product, indicating to the customer application which command type the SIM Application Toolkit is running on the SIM card. The last SIM Toolkit indication can be requested by the +STIN? command.

On the third step, the customer application uses the +STGI

(SIM ToolKit Get

Information) command to get all the information about the SIM ToolKit command, returned by a +STIN message.

On the fourth step, the customer application uses the +STGR

(SIM Toolkit Give

Response) to send its response (if any) to the SIM ToolKit Application. confidential ©

Page: 334 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

The +STCR

(SIM Toolkit Control response) indication is an unsolicited result sent by the SIM when Call control functionality is activated and before the customer application has performed any outgoing call, SMS, SS, or USSD.

16.3 SIM TOOLKIT COMMANDS

16.3.1 SIM ToolKit Set Facilities (+STSF)

16.3.1.1 Description

This command allows SIM ToolKit facilities to be activated, deactivated or configured.

16.3.1.2 Syntax

Command syntax:

AT+STSF=<mode>[,<config>][,<Timeout>][,<AutoResponse>]

Command

AT+STSF=<Mode>[,<Config>]

[,<Timeout>][,<AutoResponse>]

AT+STSF?

AT+STSF=?

Possible responses

OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

+STSF:

<Mode>,<Config>,<Timeout>,<Autoresponse>

+STSF: (0-2), (160060C01F – 5FFFFFFF7F),(1-

255),(0-1)

OK

16.3.1.3 Defined values

<mode>

0: Deactivates the SIM Toolkit functionalities.

1: Activates the SIM Toolkit functionalities.

2: Configures the SIM Toolkit functionalities.

<Config>

(160060C01F – 5FFFFFFF7F) (hex format)

<Timeout> confidential ©

Page: 335 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Range 1 to 255: Timeout for user responses (multiple of 10 seconds).

<Autoresponse>

0: Automatic response is not activated

1: Automatic response is activated

Notes:

•

•

The activation or deactivation of the SIM Toolkit functionalities requires the use of the +CFUN

(Set phone functionality) command to reset the product. This operation is not necessary if

PIN is not entered yet.

The <Config> parameter gives the coding of the TERMINAL

PROFILE, precisely the list of SIM Application Toolkit facilities that are supported by the customer application.

•

The <Timeout> parameter (multiple of 10 seconds) sets the maximum time for the user action (to select an item, to input a text, etc).

•

When <Autoresponse> is activated, the +STIN indication for Play

Tone (5), Refresh (7), Send SS (8), Send SMS (9) or Send USSD

(10) is automatically followed by the corresponding +STGI response.

Note:

Some bits are related to the product only and not to the customer application.

The product automatically sets these bits to either 0 or 1 whatever the user enters with the +STSF command. Those values are given in Appendix C.

Each facility is coded on 1 bit:

• bit = 1: facility is supported by the customer application.

• bit = 0: facility is not supported by the customer application.

Only the first five bytes of the TERMINAL PROFILE (Class 2) can be configured, the other are set to 0.

(See structure of TERMINAL PROFILE in APPENDIX C)

16.3.1.4 Error codes

+CME ERROR: 3 Operation not allowed. This error is returned when a wrong parameter is entered. confidential ©

Page: 336 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

16.3.1.5 Example

AT+CMEE=1

Enable the reporting of mobile equipment errors

OK

AT+WIND=15

AT+CPAS

AT+STSF=?

Set Wavecom indications

OK

+CPAS: 0

OK

Query ME Status

ME is ready.

Test command SIM ToolKit Set Facilities

+STSF: (0-2), (160060C01F – 5FFFFFFF7F),(1-255)

OK

AT+STSF?

+STSF: 0,”160060C000”,3

OK

AT+STSF=2,”5FFFFFFF7F” Set all SIM ToolKit facilities (class 3).

OK

AT+STSF=3 Syntax Error

+CME ERROR: 3

AT+STSF=1

OK

AT+CFUN=1

OK

AT+CPIN?

+CPIN: SIM PIN

AT+CPIN=0000

OK

+WIND: 4

Activation of SIM ToolKit functionality

Reboot Software.

Is the ME requiring a password?

Yes, SIM PIN required

PIN Ok

No activation of SIM ToolKit functionality

Init phase is complete

AT+STSF?

+STSF: 1,”5FFFFFFF7F”,3

OK

SIM ToolKit functionality activated with all facilities

16.3.2 SIM ToolKit Indication (+STIN +STRIL)

16.3.2.1 Unsolicited result

In order to allow the customer application to identify the pro-active command sent via SIM ToolKit, a mechanism of unsolicited SIM ToolKit indications

(+STIN) is implemented. confidential ©

Page: 337 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

<CmdType>

0: a ‘Setup Menu’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM.

1: a ‘Display Text’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM.

2: a ‘Get Inkey’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM.

3: a ‘Get Input’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM.

4: a ‘Setup Call’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM.

5: a ‘Play Tone’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM. (*)

6: a ‘Sel Item’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM.

7: a ‘Refresh’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM. (*)

8: a ‘Send SS’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM. (*)

9: a ‘Send SMS’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM. (*)

10: a ‘Send USSD’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM. (*)

11: a ‘SETUP EVENT LIST’ pro-active command has been sent from the

SIM.

98: timeout when no response from user.

(*) if the automatic response parameter is activated, this indication is followed by the corresponding +STGI response.

In case the customer application needs to exchange SIM Toolkit message direclty with the SIM card, the second indication (

+STRIL) give the full command string given by the SIM.

Syntax: +STRIL: <CmdTreated>,<Command string>

< CmdTreated >

0: The command must be treated by the application.

1: The command is already treated by the module,

<Command string> string type; Sim command string in hexadecimal format. confidential ©

Page: 338 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

16.3.2.2 Last SIM toolkit indication

The last SIM toolkit indication sent by the SIM can be requested by the

AT+STIN? command. This command is only usable between the sending of the

STIN indication by the SIM (step 2: see section 16.2) and the response of the user with the +STGI command (step 3).

Command syntax: AT+STIN?


AT+STIN?

+STIN: 0

Note: Ask for the last SIM toolkit indication sent by the SIM

OK

Note: the last SIM toolkit indication was a Setup Menu

AT+STGI=0

Note: Display the SIM toolkit application menu

AT+STIN?

+CME ERROR: 4

Note: Ask for the last SIM toolkit indication sent by the SIM

Note: operation not supported, the

+STGI command has been already used confidential ©

Page: 339 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

16.3.3 SIM ToolKit Get Information (+STGI)


This command allows to get the information (text to display, Menu information, priorities…) of a pro-active command sent from the SIM.

The information is returned only after receiving a SIM Toolkit indication

(+STIN).

16.3.3.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+STGI=<CmdType>

Command

AT+STGI=<CmdType>

AT+STGI=?

Possible responses

See Table 1

+CME ERROR: <err>

+STGI: (0-11)

OK

Table 1

Cmd

Type

Description Possible responses

0

1

2

3

+STGI: <Alpha Identifier menu>

+STGI: <Id1>,<NbItems>,<Alpha Id1 Label>,<Help

‘Setup Menu’ pro-active command.


Info>[,<NextActionId>]<CR><LF>

[…]]

No action expected from SIM.

Get information about

‘Display text’ pro-active command.

+STGI: <Prior>,<Text>,<ClearMode>

No action expected from SIM.

Get information about ‘Get

Inkey’ pro-active command.

+STGI: <Format>,<HelpInfo>[,<TextInfo>]

SIM expects key pressed (+STGR).

Get information about ‘Get

Input’ pro-active command.

+STGI: <Format>,<EchoMode>,<SizeMin>,<SizeMax>,

<HelpInfo>[,<TextInfo>]

SIM expects key input (+STGR). confidential ©

Page: 340 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Cmd

Type

Description

4

5

6

Possible responses

+STGI: <Type>,<CalledNb>,<SubAddress>,<Class>

‘Setupt call’ pro-active command.

SIM expects user authorization (+STGR).

Get information about ‘Play

Tone’ pro-active command.

+STGI: <ToneType>[,<TimeUnit>,<TimeInterval>,<TextInfo>]

No action.

+STGI: <DefaultItem>, <Alpha Identifier menu><CR><LF>



Get information about ‘Sel

Item’ pro-active command.



[…]]

SIM expects an item choice (+STGR).

7

8

9

10

11

‘Refresh’ pro-active command.

No action (Refresh done automatically by product).

Get information about ‘Send

SS’ pro-active command.

+STGI:<TextInfo>

No action (Send SS done automatically by product).


SMS’ pro-active command.

+STGI: <TextInfo>

No action (Send SMS done automatically by product).


USSD’ pro-active command.

+STGI: <TextInfo>

No action (Send USSD done automatically by product).

Get information about

‘SETUP EVENT LIST’ proactive command.

+STGI: <Evt> confidential ©

Page: 341 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005


Values when CmdType=0 (Setup menu)

<Alpha Idenitifer menu> Alpha identifier of the main menu.

<Idx> (1-255)

<NbItems> (1-255)

<Alpha Idx Label> format.

<HelpInfo>

Menu item Identifier.

Number of items in the main menu.

Alpha identifier label of items in ASCII

No help information available.

1:

<NextActionId> Contains a pro-active command identifier.

(see the table in APPENDIX D)

Compared to other commands the customer application can always get information about setup menu after having received the +STIN:0 indication.

Values when CmdType=1 (Display text)

<Prior>

Normal priority of display.

1:

<ClearMode>

0:

(3 seconds)

1: Wait for user to clear message.

Values when CmdType=2 (Get Inkey)

<Format>

0: (0-9, *, #,and +)

2:

<HelpInfo>

UCS2

<TextInfo> Text information in ASCII format. confidential ©

Page: 342 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Values when CmdType=3 (Get Input)

<Format>

0: (0-9, *, #,and +)

<EchoMode>

<SizeMin> (1-255)

<SizeMax> (1-255)

<HelpInfo>

Minimum length of input.

Maximum length of input.

1: Help information available.

<TextInfo> Text information in ASCII format.

Values when CmdType=4 (Setup Call)

<Type>

0: Set up call but only if not currently busy on another call.

1: Set up call, putting all other calls

(if any) on hold.

2: Set up call, disconnecting all other calls

(if any).

<CalledNb> Called party number in ASCII format.

<SubAdress>

<Class>

Called party sub-address in ASCII format. confidential ©

Page: 343 / 478



Values when CmdType=5 (Play tone)

<ToneType>

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

3: Tone Radio ack

6:

8:

9:

10:

<TimeUnit>

Tone Call waiting.

Tone General beep.

Tone Positive beep.

Tone Negative beep.

1:

2:

Time unit used is seconds.

Time unit used is tenths of seconds.

<TimeInterval> (1-255) Time required expressed in units.


Values when CmdType=6 (Sel Item)

<DefaultItem> (1-255) Default Item Identifier.

<Alpha Idenitifer menu>

<Idx> (1-255)

<NbItems> (1-255)

<Alpha Idx Label> format.

<HelpInfo>

Alpha identifier of the main menu.

Identifier items.

Number of items in the menu.

Alpha identifier label of items in ASCII

1: Help information available.

<NextActionId> Contains a pro-active command identifier.

(see the table in APPENDIX D) confidential ©

Page: 344 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Values when CmdType=7 (Refresh)

<RefreshType>

0: SlM initialization and full file change notification.

1 File change notification.

2 SIM initialization and file change notification.

Values when CmdType=8 (Send SS)


Values when CmdType=9 (Send SMS)


Values when CmdType=10 (Send USSD)


Values when CmdType=11 (Setup Event List)

<Evt>

1: Reporting asked for an ‘Idle Screen’ event.

2: Reporting asked for an ‘User Activity’ event.

3: Reporting asked for ‘Idle Screen’ and ‘User Activity’ events.

4: Cancellation of reporting event.

Rem: For the UCS2 format texts are displayed in Hexa Ascii format. Example:

When the SIM sends a TextString containing 0x00 0x41 the text displayed is

“0041”. confidential ©

Page: 345 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

16.3.3.4 Error codes

+ CME ERROR: 3 Operation not allowed. This error is returned when a wrong parameter is detected.

+CME ERROR: 4 Operation not supported. This error is returned when the user wants to get information about a SIM ToolKit proactive command (with SIM ToolKit functionality not activated.)

+CME ERROR: 518 SIM ToolKit indication not received. This error is returned when the SIM Toolkit indication (+STIN) has not been received.

16.3.3.5 Example

Initially, all facilities are activated, the PIN is not required and SIM toolkit functionality is activated.

AT+CMEE=1

Enable the reporting of mobile equipment errors

OK

AT+WIND=15

OK

AT+STSF?

+STSF: 1,”5FFFFFFF7F”,3

Set Wavecom indications

SIM ToolKit functionality activated with all facilities.

OK

+STIN: 0

AT+STIN?

+STIN: 0

OK

AT+STGI=0

The main menu has been sent from the SIM.

Get information about the main menu

+STGI: ”SIM TOOLKIT MAIN MENU” Main menu contains 3 items.

+STGI: 1,3,”BANK”,0

+STGI: 2,3,”QUIZ”,0

+STGI: 3,3,”WEATHER”,0

OK

AT+STIN?

+CME ERROR: 4 confidential ©

Page: 346 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

16.3.4 Unsolicited Result: SIM ToolKit Control Response (+STCR)

When the customer application makes an outgoing call or an outgoing SMS and if the call control facility is activated, CALL CONTROL and SMS CONTROL responses can be identified. This is also applicable to SS calls.

Option:

<Result>

0: Control response not allowed.

1: Control response with modification.

<Number> Called number, Service Center Address or SS String in

ASCII format.

<MODestAddr> MO destination address in ASCII format.


16.3.5 SIM ToolKit Give Response (+STGR)


This command allows the application/user to select an item in the main menu, or to answer the following proactive commands:

• GET INKEY

Key pressed by the user.

• GET INPUT

• SELECT ITEM

• SETUP CALL

Message entered by the user.

Selected item.

User confirmation.

• DISPLAY TEXT

User confirmation to clear the message.

• SETUP EVENT LIST Reporting events.

It is also possible to terminate the current proactive command session by sending a Terminal Response to the SIM, with the following parameters:

• BACKWARD MOVE

Process a backward move

• BEYOND CAPABILITIES

Command beyond ME capabilities

TO command

• NO RESPONSE

• END SESSION

No response from the user

User abort. confidential ©

Page: 347 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

16.3.5.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+STGR=<CmdType>[,<Result>,<Data>]

Command

AT+STGR=<CmdType>[,<Result>,<D ata>]

Possible responses

OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

For GetInput with <Result>=1:

AT+STGR=3,1<CR>

<Data><Ctrl Z>

For GetInkey with <Result>=1

AT+STGR=2,1,”<Data>”

OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

AT+STGR=? OK


<CmdType>

0: Item selection in the main menu.

1: User confirmation to clear a ‘Disp Text’.

2: Response for a ‘Get Inkey’.

3: Response for a ‘Get Input’.

4: Response for a ‘Setup call’.

6: Response for a ‘Sel Item’.

11 Reponse for a ‘Setup event list’.

96 Command beyond ME capabilities

97 ME currently unable to process command

98 No response from the user. confidential ©

Page: 348 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Values when CmdType=0 (Select an item from the main menu)

<Result>

1: Item selected by the user.

2: Help information required by user.

<Data> Contains the item identifier of the item selected by the user.

Values when CmdType=1 (Confirm the display text clearing)

No values.

Values when CmdType=2 (Get Inkey)

<Result>

0: Session ended by user.

1: Response given by the user.

2: Help information required by user.

<Data> Contains the key pressed by the user.

Values when CmdType=3 (Get Input)

<Result>

0:

1:

2:

<Data>

Session ended by user.

Response given by the user.

Help information required by user.

Contains the string of characters entered by the user.

Note:

For Inputs in UCS2 format, the data are entered in ASCII format. Example: For

“8000410042FFFF” entered, the SIM receives 0x00 0x41 0x00 0x42 with

UCS2 DCS. (See the Appendix E about the different UCS2 syntaxes).

Values when CmdType=4 (Setup call)

<Result>

0: User refuses the call.

1: User accepts call. confidential ©

Page: 349 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Values when CmdType=6 (Select Item)

<Result>

0: Session terminated by the user

1:

2:

Item selected by the user

Help information required by the user

3: Return to the back item

<Data> Contains the item identifier selected by the user

Values when CmdType=11 (Setup Event List)

<Result>

1: Idle screen available.

2: User activity event.

Sending a Terminal Response to the SIM:

Values when CmdType=95 (Backward Move)

Values when CmdType=96 (Command beyond ME capabilities)

Values when CmdType=97 (ME currently unable to process command)

Values when CmdType=98 (No response from the user)

Values when CmdType=99 (SIM Toolkit Session aborting by the user)

No values.

It is possible to send a Terminal Response after the +STIN indication (step 2, cf

§16.2), or after the +STGI command (step 3).

Note:

For the SETUP MENU Proactive Command, it is only possible to send a

Terminal Response after the +STIN: 0 indication, not after a +STGI=0 request.

All of the Terminal Responses are not possible with all of the Proactive

Commands. Compatibility between available Terminal Responses and Proactive

Commands is given in Appendix B, Table 2. If a Terminal Response is attempted during a incompatible Proactive Command session, a +CME ERROR:

3 will be returned.

16.3.5.4 Possible error codes

+ CME ERROR: 3 Operation not allowed. This error is returned when a wrong parameter is detected.

+CME ERROR: 4 Operation not supported. This error is returned when the user gives a response with SIM ToolKit functionality not activated. Or if the SIM Toolkit indication

(+STIN) has not been received. confidential ©

Page: 350 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

16.3.5.5 Example

Initially, all facilities are activated, the PIN is not required and the SIM toolkit functionality is activated.

+STIN: 0

AT+STGI=0

The main menu has been sent from the SIM.

Get information about the main menu

The main menu contains 3 items.

+STGI: 1,3,”BANK”,0

+STGI: 2,3,”QUIZ”,0

+STGI: 3,3,”WEATHER”,0

OK

AT+STGR=0,1,1

The item 2 of the main menu has been selected.

OK

+STIN: 6

AT+STGI=6

+STGI: 1,”BANK”

The Sel item menu has been sent from the SIM.

Get information about the BANK menu

The BANK menu contains two items.

+STGI: 1,2,”PERSONAL ACCOUNT ENQUIRY”,1

+STGI: 2,2,”NEWS”,0

OK

AT+STGR=6,1,1

OK

+STIN: 3

AT+STGI=3

Select Item 1.

User request to enter Password sent.

Get information about this request.

+STGI: 0,0,4,4,0,”Enter Account Password:’

OK

AT+STGR=3,1<CR>

>0000<Ctrl Z>

The user enters the Password.

OK

+STIN:1

AT+STGI=1

A text info has been sent from the SIM.

Get information about this text.

+STGI: 0,”Password correct, please wait for response”,0

OK

+STIN: 9

AT+STGI=9

SIM requests a bank account update from bank server via the network (SEND SMS)

Get all information about the SEND SMS

+STGI: ”Send account balance of user, authorization ok”

OK

********* After a short period of time. ********

+STIN: 5

Transaction is complete: BEEP

Get information about the Tone +STGI=5

+STGI: 9,1,1

+STIN: 1 Display text indication confidential ©

Page: 351 / 478



AT+STGI=1

+STGI: 0,”Your account balance is 1000 $”,0

OK

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008


Page: 352 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

17 GPRS commands

GPRS commands are not available under GSM-only software.

17.1 Define PDP Context +CGDCONT

17.1.1 Description

This command specifies PDP context parameter values for a PDP context identified by the local context identification parameter, <cid>.

Four PDP contexts can be defined through Wavecom software.

A special form of the set command, +CGDCONT= <cid> causes the values for context number <cid> to become undefined.

The test command returns values supported as a compound value. If the MT supports several PDP types, <PDP_type>, the parameter value ranges for each

<PDP_type> are returned on a separate line.

The read command returns the current settings for each defined context.

The test command returns values supported as a compound value. If the MT supports several PDP types, <PDP_type), the parameter value ranges for each

<PDP_type> are returned on a separate line.

17.1.2 Syntax

Command Possible response(s) confidential ©

Page: 353 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Command Possible response(s)

AT+CGDCONT=[<cid> [,<PDP_type> [,<APN>

[,<PDP_addr> [,<d_comp> [,<h_comp>]]]]]]

OK

ERROR

AT+CGDCONT? +CGDCONT: <cid>, <PDP_type>,

<APN>,<PDP_addr>, <data_comp>, <head_comp>

[<CR><LF>+CGDCONT: <cid>, <PDP_type>,

<APN>,<PDP_addr>, <data_comp>, <head_comp>

[...]]

OK

(range of supported <cid>s),

<PDP_type>,,,(list of supported <d_comp>s),

(list of supported <h_comp>s)

[<CR><LF>+CGDCONT: (range of supported <cid>s),

<PDP_type>,,,(list of supported <d_comp>s),(list of supported <h_comp>s)

[...]]

OK

AT+CGDCONT: 1, “IP”, “internet”;

+GCDCONT=2, “IP”, “abc.com”

OK

AT+CGDCONT?

+CGDCONT: (1-4),”PPP”,,,0,0

OK

+CGDCONT: 1, “IP”, “internet”,,0,0

+CGDCONT: 2, “IP”, “abc.com”,,0,0

OK

<cid>: (PDP Context Identifier) a numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition. The parameter is local to the TE-MT interface and is used in other PDP context-related commands. Range of values is 1 to 4.

<PDP_type>: (Packet Data Protocol type) a string parameter which specifies the type of packet data protocol

• IP: Internet Protocol

• PPP: Point to Point Protocol

<APN>: (Access Point Name) a string parameter, which is a logical name that is used to select the GGSN or the external packet data network. confidential ©

Page: 354 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

If the value is null or omitted, then the subscription value will be requested.

<PDP_address>: a string parameter that identifies the MT in the address space applicable to the PDP.

If the value is null or omitted, then a value may be provided by the TE during the PDP startup procedure or, a dynamic address will be requested. The read form of the command will return the null string even if an address has been allocated during the PDP startup procedure. The allocated address may be read using the +CGPADDR command.

<d_comp>: a numeric parameter that controls PDP data compression

• 0: OFF (default if value is omitted)

• 1: ON

• Other values are reserved.

<h_comp>: a numeric parameter that controls PDP header compression

• 0: OFF (default if value is omitted)

• 1: ON

• Other values are reserved.

Notes:

• The data compression algorithm provided in SNDCP is V.42bis.

• 4 cids are available to specifie 4 PDP contexts but only 11 NSAPI are available for PDP activation. Due to Wavecom Choice, 4 PDP contexts can be specifie with only one activated at the same time.

17.2 Quality of Service Profile (Requested) +CGQREQ

17.2.1 Description

This command allows the TE to specify a Quality of Service Profile that is used when the MT sends an Activate PDP Context Request message to the network.

The set command specifies a profile for the context identified by the local context identification parameter, <cid>. Since this is the same parameter that is used in the +CGDCONT command, the +CGQREQ command is effectively an confidential ©

Page: 355 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005 extension to the +CGDCONT command. The QoS profile consists of a number of parameters, each of which may be set to a separate value.

A special form of the set command, +CGQREQ= <cid> causes the requested profile for context number <cid> to become undefined.


The test command returns values supported as a compound value. If the MT supports several PDP types, the parameter value ranges for each PDP type are returned on a separate line.

17.2.2 Syntax

Command Possible Response(s)

AT+CGQREQ=[<cid> [,<precedence >

[,<delay> [,<reliability.> [,<peak>

[,<mean>]]]]]]

OK

ERROR

AT+CGQREQ? +CGQREQ: <cid>, <precedence >, <delay>,

<reliability>, <peak>, <mean>

[<CR><LF>+CGQREQ: <cid>, <precedence

>, <delay>, <reliability.>, <peak>, <mean>

[…]]

OK

AT+CGQREQ=? +CGQREQ: <PDP_type>, (list of supported

<precedence>s), (list of supported <delay>s),

(list of supported <reliability>s) , (list of supported <peak>s), (list of supported

<mean>s)

[<CR><LF>+CGQREQ: <PDP_type>, (list of supported <precedence>s), (list of supported

<delay>s), (list of supported <reliability>s) ,

(list of supported <peak>s), (list of supported

<mean>s)

[…]]

OK

AT +CGQREQ=1,1,4,5,2,14

OK

AT+CGQREQ=? +CGQREG:“IP”,(1-3),(1-4),(1-5),(1-9),(1-31)

+CGQREQ:“PPP”,(1-3),(1-4),(1-5),(1-9),(1-31)

OK

AT+CGQREQ? +CGQREQ: 1,1,4,5,2,14

OK confidential ©

Page: 356 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

<cid>: numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition.

Range of values is 1 to 3

<precedence>: numeric parameter which specifies the precedence class

0: Subscribed precedence (Subscribed by the Network by default if value is omitted)

1: High priority (Service commitments shall be maintained ahead of precedence classes 2 and 3)

2: Normal priority (Service commitments shall be maintained ahead of precedence class 3.)

3: Low priority (Service commitments shall be maintained after precedence classes 1 and 2)

<delay>: numeric parameter which specifies the delay class

0: Subscribed

1: Delay class 1

2: Delay class 2

3: Delay class 3

4: Delay class 4

Delay (maximum values)

Delay Class

SDU size: 128 bytes

Mean

Transfer

Delay (sec)

95 percentile

Delay (sec)

SDU size: 1024 bytes

Mean

Transfer

Delay (sec)

95 percentile

Delay (sec)

Subscribed is omitted

1. (Predictive)

2. (Predictive)

< 0.5

< 5

< 1.5

< 25

< 2

< 15

3. (Predictive)

4. (Best Effort)

< 50 < 250 < 75

Unspecified

< 7

< 75

< 375 confidential ©

Page: 357 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

<reliability>: numeric parameter which specifies the reliability class

0: Subscribed

1: Up to 1 000 (8 kbit/s).

2: Up to 2 000 (16 kbit/s).

3: Up to 4 000 (32 kbit/s).

4: Up to 8 000 (64 kbit/s).

5: Up to 16 000 (128 kbit/s).

6: Up to 32 000 (256 kbit/s).

7: Up to 64 000 (512 kbit/s).

8: Up to 128 000 (1 024 kbit/s).

9: Up to 256 000 (2 048 kbit/s).

Reliability

Class

GTP Mode LLC

Mode

Frame LLC Data

Protection

RLC Block

Mode

Traffic Type

0 Subscribed Subscribed by the Nwk / default if value is omitted

1 Acknowled ged

2 Unacknowl edged error-sensitive application that cannot cope with data loss. real-time error-sensitive application that can cope with infrequent data loss.

3 Unacknowl edged

Unacknowledge d

4 Unacknowl edged

5 Unacknowl edged

Unacknowledge d

Unacknowledge d

Protected Acknowledged Non real-time traffic, error-sensitive application that can cope with data loss,

GMM/SM, and SMS.

Protected Unacknowledge d

Real-time traffic, errorsensitive application that can cope with data loss.

Unprotecte d

Unacknowledge d

Real-time traffic, error non-sensitive application that can cope with data loss.

NOTE: throughput.

For real-time traffic, the QoS profile also requires appropriate settings for delay and confidential ©

Page: 358 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

<peak>: numeric parameter which specifies the peak throughput class

0: Subscribed

1: Up to 1 000 (8 kbit/s).

2: Up to 2 000 (16 kbit/s).

3: Up to 4 000 (32 kbit/s).

4: Up to 8 000 (64 kbit/s).

5: Up to 16 000 (128 kbit/s).

6: Up to 32 000 (256 kbit/s).

7: Up to 64 000 (512 kbit/s).

8: Up to 128 000 (1 024 kbit/s).

9: Up to 256 000 (2 048 kbit/s).

<mean>: numeric parameter which specifies the mean throughput class

0: Subscribed by the Nwk / default if value is omitted

1: 100 (~0.22 bit/s).

2: 200 (~0.44 bit/s).

3: 500 (~1.11 bit/s).

4: 1 000 (~2.2 bit/s).

5: 2 000 (~4.4 bit/s).

6: 5 000 (~11.1 bit/s).

7: 10 000 (~22 bit/s).

8: 20 000 (~44 bit/s).

9: 50 000 (~111 bit/s).

10: 100 000 (~0.22 kbit/s).

11: 200 000 (~0.44 kbit/s).

12: 500 000 (~1.11 kbit/s).

13: 1 000 000 (~2.2 kbit/s).

14: 2 000 000 (~4.4 kbit/s).

15: 5 000 000 (~11.1 kbit/s).

16: 10 000 000 (~22 kbit/s).

17: 20 000 000 (~44 kbit/s).

18: 50 000 000 (~111 kbit/s).

31: Best effort.

If a value is omitted for a particular class, then it is considered to be unspecified. confidential ©

Page: 359 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

17.3 Quality of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable)

+CGQMIN

17.3.1 Description

This command allows the TE to specify a minimum acceptable profile which is checked by the MT against the negotiated profile returned in the Activate PDP

Context Accept message.

The set command specifies a profile for the context identified by the local context identification parameter, <cid>. Since this is the same parameter that is used in the +CGDCONT command, the +CGQMIN command is an extension to the +CGDCONT command. The QoS profile consists of a number of parameters, each of which may be set to a separate value.

A special form of the set command, +CGQMIN= <cid> causes the minimum acceptable profile for context number <cid> to become undefined. In this case no check is made against the negotiated profile.


The test command returns values supported as a compound value. If the MT supports several PDP types, the parameter value ranges for each PDP type are returned on a separate line. confidential ©

Page: 360 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

17.3.2 Syntax


AT+CGQMIN=[<cid> OK

[,<precedence > [,<delay>

[,<reliability.> [,<peak>

[,<mean>]]]]]]

ERROR

<cid>, <precedence >, <delay>,

<reliability>, <peak>, <mean>

[<CR><LF>+CGQMIN: <cid>, <precedence >,

<delay>, <reliability.>, <peak>, <mean>

[…]]

OK

AT+CGQMIN=? +CGQMIN: <PDP_type>, (list of supported

<precedence>s), (list of supported <delay>s),

(list of supported <reliability>s) , (list of supported <peak>s), (list of supported

<mean>s)

[<CR><LF>+CGQMIN: <PDP_type>, (list of supported <precedence>s), (list of supported

<delay>s), (list of supported <reliability>s) , (list of supported <peak>s), (list of supported

<mean>s)

[…]]

OK

AT +CGQMIN=1,1,4,5,2,31

AT+CGQMIN=?

OK

+CGQMIN:“IP”,(1-3),(1-4),(1-5),(1-9),(1-31)

+CGQMIN:“PPP”,(1-3),(1-4),(1-5),(1-9),(1-31)

OK

AT+CGQMIN? +CGQMIN: 1,1,4,5,2,14

OK

<cid>: a numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context .

<precedence>: a numeric parameter which specifies the precedence class.

<delay>: a numeric parameter which specifies the delay class.

<reliability>: a numeric parameter which specifies the reliability class.

<peak>: a numeric parameter which specifies the peak throughput class.

<mean>: a numeric parameter which specifies the mean throughput class.

If a value is omitted for a particular class then this class is not checked. confidential ©

Page: 361 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

17.4 GPRS attach or detach +CGATT

17.4.1 Description

The execution command is used to attach the MT to, or detach the MT from the GPRS service. After the command has completed, the MT remains in

V.25ter command state. If the MT is already in the requested state, the command is ignored and the OK response is returned. If the requested state cannot be achieved because the GPRS is not supported by the an ERROR or

+CME ERROR response is returned. Extended error responses are enabled by the +CMEE command.

Any active PDP contexts will be automatically deactivated when the attachment state changes to detached.

The read command returns the current GPRS service state.

The test command is used for requesting information on the supported GPRS service states.

17.4.2 Syntax

Command

AT+CGATT= [<state>]

AT+CGATT=?

AT +CGATT=1

Possible Response(s)

OK

ERROR

OK

+CGATT: (list of supported <state>s)

OK

OK

<state>: indicates the state of GPRS attachment

• 0: detached

• 1: attached confidential ©

Page: 362 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

• 2: combined detach (GPRS and GSM detach performed in the same network request)

• Other values are reserved and will result in an ERROR response to the execution command.

17.5 PDP context activate or deactivate +CGACT

17.5.1 Description

The execution command is used to activate or deactivate the specified PDP context(s). After the command has completed, the MT remains in V.25ter command state. If any PDP context is already in the requested state, the state for that context remains unchanged.

If the requested state for any specified context cannot be achieved, an ERROR or +CME ERROR response is returned. Extended error responses are enabled by the +CMEE command.

If the MT is not GPRS attached when the activation form of the command is executed, the MT first performs a GPRS attach and them attempts to activate the specified contexts. If the attach fails then the MT responds with ERROR or, if extended error responses are enabled, with the appropriate failure-to-attach error message.

If no <cid>s are specified the activation form of the command activates the first activable defined contexts.

If no <cid>s are specified the deactivation form of the command deactivates all active contexts.

One PDP contexts can be activated through Wavecom software at the same time.

The read command returns the current activation states for all the defined PDP contexts.

The test command is used for requesting information on the supported PDP context activation states. confidential ©

Page: 363 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

17.5.2 Syntax


AT+CGACT=[<state> [,<cid>[,<cid>[,…]]]] OK

ERROR

AT+CGACT? +CGACT: <cid>, <state>

[<CR><LF>+CGACT: <cid>, <state>

[...]]

OK

AT+CGACT=?

AT +CGACT=1,1

AT+CGACT?

+CGACT: (list of supported <state>s)

OK

OK

+CGACT: 1, 1

OK

AT+CGACT=? +CGACT: (0-1)

OK

<state>: indicates the state of PDP context activation

• 0: deactivated

• 1: activated

• Other values are reserved and will result in an ERROR response to the execution command.

<cid>: a numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context.

Before the activation of the context, the MT has to attach itself to the GPRS network if necessary.

Note: If a GPRS PPP session is already running, the setting of a CSD (GSM data call) is not supported. confidential ©

Page: 364 / 478



17.6 Enter data state +CGDATA

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

17.6.1 Description

This command causes the MT to perform the necessary actions to set up communication between the TE and the network. This may include performing a GPRS attach and one PDP context activation.

If the <cid> value is not defined to the MT, it will return an ERROR or +CME

ERROR response. Otherwise, the MT issues the intermediate result code

CONNECT and enters V.25ter online data state.

GPRS attachment and PDP context activation procedures may take place prior to or during the PDP startup if they have not already been performed using the

+CGATT and +CGACT commands.

If no <cid> is given, the MT attempts to activate the context with available information. The other context parameters are set to their default values (No

APN, default QOS parameters, dynamic IP address requested).

If the activation is successful, data transfer may proceed.

After data transfer and layer 2 protocol termination procedure completion, the

V.25ter command state is re-entered and the MT returns the final result code

OK.

In case of abnormal termination or start up, the V.25ter command state is reentered and the MT returns the final result code NO CARRIER or, if enabled,

+CME ERROR. Attach, activate and other errors may be reported.

This command may be used in both normal and modem compatibility modes.

Notes:

• This command has the same effects than ATD*99***.

• If a GPRS PPP session is already running, the setting of a CSD (GSM data call) is not supported. confidential ©

Page: 365 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

17.6.2 Syntax


AT+CGDATA=[<cid>] CONNECT

ERROR

AT+CGDATA=? +CGDATA:

OK

AT+CGDATA=? +CGDATA:

OK

AT +CGDATA=1 CONNECT

<cid>: a numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition.

17.7 GPRS mobile station class +CGCLASS

17.7.1 Description

The set command is used to set the MT to operate according to the specified

GPRS mobile class. If the requested class is not supported, an ERROR or +CME

ERROR response is returned.

The read command returns the current GPRS mobile class.

The test command is used for requesting information on the supported GPRS mobile classes.

17.7.2 Syntax


AT+CGCLASS= [<class>] OK

ERROR

AT+CGCLASS=?

OK

+CGCLASS: (list of supported <class>s)

OK confidential ©

Page: 366 / 478



AT +CGCLASS=”CG”

Note: Enter GPRS class C mode

AT +CGCLASS=”CC”

Note: Enter GSM mode

AT +CGCLASS=”A”

Note: Chosen class not supported.

OK

OK

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

+CME ERROR: 150

OK

OK

<class>: a string parameter which indicates the GPRS mobile class (in descending order of functionality)

• A class A (highest)

• B class

• CG

• CC class C in GPRS only mode class C in circuit switched only mode (lowest)

Other values are reserved and will result in an ERROR response to the set command.

If the MT is GPRS attached when the set command is issued with a <class> =

CC specified, a GPRS detach request is sent to the network.

If the MT is GSM attached when the set command is issued with a <class> =

CG specified, a GSM detach request is sent to the network.

Class A is not supported by Wavecom GPRS software.

Remark: During switch-On in CG class, the MS always performs an automatic

GPRS attach (the ATTACH-STATUS parameter of +WGPRS is ignored).

But if the MS is not already GPRS attached when switching from B/CC class to

CG class then no automatic GPRS attach is performed. confidential ©

Page: 367 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Example about automatic attchment (see remark above):

AT+CGCLASS?

+CGCLASS: “B”

OK

AT+CGATT?

+CGATT: 0

OK

AT+CGCLASS=”CG”

OK

AT+CGATT?

+CGATT: 0

OK

AT+CGATT=1

OK

AT+CPOF

OK

AT+CFUN=1

OK

AT+CGCLASS?

+CGCLASS: “CG”

OK

AT+CGATT?

+CGATT: 1

OK

17.8 Select service for MO SMS messages +CGSMS

17.8.1 Description

The set command is used to specify the service or service preference that the

MT will use to send MO SMS messages.

The read command returns the currently selected service or service preference. confidential ©

Page: 368 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

The test command is used for requesting information on the currently available services and service preferences.

17.8.2 Syntax

Command

+CGSMS= [<service>]

+CGSMS=?

AT +CGSMS=0

AT+CGSMS=?

Possible Response(s)

OK

ERROR

OK

+CGSMS: (list of currently available

<service>s)

OK

OK

+CGSMS: (0-3)

OK

<service>: a numeric parameter which indicates the service or service preference to be used

• 0: GPRS

• 1: Circuit switched

• 2: GPRS preferred (use circuit switched if GPRS is not available)

• 3: Circuit switched preferred (use GPRS if circuit switched not available)

• Other values are reserved and will result in an ERROR response to the set command. confidential ©

Page: 369 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

17.9 GPRS event reporting +CGEREP

17.9.1 Description

Set command enables or disables sending of unsolicited result codes, +CGEV:

XXX from MT to TE in the case of certain events occurring in the GPRS MT or the network.

<mode> controls the processing of unsolicited result codes specified within this command.

Read command returns the current mode and buffer settings

Test command returns the modes and buffer settings supported by the MT as compound values.

17.9.2 Syntax

Command

+CGEREP=[<mode>]

+CGEREP=?

Possible response(s)

OK

ERROR

OK

+CGEREP: (list of supported <mode>s), (list of supported <bfr>s)

OK

<mode>:

• 0: buffer unsolicited result codes in the MT; if MT result code buffer is full, the oldest ones can be discarded. No codes are forwarded to the TE.

• 2: buffer unsolicited result codes in the MT when MT-TE link is reserved

(e.g. in on-line data mode) and flush them to the TE when MT-TE link becomes available; otherwise forward them directly to the TE

<bfr> confidential ©

Page: 370 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

• 0: MT buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is cleared when <mode> 1 or 2 entered. Only this case is supported by

Wavecom.

• 1: MT buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is flushed to the TE when <mode> 2 is entered. This case is not supported by Wavecom.

With Wavecom’s software, a combinaison of all modes is implemented. When serial link is available, indications are forwarded directly to the TE. If serial link is reserved ( e.g. in on-line data mode ), if MT result code buffer is full, the oldest ones can be discarded. confidential ©

Page: 371 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Defined events

The following unsolicited result codes and the corresponding events are defined:

+CGEV: REJECT <PDP_type>, <PDP_addr>

A network request for PDP context activation occurred when the MT was unable to report it to the TE with a +CRING unsolicited result code and was automatically rejected.

+CGEV: NW REACT <PDP_type>, <PDP_addr>, [<cid>]

The network has requested a context reactivation. The <cid> that was used to reactivate the context is provided if known to the MT.

+CGEV: NW DEACT <PDP_type>, <PDP_addr>, [<cid>]

The network has forced a context deactivation. The <cid> that was used to activate the context is provided if known to the MT.

+CGEV: ME DEACT <PDP_type>, <PDP_addr>, [<cid>]

The mobile equipment has forced a context deactivation. The <cid> that was used to activate the context is provided if known to the MT.

+CGEV: NW DETACH

The network has forced a GPRS detach. This implies that all active contexts have been deactivated. These are not reported separately.

+CGEV: ME DETACH

The mobile equipment has forced a GPRS detach. This implies that all active contexts have been deactivated. These are not reported separately.

+CGEV: NW CLASS <class>

The network has forced a change of MS class. The highest available class is reported.

+CGEV: ME CLASS <class>

The mobile equipment has forced a change of MS class. The highest available class is reported. confidential ©

Page: 372 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

17.10 GPRS network registration status +CGREG

17.10.1 Description

The set command controls the presentation of an unsolicited result code

+CGREG: <stat> when <n>=1 and there is a change in the MT’s GPRS network registration status, or code +CGREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>] when

<n>=2 and there is a change of the network cell.

The read command returns the status of result code presentation and an integer <stat> which shows whether the network has currently indicated the registration of the MT. Location information elements <lac> and <ci> are returned only when <n>=2 and MT is registered in the network.

17.10.2 Syntax


AT+CGREG=[<n>] OK

+CGREG: stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]

AT+CGREG=?

OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

+CGREG: (list of supported <n>s)

OK


<n>:

0: disable network registration unsolicited result code

1: enable network registration unsolicited result code +CGREG: <stat>

2: enable network registration and location information unsolicited result code +CGREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]

<stat>:

0: not registered, ME is not currently searching a new operator to register to confidential ©

Page: 373 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

1: registered, home network

2: not registered, but ME is currently searching a new operator to register to

3: registration denied

4: unknown

5: registered, roaming

<lac>: string type; two byte location area code in hexadecimal format.

<ci>: string type; two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format

17.11 Request GPRS IP service ‘D’

17.11.1 Description

This command causes the MT to perform whatever actions are necessary to establish communication between the TE and the external PDN.

The V.25ter ‘D’ (Dial) command causes the MT to enter the V.25ter online data state and, with the TE, to start the specified layer 2 protocol. The MT return

CONNECT to confirm acceptance of the command prior to entering the V.25ter online data state. No further commands may follow on the AT command line.

The detailed behaviour after the online data state has been entered is described briefly in clause 9, for IP, of GSM 07.60. GPRS attachment and PDP context activation procedures may take place prior to or during the PDP startup if they have not already been performed using the +CGATT and +CGACT commands.

If <cid> is supported, its usage is the same as in the +CGDATA command. The

+CGDCONT, +CGQREQ, etc. commands may then be used in the modem initialisation AT command string to set values for for PDP type, APN, QoS etc…

If <cid> is not supported or is supported but omitted, the MT attempt to activate the context using the ‘Empty PDP type’ (GSM 04.08). (No PDP address or APN is sent in this case and only one PDP context subscription record is present in the HLR for this subscriber.) confidential ©

Page: 374 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Note: If a GPRS PPP session is already running, the setting of a CSD (GSM data call) is not supported.

17.11.2 Syntax


D*<GPRS_SC_IP>[***<cid>]# CONNECT

ERROR

17.11.3 Defined Values

<GPRS_SC_IP>: (GPRS Service Code for IP) a digit string (value 99), which identifies a request to use the GPRS with IP (PDP types IP and PPP)

<cid>: a digit string which specifies a particular PDP context definition.

Example

ATD*99***1#

CONNECT

ATD*99***2#

ERROR

17.12 Network requested PDP context activation

In this mode of operation, the MT behaves like an answering modem and accepts the normal V.25ter commands associated with answering a call. If

GPRS-specific configuration commands are required, they may be sent to the

MT as part of the modem initialisation commands.

The +CGAUTO command is used to select modem compatibility mode.

17.12.1 Automatic response to a network request for PDP context activation ‘S0’

The V.25ter ‘S0=n’ (Automatic answer) command may be used to turn off

(n=0) and on (n>0) the automatic response to a network request for a PDP context activation. confidential ©

Page: 375 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

When the ‘S0=n’ (n>0) command is received, the MT attempt to perform a

GPRS attach if it is not already attached. Failure will result in ERROR being returned to the TE. Subsequently, the MT will announce a network request for

PDP context activation by issuing the unsolicited result code RING to the TE, followed by the intermediate result code CONNECT. The MT then enters

V.25ter online data state and follows the same procedure as it would after having received a +CGANS=1 with no <L2P> or <cid> values specified.

NOTE. The ‘S0=n’ (n=0) command does not perform an automatic GPRS detach.

17.12.2 Manual acceptance of a network request for PDP context activation ‘A’

The V.25ter ‘A’ (Answer) command may be used to accept a network request for a PDP context activation announced by the unsolicited result code RING.

The MT responds with CONNECT, enters V.25ter online data state and follows the same procedure as it would after having received a +CGANS=1 with no

<cid> value specified. It is an error to issue the ‘A’ command when there is no outstanding network request.

17.12.3 Manual rejection of a network request for PDP context activation ‘H’

The V.25ter ‘H’ or ‘H0’ (On-hook) command may be used to reject a network request for PDP context activation announced by the unsolicited result code

RING. The MT responds with OK. It is an error to issue the ‘H’ command when there is no outstanding network request.

NOTE: This is an extension to the usage of the ‘H’ command that is described in ITU-T V.25ter.

17.13 Automatic response to a network request for PDP context activation +CGAUTO

17.13.1 Description

The set command disables or enables an automatic positive response (autoanswer) to the receipt of a Request PDP Context Activation message from the network. It also provides control over the use of the V.25ter basic commands

‘S0’, ‘A and ‘H’ for handling network requests for PDP context activation. The setting does not affect the issuing of the unsolicited result code RING or

+CRING. confidential ©

Page: 376 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

The test command returns values of <n> supported by the MT as a compound value.

When the +CGAUTO=0 command is received, the MT will not perform a GPRS detach if it is attached. Subsequently, when the MT announces a network request for PDP context activation by issuing the unsolicited result code RING or +CRING, the TE may manually accept or reject the request by issuing the

+CGANS command or may simply ignore the network request.

When the +CGAUTO=1 command is received, the MT will attempt to perform a GPRS attach if it is not already attached. Failure will result in ERROR or, if enabled, +CME ERROR being returned to the TE. Subsequently, when the MT announces a network request for PDP context activation by issuing the unsolicited result code RING or +CRING to the TE, this is followed by the intermediate result code CONNECT. The MT then enters V.25ter online data state and follows the same procedure as it would after having received a

+CGANS=1 with <cid> values specified.

17.13.2 Syntax


+CGAUTO=[<n>] OK

ERROR

OK

OK


<n>:

0 turn off automatic response for GPRS only

1 turn on automatic response for GPRS only

2 modem compatibility mode, GPRS only

3 modem compatibility mode, GPRS and circuit switched calls (default)

For <n> = 0 GPRS network requests are manually accepted or rejected by the

+CGANS command.

For <n> = 1 GPRS network requests are automatically accepted according to the description above. confidential ©

Page: 377 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

For <n> = 2, automatic acceptance of GPRS network requests is controlled by the ‘S0’ command. Manual control uses the ‘A’ and ‘H’ commands, respectively, to accept and reject GPRS requests. (+CGANS may also be used.)

Incoming circuit switched calls can be neither manually nor automatically answered.

For <n> = 3, automatic acceptance of both GPRS network requests and incoming circuit switched calls is controlled by the ‘S0’ command. Manual control uses the ‘A’ and ‘H’ commands, respectively, to accept and reject GPRS requests. (+CGANS may also be used.) Circuit switched calls are handled as described elsewhere in this specification.

NOTE. In class C GPRS the modem can’t receive simultaneously GPRS and GSM incoming calls.

Example

AT+CGAUTO=?

+CGAUTO: (0-2)

OK

AT+CGAUTO?

+CGAUTO: 2

OK

AT+CGAUTO=0

OK

17.14 Manual response to a network request for PDP context activation +CGANS

17.14.1 Description

The execution command requests the MT to respond to a network request for

GPRS PDP context activation which has been signalled to the TE by the RING or +CRING: unsolicited result code. The <response> parameter allows the TE to accept or reject the request.

If <response> is 0, the request is rejected and the MT returns OK to the TE.

If <response> is 1, the following procedure is followed by the MT. confidential ©

Page: 378 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

PDP context activation procedures take place prior to or during the PDP startup.

One <cid> may be specified in order to provide the values needed for the context activation request.

During the PDP startup procedure the MT has the PDP type and the PDP address provided by the network in the Request PDP Context Activation message.

If a <cid> is given his informations must matching with the PDP type and PDP address in the network request as follows –

The PDP type must match exactly.

The PDP addresses are considered to match if they are identical or if the address in the context definition is unspecified.

If any of this information is in conflict, the command will fail.

The context is activated using the values for PDP type and PDP address provided by the network, together with the other information found in the PDP context definition. An APN may or may not be required, depending on the application.

If no <cid> is given, the MT will attempt to activate the context using the values for PDP type and PDP address provided by the network, together with any other relevant information known to the MT. The other context parameters will be set to their default values.

If the activation is successful, data transfer may proceed.

After data transfer is complete, and the layer 2 protocol termination procedure has completed successfully, the V.25ter command state is re-entered and the

MT returns the final result code OK

In the event of an erroneous termination or a failure to startup, the V.25ter command state is re-entered and the MT returns the final result code

NO CARRIER or, if enabled, +CME ERROR. Attach, activate and other errors may be reported. It is also an error to issue the +CGANS command when there is no outstanding network request.

This command may be used in both normal and modem compatibility modes. confidential ©

Page: 379 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

17.14.2 Syntax


+CGANS=[<response>, [<cid>]] OK

ERROR

+CGANS=? +CGANS: (list of supported

<response>s), (list of supported

<L2P>s)

OK


<response>: is a numeric parameter which specifies how the request should be responded to.

0 reject the request

1 accept and request that the PDP context be activated

If <response> is omitted it is assumed to be 0. Other values are reserved and will result in the ERROR response.


Example

+CRING: GPRS “IP”, “122.41.74.238”

AT+CGANS=1

CONNECT

AT+CGANS=?

+CGANS: (0-1)

OK

17.15 Show PDP address +CGPADDR

17.15.1 Description

The execution command returns a list of PDP addresses for the specified context identifiers. confidential ©

Page: 380 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

The test command returns a list of defined <cid>s

17.15.2 Syntax


+CGPADDR=[<cid> [,<cid>

[,…]]]

+CGPADDR: <cid>,<PDP_addr>

[<CR><LF>+CGPADDR: <cid>,<PDP_addr>

[...]]

OK

+CGPADDR=? +CGPADDR: (list of defined <cid>s)

OK



If no <cid> is specified, the addresses for all defined contexts are returned.

<PDP_address>: a string that identifies the MT in the address space applicable to the PDP. The address may be static or dynamic. For a static address, it will be the one set by the +CGDCONT command when the context was defined.

For a dynamic address it will be the one assigned during the last PDP context activation that used the context definition referred to by <cid>. <PDP_address> is omitted if none is available. confidential ©

Page: 381 / 478



Example

In this example 3 Cids are defined.

AT+CGPADDR=1

+CGPADDR=1,”107.210.5.4”

OK

AT+CGPADDR=?

+CGAPDDR: (1,2,4)

OK

AT+CGPADDR

+CGPADDR: 1,

+CGPADDR: 2,”10.3.73.151”

+CGPADDR: 4,

17.16 Cellular result codes +CRC

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

17.16.1 Description

This command enables a more detailed ring indication, in case of incoming call

(voice or data). Instead of the string “RING”, an extended string is used to indicate which type of call is ringing (e.g. +CRING: VOICE).

These extended indications are:

+CRING: ASYNC

+CRING: REL ASYNC

+CRING: VOICE

+CRING: FAX

+CRING: GPRS for asynchronous transparent for asynchronous non-transparent for normal speech. for fax calls

GPRS network request for PDP context activation

If the MT is unable to announce to the TE the network’s request (for example it is in V.25ter online data state) the MT rejects the request. No corresponding unsolicited result code is issued when the MT returns to a command state. confidential ©

Page: 382 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

17.16.2 Syntax

See 11.5


No parameter.

17.17 Service reporting control +CR

17.17.1 Description

This command enables a more detailed service reporting, in case of data incoming or outgoing call. Before sending the CONNECT response to the application, the GSM module will precise the type of data connection that have been established.

These report types are:

+CR: ASYNC

+CR: REL ASYNC

+CR: GPRS

For asynchronous transparent

For asynchronous non-transparent

For GPRS

17.17.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+CR

Command

AT+CR=0


AT+CR=1



No parameter.

Possible responses

OK

Note: Command valid

OK


Page: 383 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

17.18 Extended error report +CEER

17.18.1 Description

This command gives the reason of the call release when the last call setup (originating or answering) failed.

New indication for GPRS is the reason of the last unsuccessful PDP context activation and the last GPRS detach or PDP context activation.

17.18.2 Syntax

Command

ATD123456789 ;

Note: Outgoing voice call

AT+CEER

Note: Ask for reason of release

Possible responses

NO CARRIER

Note: Call setup failure

+CEER: Error <xxx>

OK

Note: <xxx>is the cause information element values form GSM recommandation 04.08 or specific Call accepted

The cause information element from GSM 04.08 is given below in § 19.4

Specific Failure Cause for +CEER for specific GPRS failure causes.

The “NO CARRIER” indicates that the AT+CEER information is available for a failure diagnostic.


No parameters.

17.19 GPRS parameters customization: +WGPRS

17.19.1 Description

This command modifies some Wavecom GPRS parameters:

• the ATTACH-STATUS (the ME does or not perform automatically a

GPRS attachment after initialisation),

• the PDP-INIT-STATUS (declare some PDP contexts liable to be activated automatically after initialization) and confidential ©

Page: 384 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

• the user-defined multislot class. This parameter represents the

GPRS class chosen by the user to perform power saving (by reducing TX (or uplink) time slots).

In addition, this command permits to

• set automatically “ACTIVABLE” some defined PDP contexts after initialization,

• set some parameters for PALM® OS software: PPP Silent Mode

(PPP waits for PPP Client to start the dialog) and Slow CONNECT

(due to the delay of the processing of PALM® OK, the CONNECT is sent one second after the dialing command request)

IMPORTANT NOTE: The WISMO module must be rebooted to activate the new setup except for <mode> 3, 5 and 6 (please refer to Defined Values paragraph). confidential ©

Page: 385 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

17.19.2 Syntax

Command syntax: AT+WGPRS=<mode>,<parameter>,[<cid>],[<class>]

Command

AT+WGPRS=?

Possible responses

+WGPRS: <mode>, <parameter1>,[<cid>]

[<CR><LF>+WGPRS: <mode>,

<parameter>,[<cid>]

[...]]

OK

AT+WGPRS?

AT+WGPRS=2,1,3 OK

Note: set ACTIVABLE to ON on PDP context 3

AT+WGPRS=4,,,8 OK

Note: choose GPRS multislot class

8

AT+WGPRS=?

Note: Request ranges of values

+WGPRS: (0-6),(0-1),(0-4),(2,8,10)

OK

Note : If class10 is activated

AT+WGPRS=?

Note: Request ranges of values

+WGPRS:<mode>(list of supported

<parameter>),[(list of supported

<cid>)][<CR><LF>+WGPRS:<mode>(list of supported <parameter>),[(list of supported

<cid>)] [...]]

OK

+WGPRS: (0-6),(0-1),(0-4),2

OK

Note : If class10 is not activated confidential ©

Page: 386 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

+WGPRS: 1,0

+WGPRS: 2,1,1

+WGPRS: 2,0,2

+WGPRS: 2,0,3

+WGPRS: 2,0,4

+WGPRS: 3,1

+WGPRS:4,8

+WGPRS:5,1

+WGPRS:6,1

OK

17.19.3 Defined Values

<mode>: a numeric parameter which specifies a Wavecom GPRS parameter.

0 ATTACH-STATUS (the ME don’t make automatically a GPRS attachment after init)

1 PDP-INIT-STATUS (declare some PDP contexts liable to be activated automatically after initialization by <mode>=2)

2 Set ACTIVABLE automatically after init a define PDP context

3 PPP silent mode

4 definition of the GPRS multislot class.

5 Slow CONNECT for PALM® OS

6 PPP Filtering

Notes:

1. If <mode>=0, 1, 3, 4, 5 or 6, <cid> and <class> values will be ignored.

2. If <mode>=0, 1, 2, 3, 5 or 6, <class> value will be ignored.

3. If <mode>=4, <parameter> and <cid> values will be ignored. WISMO module must be restarted to take the modification into account.

4. PPP Filtering is a test-purpose functionality. It avoids sending on the radio link some OS-specific frames, for accurate transfer rate measurements.

<parameter>: a numeric parameter that controls the operation defined by

<mode> if it is equal to 0, 1, 2, 3, 5 or 6. confidential ©

Page: 387 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

0 operation OFF (disabled)

1 operation ON (enabled)

<cid>: (PDP Context Identifier) a numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition. The parameter is local to the TE-MT interface and is used in other PDP context-related commands. Range of values is 0 to 4.

<class>

GPRS multislot class number. It may be lower than the maximum possible class. Possible values are 2, 8, 10. Refer to doc ref [6] for more information about GPRS multislot classes. Note that the range of values is also WISMOmodule-dependant.

Multislot class

Maximum number of slots

Minimum number of slots Type of MS

T tb

T ra

T rb

2 2 1 3 3 2 3 1 1

8 4 1 5 3 1 2 1 1

10 4 2 5 3 1 2 1 1

NB: Type 1 MS are not required to transmit and receive at the same time.

Remark

When the module is set in “CG” class, the ME always make automatically a

GPRS attachment after init, so AT+WGPRS? always give +WGPRS: 0,0 for the parameter 0. confidential ©

Page: 388 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

17.20 Full AT GPRS commands examples

17.20.1 Activation of an IP PDP context

Example 1:

AT +CGDCONT=1, “IP”, “internet”; +GCDCONT=2, “IP”, “abc.com”

OK

ATD*99***1#

CONNECT

Example 2:

AT +CGCLASS=”CG”

OK

+CGREG: 1

AT +CGDCONT=1, “IP”, “internet”

OK

AT +CGQREQ=1,1,4,5,2,14

OK

AT +CGQMIN=1,1,4,5,2,14

OK

AT +CGATT=1

OK

AT +CGACT=1,1

OK

Remark about +CGDATA: the goal of this command is the same than

ATD*99***

AT +CGDATA=1

CONNECT

…….

Data transfer

…….

+CGEV: NW DETACH confidential ©

Page: 389 / 478



17.20.2 Network request

AT+CGAUTO=0

OK

+CRING: GPRS “IP”, “211.45.89.152”

AT+CGANS=1

CONNECT

…….

Data transfer

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008


Page: 390 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

18 Other AT commands

18.1 V.25 ter recommendation

The commands not listed in this document are not supported. For these commands, the product will then answer with “ERROR”.

All modulation control, error control and data compression commands are not recognized. An “ERROR” string will be returned.

18.2 GSM 07.05 recommendation

All the 07.05 commands not described in this manual are not implemented.

The product will then answer “ERROR” to these commands.

18.3 GSM 07.07 recommendation

All the 07.07 commands not described in this manual are not implemented.

The product will then answer “ERROR” to these commands. confidential ©

Page: 391 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

19 Appendixes

19.1 ME error result code: +CME ERROR: <error>

24

26

27

30

<error>

Meaning

3 Operation not allowed

11

12

13

4

5

10

17

21

32


PH-SIM PIN required (SIM lock)

SIM not inserted

SIM PIN required

SIM PUK required

SIM failure

Resulting from the following commands

All GSM 07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 3)







+CACM, +CAMM, +CPUC, +CLCK, +CPWD, +CPIN,

+CPIN2 (+CME ERROR: 16)

+CPBW (FDN), +CLCK (FDN), SIM PIN2 required

Invalid index

+CACM, +CAMM, +CPUC, +CPBW (FDN), +CPIN,

+CPIN2, +CLCK (FDN), +CPWD

+CPBW

+CPBR, +CPBW, ATD>[mem]index, +WMGO

+CPBF, +CPBP, +CPBN, +CGSN, +WOPN,

ATD>[mem]”name”

+CPBW, +CPIN, +CPIN2, +CLCK, +CPWD, +WCCS Text string too long

Dial string too long

Invalid characters in dial string

+CPBW, ATD, +CCFC

+CPBW

No network service +VTS, +COPS=?, +CLCK, +CCFC, +CCWA, +CUSD

Network not allowed – emergency calls only

+COPS confidential ©

Page: 392 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

<error>

Meaning

40

103

106

107

111


Network personalization PIN required (Network lock)


Incorrect MS identity.

ME is not blacklisted by the network.

+CGATT

+CGATT

MS is not allowed to operate in

GPRS.

+CGATT

MS is not allowed to operate in the requested PLMN.

+CGATT

112

113

132

133

134

148

149

150

MS is not allowed to make location updating in this area.

+CGATT

Roaming in this location area is not allowed.

+CGATT service option not supported (#32) +CGACT +CGDATA ATD*99 requested service option not subscribed (#33)

+CGACT +CGDATA ATD*99 service option temporarily out of order (#34) unspecified GPRS error

PDP authentication failure invalid mobile class

+CGACT +CGDATA ATD*99

All GPRS commands

+CGACT +CGDATA ATD*99

+CGCLASS +CGATT confidential ©

Page: 393 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

19.2 Message service failure result code: +CMS ERROR:

<er>

<er> is defined as below:

312

313

316

317

318

321

<er>

Meaning


1 to 127 Error cause values from the GSM recommendation 04.11 Annex E-

2

+CMGS, +CMSS

301

302

303

304

305

310

311

SMS service of ME reserved

Operation not allowed


Invalid PDU mode parameter

Invalid text mode parameter

SIM not inserted

SIM PIN required

+CSMS (with +CMS: ERROR 301)

All SMS commands (+CMSS, +CMGL, +CPMS,

+CSMP…

All SMS commands

+CMGS, +CMGW

+CMGS, +CMGW, +CMSS

All SMS commands

All SMS commands

330

PH-SIM PIN required

SIM failure

SIM PUK required

SIM PIN2 required

SIM PUK2 required

Invalid memory index

SC address unknown

+CNMA expected

All SMS commands

All SMS commands

All SMS commands

All SMS commands

All SMS commands

+CMGR, +CMSS, +CMGD

+CMGW

+CSCA?, +CMSS, +CMGS

+CNMA confidential ©

Page: 394 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

19.3 Specific error result codes

<error> Meaning

500 unknown error.


All commands

512

513

514

515

MM establishment failure (for

SMS).

Lower layer failure (for SMS)

CP error (for SMS).

Please wait, init or command processing in progress.

+CMGS, +CMSS (+CMS ERROR: 512)



All commands (“+CME ERROR: 515” or “+CMS ERROR:

515”) except ATH0, ATH1, AT+WIOR, AT+WIOW,

AT+CFUN=1, AT+CLCC, AT+WAC, AT+CPAS,

AT+VGR, AT+VTS, AT+SPEAKER.

+STGI 517 SIM Toolkit facility not supported.

518

519

520

526

527

528

SIM Toolkit indication not received.

Reset the product to activate or change a new echo cancellation algo.

Automatic abort about get plmn list for an incoming call.

PIN deactivation forbidden with this SIM card.

Please wait, RR or MM is busy.

Retry your selection later.

Location update failure.

Emergency calls only.

+STGI

+ECHO, +VIP

+COPS=?

+CLCK

+COPS

+COPS selection

Emergency calls only.

531 SMS not sent: the <da> is not in

FDN phonebook, and FDN lock is enabled. (for SMS)

+COPS


532

533 the embedded application is activated so the objects flash are not erased

Missing or Unknown APN

+WOPEN

ATD*99 +GACT +CGDATA

+CMGR confidential ©

Page: 395 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

19.4 Failure Cause from GSM 04.08 recommendation

(+CEER)

Cause value

3

Diagnostic

No route to destination

8

16

18

19

Operator determined barring

Normal call clearing

No user responding

User alerting, no answer

26

27

28

30

34

38

58

63

65

68

69

70

42

43

44

47

49

50

55

57

79

81

87

Non selected user clearing

Destination out of order

Invalid number format (incomplete number)

Response to STATUS ENQUIRY

No circuit/channel available

Network out of order

Switching equipment congestion

Access information discarded

Requested circuit/channel not available

Resources unavailable, unspecified

Quality of service unavailable

Requested facility not subscribed

Incoming calls barred with in the CUG

Bearer capability not authorized

Bearer capability not presently available

Service or option not available, unspecified

Bearer service not implemented

ACM equal to or greater than ACMmax

Requested facility not implemented

Only restricted digital information bearer capability is available

Service or option not implemented, unspecified

Invalid transaction identifier value

User not member of CUG

91

95

96

97

98

99

100

101

Invalid transit network selection

Semantically incorrect message

Invalid mandatory information

Message type non-existent or not implemented

Message type not compatible with protocol state

Information element non-existent or not implemented

Conditional IE error

Message not compatible with protocol state confidential ©

Page: 396 / 478



Cause value

102

111

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Diagnostic

Recovery on timer expiry

Protocol error, unspecified

MS requested detach

NWK requested Detach

Unsuccessful attach cause NO SERVICE

Unsuccessful attach cause NO ACCESS

Unsuccessful attach cause GPRS SERVICE REFUSED

PDP Deactivation requested by NWK

PDP Deactivation because LLC link activation Failed

PDP Deactivation cause NWK reactivation with same TI

PDP Deactivation cause GMM abort

PDP Deactivation cause LLC or SNDCP failure

PDP Unsuccessful activation cause GMM error

PDP Unsuccessful activation cause NWK reject

PDP Unsuccessful activation cause NO NSAPI available

PDP Unsuccessful activation cause SM refuse

PDP Unsuccessful activation cause MMI ignore

PDP unsuccessful activation cause Nb Max Session Reach

All other values in the range will be treated as cause

[0,31] 31

[32,47] 47

[48,63] 63

[64,79] 79

[80,95] 95

[96,111] 111

[112,127] 127

19.5 Specific Failure Cause for +CEER

Cause value

240

241

252

253

Diagnostic

FDN is active and number is not in FDN

Call operation not allowed

Call barring on outgoing calls

Call barring on incoming calls

255 Lower layer failure confidential ©

Page: 397 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

19.6 GSM 04.11 Annex E-2: Mobile originating SMtransfer

These error causes could appear for SMS commands (+CMGS, +CMSS,

+CMGD…)

Cause no 1: “Unassigned (unallocated) number”

This cause indicates that the destination requested by the Mobile Station cannot be reached because, although the number is in a valid format, it is not currently assigned (allocated).

Cause no 8: “Operator determined barring”

This cause indicates that the MS has tried to send a mobile originating short message when the MS’s network operator or service provider has forbidden such transactions.

Cause no 10: “Call barred”

This cause indicates that the outgoing call barred service applies to the short message service for the called destination.

Cause no 21: “Short message transfer rejected”

This cause indicates that the equipment sending this cause does not wish to accept this short message, although it could have accepted the short message since the equipment sending this cause is neither busy nor incompatible.

Cause no 27: “Destination out of service”

This cause indicates that the destination indicated by the Mobile Station cannot be reached because the interface to the destination is not functioning correctly. The term “not functioning correctly” indicates that a signaling message was unable to be delivered to the remote user; e.g., a physical layer or data link layer failure at the remote user, user equipment off-line, etc.

Cause no 28: “Unidentified subscriber”

This cause indicates that the subscriber is not registered in the PLMN

(e.g.. IMSI not known)

Cause no 29: “Facility rejected”

This cause indicates that the facility requested by the Mobile Station is not supported by the PLMN.

Cause no 30: “Unknown subscriber”

This cause indicates that the subscriber is not registered in the HLR (e.g..

IMSI or directory number is not allocated to a subscriber).

Cause no 38: “Network out of order”

This cause indicates that the network is not functioning correctly and that the condition is likely to last a relatively long period of time; e.g., confidential ©

Page: 398 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005 immediately reattempting the short message transfer is not likely to be successful.

Cause no 41: “Temporary failure”

This cause indicates that the network is not functioning correctly and that the condition is not likely to last a long period of time; e.g., the Mobile

Station may wish to try another short message transfer attempt almost immediately.

Cause no 42: “Congestion”

This cause indicates that the short message service cannot be serviced because of high traffic.

Cause no 47: “Resources unavailable, unspecified”

This cause is used to report a resource unavailable event only when no other cause applies.

Cause no 50: “Requested facility not subscribed”

This cause indicates that the requested short message service could not be provided by the network because the user has not completed the necessary administrative arrangments with its supporting networks.

Cause no 69: “Requested facility not implemented”

This cause indicates that the network is unable to provide the requested short message service.

Cause no 81: “Invalid short message transfer reference value”

This cause indicates that the equipment sending this cause has received a message with a short message reference which is not currently in use on the MS-network interface.

Cause no 95: “Invalid message, unspecified”

This cause is used to report an invalid message event only when no other cause in the invalid message class applies.

Cause no 96: “Invalid mandatory information”

This cause indicates that the equipment sending this cause has received a message where a mandatory information element is missing and/or has a content error (the two cases are undistinguishable).

Cause no 97: “Message type non-existent or not implemented”

This cause indicates that the equipment sending this cause has received a message with a message type it does not recognize either because this is a message not defined or defined but not implemented by the equipment sending this cause.

Cause no 98: “Message not compatible with short message protocol state”

This cause indicates that the equipment sending this cause has received a message such that the procedures do not indicate that this is a permissible message to receive while in the short message transfer state. confidential ©

Page: 399 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Cause no 99: “Information element non-existent or not implemented”

This cause indicates that the equipment sending this cause has received a message which includes unrecognized information elements because the information element identifier is not defined or it is defined but not implemented by the equipment sending the cause.

However, the information element is not required to be present in the message so that the equipment sends the cause to process the message.

Cause no 111: “Protocol error, unspecified”

This cause is used to report a protocol error event only when no other cause applies.

Cause no 127: “Interworking, unspecified”

This cause indicates that there has been interworking with a network which does not provide causes for actions it takes; thus, the precise cause for a message which is being sent cannot be ascertained.

All values other than specified should be treated as error Cause No 41

19.7 Unsolicited result codes

Verbose result code Numeric (V0 set) Description

+CALA: < time string>,<index> As verbose

+CBM: <length><pdu> (PDU) or

+CBM:<sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<page>,< pages>… (Text mode)

+CBMI: “BM”,<index> As verbose

+CCCM: <ccm>

+CCED: <values>

Alarm notification

Cell Broadcast Message directly displayed

Cell Broadcast Message stored in mem at location <index>

As verbose

As

(specific)

Current Call Meter value verbose Cell Environment Description indication

Call Waiting number

[,<alpha>]

+CDS: <fo>, <mr>… (text mode) or +CDS: <length>,… (PDU)

As verbose SMS status report after sending a SMS

Incoming SMS Status Report after sending a SMS, stored in <mem>

(“SR”) at location <index>

+CKEV: <keynb>

[,,,<alpha>]

+CMT: <oa>… (text mode) or +CMT: [<alpha>,]… (PDU)

+CMTI: <mem>,<index>

As verbose

+CLIP: <number>, <type>

As verbose as verbose

Key press or release

Incoming Call Presentation

Incoming message directly displayed

Incoming message stored in <mem>

(“SM”) at location <index> confidential ©

Page: 400 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Verbose result code Numeric (V0 set) Description

+CREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]

+CRING: <type>

+CSQ: <RxLev>,99

As verbose

As verbose

As verbose

+CSSU: <code2>[<number>,<type>] As verbose

+STIN: <ind> As

(specific)

+WIND: <IndicationNb> [,<CallId>] As

(specific)

Network registration indication

Incoming call type (VOICE, FAX ...)

Automatic RxLev indication with

AT+CCED=1,8 command

Supplementary service notification during a call verbose SIM Toolkit Indication

Specific unsolicited indication (SIM

Insert/Remove, End of init, Reset,

Alerting, Call creation/release)

+WVMI: <LineId>,<Status>

+WDCI: <LineId>,<Status>

RING

As

(specific)

As

(specific)

2 verbose verbose

Voice Mail Indicator notification (cf.

+CPHS command)

Diverted call indicator

Incoming call signal from network

+WBCI As

(specific)

Battery charge indication

+CUSD

(specific)

Indicator event reporting

As Verbose Unstructured supplementary service data

19.8 Final result codes

Verbose result code

+CME ERROR: <err>

+CMS ERROR: <err>

BUSY

ERROR

NO ANSWER

NO CARRIER

OK

Numeric (V0 set)

4

8

3

0

As verbose

As verbose

7

RING 2

Description

Error from GSM 07.05 commands

Error from SMS commands (07.07)

Busy signal detected

Command not accepted

Connection completion timeout

Connection terminated

Acknowledges correct execution of a command line

Incoming call signal from network confidential ©

Page: 401 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

19.9 Intermediate result codes

Verbose result code

+COLP:<number>,<type>

+CR: <type>

+ILRR: <rate>

CONNECT 300

CONNECT 1200

CONNECT 1200/75

CONNECT 2400

CONNECT 4800

CONNECT 9600

CONNECT 14400

+CSSI: <code1>[,<index>]

Numeric (V0 set)

11

12

13

14 as verbose as verbose as verbose

10

15

16

As verbose

Description

Outgoing Call Presentation

Outgoing Call report control

Local TA-TE data rate

Data connection at 300 bauds


Data connection at 1200/75 bauds





Supplementary service notification during a call setup

Command

Parameters storage mode

AT&W

(E2P)

Command

(E2P)

AT+CSAS

(SIM, E2P)

AT&F

(SIM, E2P)

General commands

+CMEE X

+CRSL

+CSCS X

+WPCS X

Default values confidential ©

Page: 402 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Command


AT&W

(E2P)

Command

(E2P)

AT+CSAS

(SIM, E2P)

AT&F

(SIM, E2P)

Call Control commands

Default values

ATS0 X

+CICB X

+CSNS X

+ECHO X

X 0 (no auto-answer)

X For Wismo 2 and 3

,1,0,3,10,7 (Algo ID 1)

,3,30,8000,256 (Algo ID 3)

For Wismo 5:

,3,30,8000,256 (Algo ID 3)

+SIDET X

+SPEAKER X

+VGR X

+VGT X

Network Service commands

X 0 (Spk 1 & Mic 1)

64 (speaker 1)

32 (speaker 2)

X 64 (mic 1 & ctrl 1)

0 (others)

Phonebook commands confidential ©

Page: 403 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Command

SMS commands


AT&W

(E2P)

Command

(E2P)

AT+CSAS

(SIM, E2P)

AT&F

(SIM, E2P)

+CNMI

+CMGF X

+CSCA

+CSDH X

+CSMP

X

Default values

SIM dependant (phase 2)

0

+CMMS

Supplementary Services commands

0

0,0,0

+CLIP X

+COLP X

+CSSN X

Data commands

%C X

\N X

+CBST X

+CR X

+CRC X

+CRLP X

+DOPT X

+DS X

+DR X

+ILRR X confidential ©

Page: 404 / 478



Command

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005


AT&W

(E2P)

Command

(E2P)

AT+CSAS

(SIM, E2P)

AT&F

(SIM, E2P)

Default values

Fax Class 2 commands

+FBOR X

+FCQ X

+FCR X

+FDCC,+FDIS X

V24 – V25 commands

&C X

&D X

&S X

E X

Q X

V X

+ICF X

+IFC X

+IPR X

+WMUX X

1

2

1

1

3,4

2,2

115200 confidential ©

Page: 405 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Specific commands

+ADC

+CMER X

+CPHS

2,0 for MBN

+WBCM X X

+WBHV X X

1,0

+WBM X 0,0 for SPI bus

0,4 for I2C Soft bus

+WCDM X X

+WDR X 0,1 for P51xx and Q31xx

2,1 (according to voice

CODEC capabilities) for

Q24xx

+WIND

+WIOM X 1023,0 (for Q2xxx and

P3xxx)

0,0 (for Q31 and P51 modules)

+WRIM

+WRIM

+WSVG X X

5,0 confidential ©

Page: 406 / 478



Command

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005


AT&W

(E2P)

Command

(E2P)

AT+CSAS

(SIM, E2P)

AT&F

(SIM, E2P)

Default values

SIM Toolkit commands

0,”1F6BFFFF1F”,3,0

GPRS commands

+CGAUTO X X 3

+CGDCONT x

+CGREG X

X

0

1,0

3,0

5,0

6,0

19.11 GSM sequences list

In accordance with GSM 02.30, the product supports the following GSM sequences, which can be used through the ATD and the +CKPD commands.

19.11.1 Security

**04*OLDPIN*NEWPIN*NEWPIN#

**042*OLDPIN2*NEWPIN2*NEWPIN2#

**05*PUK*NEWPIN*NEWPIN#

**052*PUK2*NEWPIN2*NEWPIN2#

*#06#

Change PIN code

Change PIN2 code

Unlock PIN code

Unlock PIN2 code

Show the IMEI number confidential ©

Page: 407 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

19.11.2 Call forwarding

*SC# or

*SC**BS#

**SC*PhoneNumber# or

**SC*PhoneNumber*BS# or

**SC*PhoneNumber*[BS]*T# or

*SC*PhoneNumber# or

*SC*PhoneNumber*BS# or

*SC*PhoneNumber*[BS]*T#

*#SC# or *#SC**BS#

#SC# or

#SC**BS#

Activate

Register and activate

Check status

Deactivate

##SC# or ##SC**BS#

The Service codes (SC) are:

002 all call forwarding

004 all conditional call forwarding

21

61

62 call forwarding unconditional call forwarding on no answer call forwarding on not reachable

Unregistered and deactivate

67 call busy confidential ©

Page: 408 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

The Network service codes (BS) are:

No code

10

All tele and bearer services

All teleservices

11

12

Telephony

All data teleservices

13

16

17

18

Fax services

Short Message Services

Voice Group Call Service

Voice Broadcast Service

19

20

21

22

24

25

All teleservices except SMS

All bearer services

All asynchronous services

All synchronous services

All data circuit synchronous

All data circuit asynchronous

The no reply condition timer (T), is only used for SC = 002, 004 or 61.

19.11.3 Call barring

*SC*Password# or *SC*Password*BS#

*#SC# or *#SC**BS#

Activate

Check status

#SC*Password# or #SC*Password*BS# Deactivate

**03*330*OLDPWD*NEWPWD*NEWPWD# Change password for call barring

**03**OLDPWD*NEWPWD*NEWPWD#

*03*330*OLDPWD*NEWPWD*NEWPWD#

*03**OLDPWD*NEWPWD*NEWPWD# confidential ©

Page: 409 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

The Service codes (SC) are the followings:

33 call barring of outgoing call

330 all barring service (only for deactivation)

331

332 call barring of outgoing international call call barring of outgoing international calls except to HPLMN

333

35

351

353 all outgoing barring service (only for deactivation) call barring of incoming calls call barring of incoming calls if roaming all incoming barring service (only for deactivation)

The Network service codes (BS) are the same as these of the call forwarding sequences.

19.11.4 Call waiting

*43*BS#

*#43*BS#

#43*BS#

19.11.5 Number presentation

*#30#

*#31#

*31#PhoneNumber

#31#PhoneNumber

*#76#

Activate

Check status

Deactivate

CLIP check status

CLIR check status

Suppress CLIR for a voice call

Invoke CLIR for a voice call

COLP check status confidential ©

Page: 410 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

19.12 Operator names

This list is extracted from the SE.13 (May 11th 2004 edition) and

NAPRD10.2.6.2 documents. Country initials may vary for the same MCC

(Mobile Country Code), without any impact.

Country

Initials

MCC MNC Preferred Presentation of Country

Initials and Mobile Network Name

GRC 202 1 COSMOTE

Abbreviated Mobile

Network Name

C-OTE

GRC 202 5 vodafone GR

GRC 202 9 Q-TELECOM

GRC 202 10 GR

NLD

NLD

NLD

204

204

204

4

8

12 vodafone NL

NL KPN

NL Telfort voda GR

Q-TELCOM

TIM voda NL

NL KPN

NL Tlfrt

FRA

ESP

HUN

208

214

216

20 F - BOUYGUES TELECOM

1 vodafone ES

1 H PANNON GSM

Orange

PROXI mobi*

BASE

Orange

Orange

SFR

BYTEL

M-AND voda ES

AMENA

MSTAR

PANNON

HUN 216 70 vodafone HU voda HU

ERONET

MOBI'S

GSMBIH

HTmobile

VIP

MOBTEL SCG 220 1 MOBTEL confidential ©

Page: 411 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Country

Initials



Abbreviated Mobile

Network Name

ProMonte

ITA

ITA

ITA

222

222

222

10

88

99 vodafone IT

I WIND

3 ITA

ROU 226 1 CONNEX

ROU 226 3 Cosmorom

SCGTS

MONET

TIM voda IT

I WIND

3 ITA

CONNEX

Cosmorom

ORANGE

SWISS sunrise

ORANGE

CZE

AUT

AUT

GBR

GBR

GBR

230

232

232

234

234

234

2 EUROTEL - CZ

3 T-Mobile A

10 3 AT

10 O2 - UK

15 vodafone UK

20 3 UK

ET - CZ

OSKAR

Orange

ET-SK

A1

TMO A one telering

3 AT

O2 -UK voda UK

3 UK

GBR

GBR

234

234

50 JT GSM

55 Cable & Wireless Guernsey

DNK 238 1 TDC MOBIL

DNK 238 2 SONOFON

DNK 238 6 3 DK

Orange

JT GSM

C&W

Pronto

DK TDC

SONO

3 DK confidential ©

Page: 412 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Country

Initials

SWE

SWE

NOR

FIN

LVA

EST

RUS

MCC

240

240

242

244

247

248

250

MNC Preferred Presentation of Country


Abbreviated Mobile

Network Name

TELIA

2

8

2

1

1

3 SE vodafone SE

N NetCom GSM

14 FI AMT

LV LMT GSM

EE EMT GSM

12 RF FAR EAST

Orange

TELIA

3 SE

SWE

Sweden3G

IQ voda SE

Spring

TELENOR

N COM

FINNET elisa

FINNET

FI AMT

SONERA

OMT

BITE

TELE2

LMT GSM

TELE2

EMT

RLE

TELE2

MTS

MegaFon

RUS_SCN

SCS

SMARTS

DTC

ORENSOT

RF FEast

KUGSM

Di-ex

SMARTS

NTC confidential ©

Page: 413 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Country

Initials

RUS

RUS

MCC

250

250



Abbreviated Mobile

Network Name

ERMAK

28 Bee Line

44 RUS North Caucasian GSM

RUS 250 99 Bee Line

UKR 255 1 UMC

BASHCELL

MOTIV

Bee Line

RUS39

NC-GSM

Primtel

Bee Line

UMC

WellCOM

UA-KS

GT

VELCOM

MTS

VOXTEL

MDCELL

PLUS

Era

IDEA

DEU

PRT

IRL

IRL

IRL

262

268

272

272

272

7

1

1

2

3 o2 - de vodafone P vodafone IE

02 - IRL

IRL - METEOR

E-Plus o2 - de

GIBTEL voda P

OPTIM

TMN

LUXGSM

TANGO

VOX.LU voda IE

02 -IRL

METEOR

SIMINN

Vodafone

Vodafone confidential ©

Page: 414 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Country

Initials

ALB

ALB

MLT

MCC

276

276

278

290

293

293

310



Abbreviated Mobile

Network Name

Viking

1

2

1

CYP 280 1 CYTAGSM

ARM

BGR 284 5 GLOBUL

GRL

SVN

SVN

CAN

USA

USA

283

302

310

4

AMC - AL vodafone AL vodafone MT

RA 04

1 TELE Greenland

40 SI vodafone

70 SI VEGA 070

720 Rogers AT&T Wireless

20 Union Telephone

40 Cellular One

A M C voda AL voda MT gomobile

CY-GSM areeba

GCELL

MAGTI

ARMMO1

RA 04

M-TEL

GLOBUL

TCELL

TELSIM

ARIA

AYCELL

FT-GSM

KALL

TELE GRL

SI voda

SI-GSM

VEGA 070

MOBI-M

COSMOFON

FLGSM

OFL

FL1

TANGO

Fido

ROGERS

Union Tel

TMO

Centennial

TMO

Cellular One confidential ©

Page: 415 / 478



Country

Initials

MCC

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005



Abbreviated Mobile

Network Name

USA

USA

USA

USA

310

310

310

310

180 West Central Wireless

190 Alaska Wireless

320 USA - CellularOne

420 Cincinnati Bell Wireless

USA 310 460 ONELINK

USA 310 500 Wireless

USA 310 530 West Virginia Wireless

USA 310 560 Cellular One DCS

USA 310 590 USA - Extended Area

USA 310 610 Touch

Highland

Corr

Plateau

Cingular

T-Mobile

Cingular

West Central

Alaska Wireless

T-Mobile

T-Mobile

T-Mobile

T-Mobile

T-Mobile

T-Mobile

T-Mobile

T-Mobile

T-Mobile

FARMERS

Cell

WestLink

Carolina

AT&T

Yorkville

Cingular

CBW

Viaero

ONELINK

SunCom

PSC

WVW

Cell One

T-Mobile

ROAMING

EpicTouch

AmeriLink confidential ©

Page: 416 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Country

Initials

USA

USA

MCC

310

310



Abbreviated Mobile

Network Name

Einstein

670 Wireless 2000 PCS

950 USA XIT Cellular

USA 311 110 Plains

USA 332 11 Blue Sky

MEX 334 3 GSM

T-Mobile

W 2000 PCS

NPI

IMMIX

Telemetrix

PTSI

IWS

AirLink

Pinpoint

T-Mobile

PACE

ACSIAC

FCSI

DCT

XIT

AT&T

WILKES

WILKES

WILKES

Indigo

EASTER

PINECell

HPW

Sprocket

EMW

PetroCom

C1ECI

Blue Sky

MOVISTAR

TELCEL

DIGICEL

C&W

Orange

AMIGO

BOUYG-C confidential ©

Page: 417 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Country

Initials

VGB 348 570 Boatphone

ANT

ANT

AZE

MCC

362

362

400



Abbreviated Mobile

Network Name

Digicel

69 ANT CURACAO TELECOM GSM

91 UTS Wireless Curacao N.V.

1 AZE - AZERCELL GSM

C&W

AT&T

APUA-PCS

C&W

AT&T

C&W

CCTBVI

MOBILITY

AT&T

AT&T

DIGICEL

C&W

TWTCGN

C&W

C&W

AT&T

C&W

AT&T

C&W

Telcell

CT GSM

UTS

SETARGSM

BaTelCel

C&W

AT&T

C&W

C_COM

ORANGE

TSTT

C&W

ACELL

BKCELL

K-MOBILE

KCELL confidential ©

Page: 418 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Country

Initials

IND

IND

IND

IND

MCC

404

404

404

404



Abbreviated Mobile

Network Name

B-Mobile

21 BPL MOBILE

27 BPL MOBILE

43 BPL MOBILE

46 BPL MOBILE

Hutch

AirTel

AirTel

IDEA

Hutch

IDEA

AirTel

Hutch

ESCOTEL

Hutch

SPICE

Hutch

ESCOTEL

Orange

BPL MOBILE

IDEA

IDEA

BPL MOBILE

Hutch

AirTel

CellOne

CellOne

AIRTEL

RPG

AIRCEL

BPL MOB

SPICE

AirTel

BPL MOB

AirTel

CellOne

CellOne

CellOne

CellOne

ESCOTEL confidential ©

Page: 419 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Country

Initials

PAK

MCC

410



Abbreviated Mobile

Network Name

CellOne

4 PAK - PL

Hutch

AirTel

AirTel

AirTel

AirTel

AirTel

AirTel

AirTel

AirTel

PMCL

UFONE

PAKTEL

AWCC

CellOne

CellOne

Hutch

CellOne

CellOne

CellOne

DOLPHIN

DOLPHIN

Oasis

CellOne

CellOne

CellOne

CellOne

CellOne

CellOne

CellOne

IDEA

CellOne

CellOne

CellOne

Hutch

Hutch confidential ©

Page: 420 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Country

Initials

AFG

SRI 413 2 DIALOG

SRI 413 3 SRI - CELLTEL

SYR

SYR

KWT 419 2 MTCNet

KWT 419 3 WATANIYA

BHR

MCC

412

417

417

426



Abbreviated Mobile

Network Name

20 AF TDCA TDCA

2

9

2

94 SYRIA

SYR MOBILE SYR

MTC VODAFONE BH

MNG 428 99 MobiCom

MOBITEL

DIALOG

CELLTEL

MPTGSM

CLLIS

LibCL

FSTLNK

MobCom

SYRIATEL

94 SYRIA

MOBILE

ASIACELL

SanaTel

ASIACELL

SanaTel

ATHEER

IRAQNA

MTC

WATANIYA

KSA

SABAFON

SPACETEL

OMAN

ETSLT

ORANGE

Cellcom

JAWWAL

BATELCO

MTC-VFBH

Q-NET

MobiCom

KIFZO

MTCE

UZMGSM confidential ©

Page: 421 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Country

Initials

TJK

JPN 440 20 Vodafone JP

KOR 450 2 KTF

KOR 450 8 KTF

VNM 452 1 MOBIFONE

VNM 452 2 VINAPHONE

VNM 452 4 VNM and VIETTEL

HKG 454 4 ORANGE

HKG

MCC

436

454



Abbreviated Mobile

Network Name

DW-GSM

TJK 436 3 MLT

5 TJT - Tajik Tel

10 HK NEW WORLD

COSCOM

UZDGSM

Somoncom

INDIGO

MLT

Babilon

TajikTel

BITEL

DoCoMo

Voda JP

KTF

KTF

VMS

GPC

VIETTEL

CSL

3

ORANGE

SmarTone

NWPCS

PEOPLES

MAC

KHM

LAO

CHN

455

456

457

460

3

18 CAMBODIA SHINAWATRA

1 LAO GSM

0

Hutchison MAC

CHINA MOBILE

SUNDAY

SmarTone

CTMGSM

HT Macau

MT-KHM

KHM-SM

CAMSHIN

LAO GSM

ETLMNW

LATMOBIL

TANGO

CMCC

CU-GSM confidential ©

Page: 422 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Country

Initials



TWN 466 1 EasTone

Abbreviated Mobile

Network Name

FET

TWN 466 6 TWN Tuntex GSM 1800

TWN 466 93 TWN MOBITAI

PRK 467 3 SUN

BGD 470 3 ShebaWorld

MDV 472 1 DHIMOBILE

MYS 502 12 MY MAXIS

AUS

AUS

IDN 510 1 INDOSAT

IDN

IDN

PHL

THA

505

505

510

510

515

520

3

6 vodafone AU

3 AUS

11 IND - Excelcom

21 IND INDOSAT

5

1

PH Sun Cellular

TH GSM

TUNTEX

ACeS

KGT

T3G

CHT

TW MOB

TCC

TransAsi

SUNNET

GP

AKTEL

SHEBA

D-MOBILE

MY MAXIS

DiGi

CELCOM

Telstra

Optus voda AU

3 AUS

ACeS

INDOSAT

LIPPOTEL

T-SEL proXL

INDOSAT

TT

ISLACOM

GLOBE

SMART

SUN

ACeS

TH GSM

ACT-1900

DTAC confidential ©

Page: 423 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Country

Initials

THA

NZL

AS

COK 548 1 KOKANET

EGY

DZA

MCC

520

530

544

602

603



Abbreviated Mobile

Network Name

ACeS

23 TH GSM 1800

1

11 Blue Sky

2

1 vodafone NZ vodafone EG

ALGERIAN MOBILE NETWORK

SEN 608 1 ALIZE

MRT 609 1 MATTEL

GIN 611 2 LAGUI

GSM 1800

Orange

SingTel

SingTel

M1-3GSM

STARHUB voda NZ

BMobile

U-CALL

SMILE

VODAFONE

Blue Sky

KI-FRIG

MOBNCL

VINI

KOKANET

FSMTC

MobiNiL voda EG

AMN

Djezzy

WTA

MEDITEL

IAM

TUNTEL

TUNSIANA

GAMCEL

AFRICELL

ALIZE

SENTEL

MATTEL

MAURITEL

MALITEL

IKATEL

LAGUI confidential ©

Page: 424 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Country

Initials

BEN

MCC

616



Abbreviated Mobile

Network Name

Orange

NER 614 2 CELTEL

NER 614 3 TELECEL

4 BELL BENIN COMMUNICATION

TELCEL celtel

NECELTEL

TELECEL

TGCELL

TLCL-BEN

BENCELL

BBCOM

GHA 620 1 SPACEFON

GHA 620 2 ONEtouch

NGA 621 20 ECONET NG

EMTEL

LoneStar

LIBERCEL

CELTEL

MILLICOM

SPACE

ONEtouch mobitel

ECONET

MTN-NG

Mtel glo

CELTEL

LIBERTIS

62401

Orange

CMOVEL

CSTmovel

GETESA

LIBERTIS

TELECEL

CELTEL

CELTEL

LIBERTIS

VODACOM

CELTEL confidential ©

Page: 425 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Country

Initials

UGA 641 1 CelTel

ZMB 645 1 CELTEL

REU

FRA

MWI

MCC

647

647

650



Abbreviated Mobile

Network Name

CELLCO

SEZ 633 10 AIRTEL

0

10 SFR REUNION

1

Orange re

MW CP 900

OASIS

UNITEL

633-01

AIRTEL

MobiTel

RCELL

ET-MTN

TELESOM telsom

EVATIS

SAF-COM

YES!

MOBITEL

ZANTEL

VodaCom celtel

CELTEL

MTN-UG mango

SPACETEL

SAFARIS mCel

VodaCom

CELTEL

TELECEL

Madacom

ANTARIS

Orange

OMT

SFR RU

NETONE

TELECEL

ECONET

MTCNAM

CP 900 confidential ©

Page: 426 / 478



Country

Initials

MCC

ZAF

CRI

655

712

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005



Abbreviated Mobile

Network Name

CELTEL

7

1

Cell C

I.C.E.

VCLCOM

EZI-CEL

MASCOM

Orange

SwaziMTN

HURI

VODA

Cell C

MTN

BTL

INTELCO

COMCEL

MoviStar

PERSONAL

DIGICEL

TM

MoviStar

PERSONAL

HNDMGT

CELTEL

ENITEL

SERCOM

I.C.E.

PANCW

TIM

UNIFON

ARG 722 310 ARG CTI Movil

P-HABLE

CTIMovil

TIM

TIM

TIM

Claro

SCTL

BrTCel confidential ©

Page: 427 / 478



Country

Initials

MCC

CHL 730

CHL

COL

COL

VEN

730

732

732

734

901

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005



Abbreviated Mobile

Network Name

Oi

1 ENTEL PCS

10 ENTEL PCS

101 COLOMBIA - COMCEL S.A

111 COL MOVIL

2

5

DIGITEL TIM

Thuraya

ENTEL PCS

TMOVIL

ENTEL PCS

COMCEL

COL MOVIL

INFONT

DIGITEL

VIVA

BOMOV

TWTGUY

PORTAGSM

VOX

Porth

Telecel

TeleG

Thuraya confidential ©

Page: 428 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

19.13 Data / Commands multiplexing protocol

19.13.1 Introduction

The Wavecom multiplexing protocol operates between a DCE (Data Communication

Equipment: the product) and a DTE (Data Terminal Equipment). It allows a double session over a serial link interface: one for AT commands and one for DATA communications.

AT+WMUX=1 activates the Multiplexing Mode. With this mode, AT commands and DATA are encapsulated into packets. The header of these packets allows to recognize whether it is a

DATA packet or an AT command packet. AT+WMUX=0 deactivates the Multiplexing Mode and gets the product back to the default mode.

This appendix presents how the multiplexing mode handles the DATA and the AT commands flow. It also describes the format of DATA packets and AT command packets.

19.13.2 AT command packets

An AT command is encapsulated into a packet with a header which allows to separate it from DATA packets. This packet is formed by a header (3 bytes), the AT command itself and a checksum (1 byte):

B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0

Start pattern ➙ 0xAA

AT command length LSB

AT command pattern ➙ 0x1D

AT command

AT command length MSB

Checksum

The 3 bytes of the header are:

# the first byte (0xAA) is used to identify the packet,

# the second byte represents the 8 LSB (Low Significant Bits) bits of the length of the AT command,

# the third byte is made of 2 parts:

- the 3 LSB bits are the 3 MSB (Most Significant Bits) bits of the length of the AT command,

- the 5 MSB bits (0x1D which equals to 0xE8 with the 3 bits offset) are used to identify an

AT command.

The maximum length of an AT command could be 2047 bytes which is greater than all the existing AT commands.

The checksum is the addition (modulo 256) of all the transmitted bytes (header bytes and AT command bytes). confidential ©

Page: 429 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

19.13.3 Data packets

Like for AT commands, DATA are encapsulated into packets. These packets are composed of a header (3 bytes), the data bytes and the checksum (1 byte):

B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0

Start pattern ➙ 0xDD

Data packet length LSB

Data packet type

Data Bytes

Data packet length MSB

Checksum

The 3 bytes of the header are:

# the first byte (0xDD) used to identify the packet,

# the second byte represents the 8 LSB bits of the length of the data field,

# the last byte is made of 2 parts:

- the 3 LSB bits represent the 3 MSB bits of the length of the data field,

- the 5 MSB bits represent the packet type.

Data packets can have different values according to the type of packet:

# 0 – DATA packet: the packet contains the data to transmit on the radio link or received from the radio link,

# 1 – STATUS packet: the packet contains the status of SA, SB, X bits ( coding as follow:

1 ) and the break condition

SA SB X BRK RI Spare Spare Spare

- the length of data for the status packet is always equal to 1,

- whenever a status changes (except break), all the status bits are included,

- these bits are off by default (and therefore the bits DTR and RTS), so it is necessary to send a status packet to the target at the beginning of the multiplexing to start the transmission,

#

2 – READY packet: the packet indicates that the target is ready to receive data:

- no data are transmitted in this packet (so the length is null),

1 These status bits contain the V24 control information:

-

SA contains DTR (signal CT108 – from terminal to IWF) and DSR (signal CT107 – from terminal to IWF),

-

SB contains RTS (signal CT105 – from terminal to IWF) and DCD (signal CT109 – from IWF to terminal),

- X contains CTS (signal CT106).

For more information, refer to GSM 07.02 confidential ©

Page: 430 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

# 3 – BUSY packet: the packet indicates that the target is busy and can not receive data:

- like the ready packet, no data are transmitted,

# other values: currently, these values are not used (reserved for future enhancement).

The checksum is calculated like the AT command packet checksum (addition of all the transmitted bytes including the header bytes).

19.13.4 Examples

19.13.4.1 AT command and its answer

When there is no encapsulation the AT command transmitted on the serial link is like this (in

ASCII and hexadecimal): and the answer is like this:

With the encapsulation in the serial link, the packet transmitted is (in hexadecimal):

0xAA 0x04 0xE8 0x41 0x54 0x0D 0x0A 0x42 and the answer is like this:

0xAA 0x06 0xE8 0x0D 0x0A 0x4F 0x4B 0x0D 0x0A 0x60

19.13.4.2 Initialisation and Data packet

When the Multiplexing Mode is activated (+WMUX=1), the product sends 2 Data packets after the establishment of a DATA call (after the CONNECT xxxx message): 1 READY Packet and 1

STATUS Packet. To set the different signals to the right value, it is necessary to send a STATUS packet to the product.

Here are some examples of STATUS packets:

0xDD 0x01 0x08 0x40 0x26 %bit RTS is on to start a data call, all the bits should be on:

0xDD 0x01 0x08 0xC0 0xA6 %bits DTR and RTS are on

19.13.5 Restriction

The autobauding mode is not available when the Multiplexing Mode is activated: the serial link speed must be set to a fixed rate. confidential ©

Page: 431 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

19.14 CPHS Information field

CPHS Information

Signification

All information

CSP service activated and allocated

SST service activated and allocated

Mailbox Number service activated and allocated

Operator Name Shortform service activated and alloc.

Information Numbers service activated and allocated

Data field Bit Field

0 None

1

2

0

1

3 2

4 3

5 4

Voice Message Waiting indicator for Line 1

Voice Message Waiting indicator for Line 2

Data Message Waiting indicator

Fax Message Waiting indicator

Call Forward Activated indicator for Line 1

Call Forward Activated indicator for Line 2

Call Forward Activated indicator for Data

Call Forward Activated indicator for Fax

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

Line 1 Mailbox Number available

Line 2 Mailbox Number available

Data Mailbox Number available

Fax Mailbox Number available

EF Mn Updatable

21

22

23

24

25

20

21

22

23

24 confidential ©

Page: 432 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

19.15.1 Service Group: Call Offering

Service

Call Forwarding Unconditional

Call Forwarding On User Busy

External value

Call Forwarding on No Reply

Call Forwarding On User Not

Reachable

Call Transfer

1

2

3

4

5

19.15.2 Service Group: Call Restriction

Service External value

Barring of All Outgoing Calls

Barring of Outgoing International Calls

Barring of Outgoing International Calls except those directed to the Home PLMN country

Barring of All Incoming Calls when

Roaming Outside the Home PLMN country

BIC roam

9

10

11

12

13

19.15.3 Service Group: Other Supplementary Services

Service

Multi-Party Service

External value

17

Closed User Group

Advice Of Charge

Preferential CUG

CUG Outgoing

Access

18

19

20

21 confidential ©

Page: 433 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

19.15.4 Service Group: Group Completion


Call Hold

Call Waiting

25

26

Completion of Call to Busy Subscriber

Restriction of the menus allowing use of user to user signalling

27

28

19.15.5 Service Group: Teleservices

Service

Short Message – Mobile Terminated

Short Message – Mobile Originated

Short Message – Cell Broadcast

Restricts menu options for the ability to set reply path active on outgoing Short

Messages

External value

33

34

35

36

SMS Delivery Confirmation

Restriction of menus for SMS Protocol ID options

Validity Period, restriction of menus for

SMS Validity period options

37

38

39

19.15.6 Service Group: CPHS Teleservices

Service

Alternate Line

Service

External value

41

19.15.7 Service Group: CPHS Features

Service

Reserved: SST in phase 1

CPHS

External value

49 confidential ©

Page: 434 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

19.15.8 Service Group: Number Identification


Calling Line Identification Presentation

Connected Line Identification Restriction

57

59

Connected Line Identification

Presentation

60

Malicious Call Indicator

CLI per call mode – default block CLI – menu to send CLI

CLI per call mode – default send CLI – menu to block CLI

61

63

64

19.15.9 Service Group: Phase 2+ Services

Service

Menus concerned with GPRS functionality

Menus concerned with High Speed Circuit

Switched Data functionality

ASCI Voice Group call menus

External value

65

66

67

ASCI Voice Broadcast service menus

Multi Subscriber profile menus

Multiple band: Restriction of menus allowing user to select a particular GSM

900/ 1800 or 1900 band

68

69

70 confidential ©

Page: 435 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

19.15.10 Service Group: Value Added Services


73 Restriction of menu options for manual

PLMN selection

Restriction of menu options for Voice

Mail or other similar menus

74

75 Restriction of menu options for the ability to send Short messages with type Paging

Restriction of menu options for the ability to send Short messages with type Email

Restriction of menu options for Fax calls

Restriction of menu options for Data calls

Restriction of menus allowing the user to change language

76

77

78

80

19.15.11 Service Group: Information Numbers


The ME shall only present Information numbers to the user if this field is set to FF

81

Note:

External values not used in these tables are reserved for further use. confidential ©

Page: 436 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

20 APPENDIX A (informative)

This chapter gives illustrative examples of the general AT commands used for a communication. The presentation of commands and responses is as close as possible to what a user can see on its test monitor. Blank lines have been intentionnaly removed.

20.1 Examples with the PIN required

20.1.1 when the ME has to be powered ON.

AT+CMEE=1 Enable the report mobile equipment errors

OK

AT+CREG=1 Report registration

OK

AT+CPAS

Query ME Status

+CPAS: 5

(ME is asleep)

OK

AT+CFUN=1

Set ME to full functionality

OK

AT+COPS=0 Ask for automatic operator selection and registration .

+CME ERROR: 11 SIM PIN required .

AT+CPIN=1234 User entered a wrong PIN

+CME ERROR: 16

Incorrect password

.

AT+CPIN=0000

OK

AT+COPS=0

OK

+CREG:1

AT+COPS=3,0

OK

PIN Ok

Ask for automatic operator selection and registration

Registered on the network

AT+COPS?

Get the operator name

+COPS: 0,0,”I OMNITEL”

OK

Select the long name alphanumeric format .

.

20.1.2 When the ME has already been powered on.

AT+CMEE=1 Enable the report mobile equipment errors

OK

AT+CPAS

+CPAS: 0

Get the ME Status

ME is ready to receive commands confidential ©

Page: 437 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

OK

AT+CPIN?

Is ME requiring a password?

+CPIN: SIM PIN Yes, SIM PIN required

AT+CPIN=0000

OK PIN Ok

20.2 Examples where a voice call is originated.

20.2.1 When the ME is powered on and the SIM PIN has been entered.

AT+CMEE=1 Enable the reporting of mobile equipment errors

OK

AT+WIND=63

OK

AT+CPIN?

Ask to display the general indications

Is ME requiring a password?

+CPIN: READY product is ready

.

ATD0607103543;

+WIND: 5,1

Make a voice call

Indication of call

+WIND: 2

OK

Conversation …

Remote party is ringing .

Call setup was successful

Release the call

ATH

OK

20.2.2 When a voice call is attempted from a phonebook:

ATD>”John Pamborn”;

+CME ERROR: 22

ATD>”Joel Guerry”;

+WIND: 5,1

+WIND: 2

OK

Conversation…

ATH

OK

The “John Pamborn” entry is not found.

Indication of outgoing call.

Remote party is ringing.


Release the call confidential ©

Page: 438 / 478



20.3 Example with incoming calls

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005


AT+CMEE=1

OK

Enable the report mobile equipment errors

AT+WIND=63


.

OK

AT+CLIP=1

OK

AT+CRC=1

OK

Enable the calling line identification presentation

Enable extended format of incoming indication .

AT+CNUM

Query own number (voice number) or MSISDN

+CNUM: “Speech”,”+33608971019”,145

.

.

OK

Call this number from another equipment.

+WIND: 5, 1

Indication of call (Ring)

+CRING: VOICE Type of call is VOICE .

+CLIP: “+33607103543”,145,,,”John Panborn”

ATA

+CRING: VOICE

Answer the call

.

OK

…Conversation…

NO CARRIER

+WIND: 6,1

Identification of the remote party

The call has been released by the remote party

.

Indication of call release

.

.

20.4 Example of a call forwarding


AT+CMEE=1

OK


AT+CCFC=1,3,”0607492638”

OK

Register to a call forwarding when ME is busy .

AT+CCFC=2,3,”0149293031”,129

+CME ERROR: 30

AT+CCFC=1,2

Register to a call forwarding when it does answer

.

No network service

Interrogate

+CCFC: 1,1,”+33607492638”,145

Call forwarding active for a voice call

. confidential ©

Page: 439 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

AT+CCFC=1,4

OK

Delete call forwarding ME busy

20.5 Example of a multiparty call

When the ME is powered on and the SIM PIN has been entered.

AT+CMEE=1


OK

AT+WIND=63


.

OK

AT+CCWA=1,1 Enable call waiting .

OK

ATD>”John Panborn”;

+WIND: 5,1

+WIND: 2

OK

…Conversation (call1)…

+WIND: 5,2

Indication of call

.

Remote party is ringing


.

Indication of another call

.

+CCWA: “+33595984834”,145,”Dolores Claiborne” Another call is waiting .

AT+CHLD=2 Put first call on hold and answer the second one .

OK


AT+CHLD=3

Every call is part of a multiparty conversation

.

OK

AT+CHLD=11

(with Dolores Claiborne

)

Release the first call (with John Panborn) and recover the second call


ATH Release the second call . confidential ©

Page: 440 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

20.6 Examples about phonebooks

For each example illustrated in this section: the ME is supposed to have been powered on and the SIM PIN entered.

20.6.1 The whole phonebook of the ME is read

AT+CPBS=?

Query supported phonebook memories

+CPBS: (“SM”,”FD”,”ON”)

AT+CPBS=”SM”

ADN, FDN, and MSISDN phonebooks supported .

Select ADN phonebook .

OK

AT+CPBR=?

+CPBR: (1-80),20,14

AT+CPBR=1,80

Read the index range and the length of the elements

.

80 locations (from 1 to 80), max length of 20 for the phone number, 14 characters max for the text

.

Read all entries (only the ones set are returned).

+CPBR: 1,“0346572834”,129,”Dolores Claiborne”

+CPBR: 2,”1284374523”,129,”Thad Beaumont”

+CPBR: 3, “1243657845”,129,”John Panborn”

OK

20.6.2 Erase or Write a phonebook entry

AT+CPBW=? Get the phonebook type

+CPBW: (1-80),20,(129,145),14

.

80 locations, max length of 20 for the phone number,

TON/NPI of 129 or 145 and 14 characters max for the text.

AT+CPBW=3

Erase location 3

OK

AT+CPBW=3,”4356729012”,129,”Carry”

OK

AT+CPBR=1,80

Write at location 3

.

Read all entries (only the ones set are returned) .

+CPBR: 1,“0346572834”,129,”Dolores Claiborne”

+CPBR: 2,”1284374523”,129,”Thad Beaumont”

+CPBR: 3,”4356729012”,129,”Carry”

OK

AT+CPBF=?

+CPBF: 20,14

AT+CPBF=”D”

Get the phonebook type .

Max length of 20 for the phone number, 10 characters for the text.

Read entries starting with “D”.

+CPBF: 1,“0346572834”,129,”Dolores Clairborne”

OK confidential ©

Page: 441 / 478



AT+CPBF=”W”

+CME ERROR: 22

Read entries with “W”.

Entry not found

.

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008


Page: 442 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

20.6.4 Phonebook and custom character set

AT+CPBS?

+CPBS: 3,80

Query the current phonebook

ADN selected, 3 entries stored

OK

AT+WPCS?

Query the current phonebook charset

+WPCS: “TRANSPARENT”

Transparent mode selected

OK

AT+CPBR=1

+CPBR: 1,”0146290800”,129,”S bastien” GSM character “é” is not displayed

OK

AT+WCCS=1,0,0,255

>202020202020202020200A20200D202020202020205F202020202020202020202021

22230225262728292A2B2C2D2E2F303132333435363738393A3B3C3D3E3F00414243

4445464748494A4B4C4D4E4F505152535455565758595A2020202011206162636465

666768696A6B6C6D6E6F707172737475767778797A20202020202020202020202020

202020202020202020272720202020202020202020202020204020012403205F20202

020202D202020202020272020202020202020202060414141415B0E1C09451F454549

494949445D4F4F4F4F5C200B5555555E59201E7F6161617B0F1D63040565650769696

9207D086F6F6F7C200C0675757E792079

OK

AT+WCCS=1,1,0,127

>40A324A5E8E9F9ECF2C70AD8F80DC5E5205F20202020202020202020C6E6DFC9202

12223A425262728292A2B2C2D2E2F303132333435363738393A3B3C3D3E3FA141424

34445464748494A4B4C4D4E4F505152535455565758595AC4D6D1DCA7BF61626364

65666768696A6B6C6D6E6F707172737475767778797AE4F6F1FCE0

OK

AT+WPCS=”CUSTOM”

OK

Set the custom character set tables to enable a GSM to default font conversion

Use the custom character set

AT+CPBR=1

+CPBR: 1,”0146290800”,129,”Sébastien”

OK

GSM character “é” is correctly displayed confidential ©

Page: 443 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

20.7 Examples about short messages

20.7.1 Send a short message

AT+CNMI=0,1,1,1,0

SMS-DELIVERs are directly stored, SMS-STATUS- REPORTs displayed

OK

AT+CSMP=17,169,0,0

OK

SMS-SUBMIT message with a validity period (one day) are

Text mode to send a Short Message

OK

AT+CSCA=”+33608080706”

OK

AT+CMGS=0601290800

Set Service Center Address to +33608080706

This is the first text line

This is the last text line

+CMGS: 5

Send a SMS-SUBMIT to mobile phone

Product sends a 4 characters sequence: 0x0D 0x0A 0x3E 0x20

Edit first line and press carriage return (<CR>, 0x0D)

Edit last line and send message by pressing <ctrl-Z> (0x1A)

Success: message reference 5 is returned from the SMS Service

Center

+CDS: 2,5,”0601290800”,129,”99/05/01 14:15:10+04

” ” ” ” delivery received

Success: report of successful message

AT+CMGF=1

Text mode to read Short Messages

AT+CMGL=”ALL” List all stored messages

+CMGL: 1,”REC READ”,”+336290918”,,”99/05/01 14:15:10+04”

I will be late

This is the first message

+CMGL: 2,”REC UNREAD”,”+336290918”,,”99/05/01 14:19:44+04”

Traffic jam on Broadway

This is the second message

OK

Read the first message

+CMGR: ”REC READ”,”+336290918”,,”99/05/01 14:19:44+04”

OK

20.8 Examples about Fax class 2

The normal characters are DTE generated. The bold characters are modem generated. confidential ©

Page: 444 / 478



20.8.1 Send a fax class 2

AT+FCLASS=2

Select fax class 2

OK

AT+FLID=”LocalFax”

OK

ATD0601234567

Call establishment

+FCON

[+FCSI:”RemoteFax”]

Connection OK

+FDIS:0,3,0,2,0,0,0,0

OK

AT+FDT

Beginning of the data transfer

+FDCS:0,3,0,2,0,0,0,0

CONNECT

<0x11h>

Send carrier

First page data terminated by <0x10h><0x03h>

OK Page transmitted

AT+FET=0

+FPTS:1

Send another page

First page acquitted

OK

AT+FDT

CONNECT

<0x11h>

Send carrier

Second page data terminated by <0x10h><0x03h>

OK Page transmitted

AT+FET=2

+FPTS:1

No more page

First page acknowledged

+FHNG:0

Normal end of connection

OK

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008


Page: 445 / 478



20.8.2 Receive a fax class 2

AT+FCR=1

OK

AT+FLID=”LocalFax”

OK

RING

Incoming call

ATA Answer

+FCON Connection OK

[+FTSI:”RemoteFax”]

+FDCS:0,3,0,2,0,0,0,0

OK

AT+FDR

+FCFR

+FDCS:0,3,0,2,0,0,0,0

CONNECT

<0x12h> Receive page carrier

First page data terminated by

<0x10h><0x03h>

OK

+FPTS:1

Page received

First page acknowledged

+FET:0

To receive another page

AT+FDR

OK

+FDCS:0,3,0,2,0,0,0,0

CONNECT

<0x12h> Receive page carrier

Second page data terminated by

<0x10h><0x03h>

OK

+FPTS:1

Page received

Second page acknowledged

+FET:2 No more page to receive

OK

AT+FDR

+FHNG:0

OK

Normal end of connection

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008


Page: 446 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

20.9 +CSIM and +CRSM Examples

NOTE: if SIM answer is not specified in the following examples, it will mean that the answer will depend on the SIM content.

20.9.1 DF GSM selection and then status at+csim=14,”A0A40000027F20”

+CSIM=4,”9F16” at+csim=10,”A0F2000016”

+CSIM=48,”…”

20.9.2 DF Telecom selection and then status at+csim=14,”A0A40000027F10”

+CSIM=4,”9F16” at+csim=10,”A0F2000016”

+CSIM=48,”…”

20.9.3 EF ADN selection and then status

DF Telecom selection is mandatory just before the following AT commands. at+csim=14,”A0A40000026F3A”

+CSIM=4,”9F0F” at+csim=10,”A0C000000F”

+CSIM=34,”…”

Status – No File Id – without P1,P2, P3 at+crsm=242

Status – 6F3A (EF ADN) – without P1, P2, P3 at+crsm=242,28474

Status – 6F07 (EF IMSI) – without P1, P2, P3 confidential ©

Page: 447 / 478



at+crsm=242,28423

Status – 3F00 (MF) – without P1, P2, P3 at+crsm=242,16128

Status – 7F10 (DF Telecom) – without P1, P2, P3 at+crsm=242,32528

Status – 7F20 (DF Gsm) – without P1, P2, P3 at+crsm=242,32544

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Get Response – (EF ADN) – without P1, P2, P3 at+crsm=192,28474

Get Response – (EF IMSI) – without P1, P2, P3 at+crsm=192, 28423

Get Response – (MF) – without P1, P2, P3 at+crsm=192,16128

Get Response – (DF Telecom) – without P1, P2, P3 at+crsm=192,32528

Get Response – (DF Gsm) – without P1, P2, P3 at+crsm=192,32544

Get Response – 6F07 (EF IMSI) at+crsm=192, 28423,0,0,15

20.9.6 Read Record commands

Read Record – EF ADN (Pin Code validated) at+crsm=178,28474,1,4,28 confidential ©

Page: 448 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

21 APPENDIX B: Support of SIM ToolKit by the

M.E.

TABLE 1 – Support of SIM Toolkit classes

This has been extracted from the GSM Technical specification 11.14.

Command description

CALL CONTROL

CELL BROADCAST DOWNLOAD

DISPLAY TEXT

EVENT DOWNLOAD

- MT call

- Call connected

- Call disconnected

- Location status

- User activity

- Idle screen available

GET INKEY

GET INPUT

GET READER STATUS

MENU SELECTION

MO SHORT MESSAGE CONTROL

MORE TIME

PERFORM CARD APDU

PLAY TONE

POLLING OFF

POLL INTERVAL

POWER ON CARD

POWER OFF CARD

PROVIDE LOCAL INFORMATION

REFRESH

RUN AT COMMAND

SELECT ITEM

SEND SHORT MESSAGE

SEND SS

SEND USSD

SET UP CALL

SET UP EVENT LIST

SET UP IDLE MODE TEXT

SET UP MENU

SMS-PP DOWNLOAD

TIMER MANAGEMENT

TIMER EXPIRATION

Classes

$(MultipleCard)$

$(MultipleCard)$

$(MultipleCard)$

$(MultipleCard)$

$(AT$)

$(IdleModeText)$

$(Timer)$

X

$(Timer)$

X

1

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

2

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Lc

X

X

X

Lc

X

X

X

Lc

Lc

X

X

X

X

Lc

Lc

X

X

X

X

X

Lc

X

X

X

X

X

3

X

X

X confidential ©

Page: 449 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

TABLE 2 - Compatibility between available Terminal Responses and Proactive Commands

Terminal

Reponses

Setup

Menu

(0)

Display

Text(1)

Get

Inkey

(2)

Get

Input

(3)

Setup

Call

(4)

Play

Tone

(5)

Select

Item

(6)

Refresh

(7)

Send

SS

(8)

Send

SMS

(9)

Send

USSD

(10)

Setup event list

(11)

Backwar d Move

(95)

Command beyond ME capabilities

(96)

•

•

•

•

•

•

• • •

•

• • • • • •

ME currently unable to process

• command

(97)

No response from the user

(98)

SIM session terminated by the user

(99)

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

• • • • • confidential ©

Page: 450 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

APPENDIX C: Structure of TERMINAL

PROFILE

First byte (Download): b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1

Profile download

User choice

SMS-PP data download

Set by product to 1

Cell Broadcast download data

Set by product to 1

Menu selection

User choice

‘9E XX’ response code for

SIM data download error

Set by product to 1

Timer expiration Set by product to 0

USSD string data object supported in Call Control

User choice

Second byte (Other):

RFU, bit=0 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1

Command result

Call Control by SIM

User choice

User choice

Cell identity included in

Call Control by SIM

User choice

MO short message control by SIM

User choice

Handling of the alpha identifier according to subclause 9.1.3

User choice

UCS2 Entry supported

User choice

UCS2 Display supported

User choice

Display of the extension text

User choice confidential ©

Page: 451 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Third byte (Proactive SIM): b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1

Proactive SIM: DISPLAY

TEXT

User choice

Proactive SIM: GET INKEY User choice

Proactive SIM: GET INPUT

User choice

Proactive SIM: MORE

TIME

User choice

Proactive SIM: PLAY

TONE

User choice

Proactive SIM: POLL

INTERVAL

Set by product to

1

Proactive SIM: POLLING

OFF

Set by product to

1

Proactive SIM: REFRESH

User choice

Fourth byte (Proactive SIM): b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1

Proactive SIM: SELECT

ITEM

User choice

Proactive SIM: SEND

SHORT MESSAGE

User choice

Proactive SIM: SEND SS

User choice

Proactive SIM: SEND

USSD

User choice

Proactive SIM: SET UP

CALL

User choice

Proactive SIM: SET UP

MENU

User choice

Proactive SIM: PROVIDE

LOCAL INFORMATION

(MCC, MNC, LAC, Cell ID

& IMEI)

Set by product to

1


LOCAL INFORMATION

(NMR)

Set by product to

1 confidential ©

Page: 452 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Fifth byte (Event driven information): b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1

Proactive SIM: SET UP EVENT

LIST

Set by product to

1

Event: MT call Set by product to

1

Event: Call connected

Event: Call disconnected

Event: Location status

Set by product to

1

Set by product to

1

Set by product to

1

Event: User activity

User choice

Event: Idle screen available

User choice

Event: Card reader status

Set by product to

0

Sixth byte: (reserved for Event driven information extensions) b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1

RFU, bit = 0

Seventh byte (Multiple card proactive commands) for class “a” b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1

Proactive SIM: POWER ON

CARD

Set by product to

0

Proactive SIM: POWER OFF

CARD

Set by product to

0

Proactive SIM: PERFORM

CARD APDU

Set by product to

0

Proactive SIM: GET READER

STATUS

Set by product to

0

RFU, bit = 0

Set by product to

0 confidential ©

Page: 453 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Eighth byte (Proactive SIM): b

8 b

7 b

6 b

5 b

4 b

3 b

2 b

1

Proactive SIM: TIMER

MANAGEMENT (start, stop)

Set by product to

1

Proactive SIM: TIMER

MANAGEMENT (get current value)

Set by product to

1


LOCAL INFORMATION

(date, time and time zone)

Set by product to

0

Binary choice in GET

INKEY

Set by product to

0

Set by product to

0

RUN AT COMMAND (e.g.. class “b” is supported)

Set by product to

0

2 nd alpha identifier in SET

UP CALL

Set by product to

0

2 nd

capability configuration parameter

(see 9.1.6)

Set by product to

0

Ninth byte: b

8 b

7 b

6 b

5 b

4 b

3 b

2 b

1

Sustained DISPLAY TEXT

(see 6.4.1)

Set by product to

0

SEND DTMF command

(see 6.4.24)

Set by product to

0

RFU, bit = 0

RFU, bit = 0

RFU, bit = 0

RFU, bit = 0

RFU, bit = 0

RFU, bit = 0

Subsequent bytes: b

8 b

7 b

6 b

5 b

4 b

3 b

2 b

1

RFU, bit = 0 confidential ©

Page: 454 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Information about BCCH channel list

(this is an extract of GSM Rec 11.14)

Byte(s) Description

1

2

BCCH channel list tag

Length (X) of bytes following

3 to X+2 BCCH channel list

Length

1

1

X

- BCCH channel list

Contents: the list of absolute RF channels for BCCH carriers, as known by the

ME from the SYSTEM INFORMATION messages. The BCCH channel list is composed of one to three BCCH channel sub lists, each sub list is derived from the set of frequencies defined by reference neighbour cells description information element or elements. In the latter case the set is the union of the different subsets defined by the neighbour cells description information elements (see TS 04.08 [8]). The length of the BCCH channel list field depends on the length of the received BCCH channel list derived from the different

SYSTEM INFORMATION messages to be considered.

Coding: Each ARFCN

(Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number) is represented by 10 bits. Spare bit(s) are to be filled with 0.

Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1

Byte 1 ARFCN#1 (high part)

Byte 2 ARFCN#1 (low part)

ARFCN#2 (high part)

ARFCN#3 (high part) Byte 3 ARFCN#2 (low part)

… …

Byte X-

1

ARFCN#m-1 (low part)

Byte X ARFCN#m (low part)

ARFCN#m (high part)

Spare bit (0)

Spare bit(0)

SIM applications should take into account that early implementations of SIM application toolkit may have coded this field differently, because of an inconsistancy between the content and the coding of this element in previous versions of 11.14. The SIM is able to identify MEs that are using the coding confidential ©

Page: 455 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005 described above by evaluating the indication “BCCH Channel List coding” in the TERMINAL PROFILE command. confidential ©

Page: 456 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

‘28’

‘30’

‘31’

‘32’

‘33’

‘34’

‘81’

APPENDIX D: Command Type and Next

Action Indicator.

This table has been extracted from the GSM Technical specification 11.14.

Value Name

‘00’

‘01’ REFRESH

‘05’

‘10’

SET UP EVENT LIST

SET UP CALL

SET UP IDLE MODEL TEXT

PERFORM CARD APDU

POWER ON CARD

POWER OFF CARD

GET READER STATUS

RUN AT COMMAND

End of the proactive session

Used for Type of

Command coding used for Next Action

Indicator coding

-

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X class “a” only X class “a” only X class “a” only X

X

X

X

X

X class “a” only X class “b” only X not applicable

-

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X confidential ©

Page: 457 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

24 APPENDIX E: Coding of Alpha fields in the

SIM for UCS2

The coding can take one of the three following structures, or GSM default alphabet. If the ME supports UCS2 coding of alpha fields in the SIM, it will support all three coding schemes for character sets containing 128 characters or less. For character sets containing more than 128 characters, the ME will at least support the first coding scheme. Within a record, only one coding scheme, either GSM default alphabet, or one of the three described below, can be used. the

The most significant byte (MSB) of the UCS2 character is coded in the lower numbered byte of the alpha field, and the less significant byte (LSB) of the UCS2 character is coded in the higher numbered alpha field byte. In other words, byte 2 of the alpha field contains the most significant byte (MSB) of the first UCS2 character, and byte 3 of the alpha field contains the less significant byte (LSB) of the first UCS2 character (as shown below). Unused bytes shall be set to ‘FF’: if the alpha field has an even length in bytes, the last (unusable) byte will be set to ‘FF’.

Example 1

Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9

‘80’ Ch1

MSB

Ch1

LSB

Ch2

MSB

Ch2

LSB

Ch3

MSB

Ch3

LSB

‘FF’ ‘FF’

2) If the first byte of the alpha string is ‘0x81’, then the 2 the number of characters in the string.The 3 rd nd byte contains a value indicating

byte contains an 8 bit number which defines bits 15 to 8 of a 16 bit base pointer, where bit 16, and bits 7 to 1 would be set to zero.

These sixteen bits represent a base pointer to a “half-page” in the UCS2 code space, to be used with some or all of the remaining bytes in the string. The 4 th

and subsequent bytes in the string contain codings as follows:

• if bit 8 of the byte is set to zero, the remaining bits of the byte contain a GSM

Default Alphabet character

• if bit 8 of the byte is set to one, the remaining bits are an offset value to add to the

16 bit base pointer defined by byte 3, and the resulting 16 bit value is a UCS2 code point, and defines a UCS2 character.

Example 2


‘81’ ‘05’ ‘13’ ‘53’ ‘95’ ‘A6’ ‘28’ ‘FF’ ‘FF’

In the example above;

•

Byte 2 indicates there are 5 characters in the string

•

Byte 3 indicates bits 15 to 8 of the base pointer, and indicates a bit pattern of

0hhh hhhh h000 0000 as the 16 bit base pointer number. Bengali characters for example start at code position 0980 (0 000 1001 1 000 0000), which is indicated by the coding ‘13’ in byte 3 (shown by the italicised underlined digits).

• Byte 4 indicates GSM Default Alphabet character ‘53’, e.g.. “S”.

• Byte 5 indicates a UCS2 character offset to the base pointer of ‘15’, expressed in binary as follows 001 0101, which, when added to the base pointer value results in a sixteen bit value of 0000 1001 1001 0101, e.g.. ‘0995’, which is the Bengali letter KA.

• Byte 8 contains the value ‘FF’: as the string length is 5, this a valid character in the string, where the bit pattern 111 1111 is added to the base pointer, yielding to a sixteen bit value of 0000 1001 1111 1111 for the UCS2 character (that is ‘09FF’). confidential ©

Page: 458 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

•

Byte 9 contains the padding value OxFF.

3) If the first byte of the alpha string is set to ‘0x82’, then the 2 nd

byte contains the length of the string (number of characters).

The 3

The 5 rd th

and 4 th bytes contain a 16 bit number which defines the complete 16 bit base pointer to a “half-page” in the UCS2 code space, for use with some or all of the remaining bytes in the string.

and subsequent bytes in the string contain coding as follows:

• if bit 8 of the byte is set to zero, the remaining seven bits of the byte contain a

GSM Default Alphabet character,

• if bit 8 of the byte is set to one, the remaining seven bits are an offset value added to the base pointer defined in bytes 3 and 4, and the resulting 16 bit value is a

UCS2 code point, and defines a UCS2 character.

Example 3


‘82’ ‘05’ ‘05’ ‘30’ ‘2D’ ‘82’ ‘D3’ ‘2D’ ‘31’

In the example above:

• Byte 2 indicates there are 5 characters in the string

• Bytes 3 and 4 contain a 16 bit base pointer number of ‘0530’, pointing to the first character of the Armenian character set.

• Byte 5 contains a GSM Default Alphabet character of ‘2D’, which is a dash “-“.

•

Byte 6 contains a value ‘82’, which indicates it is an offset of ‘02’ added to the base pointer, resulting in a UCS2 character code of ‘0532’, which represents Armenian character Capital BEN.

• Byte 7 contains a value ‘D3’, an offset of ‘53’, which when added to the base pointer results in a UCS2 code point of ‘0583’, representing Armenian Character small PIWR. confidential ©

Page: 459 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

25 APPENDIX F: Specification of Power Down

Control via RS232

This appendix describes how to activate and deactivate the power down mode of the product via the RS232 serial link. Refer to +W32K to activate or deactivate the power down mode.

In this document, the term “DTE” refers to the customer device driving the product, which is referred to as the “DCE”.

The terms referring to the RS232 signals and levels are used according to the

V.24 and V.28 recommendations. Here are some points to remind:

• DTR is the circuit 108/2,

• TX is the circuit 103,

• RX is the circuit 102,

• CTS is the circuit 106.

• The logical level “HIGH or ON” corresponds to the electrical level of +12

V, and the level “LOW or OFF” corresponds to –12 V.

• The activation and deactivation are always initiated from the DTE and is carried out through the handshaking of DTR and CTS.

The power down mode can be triggered only when the DCE is idle, that means when there is no connection to the network in progress.

When the DTE requests the DCE to enter the power down mode, it (DTE) drops

(ON-to-OFF transition) DTR. From this time on, it (DTE) must not send any more characters on the TX line: the TX FIFO must be empty.

The DCE acknowledges its entry in the power down mode by dropping CTS, within a time interval of 5s. after the DTR drop. During that period the DTE is prohibited from sending any more AT commands.

AT responses can be sent to the DTE even if the DCE is in power down mode: for this, it (DCE) suspends its power down mode, sends the resquested AT response and recovers the power down mode. Therefore the DTE can trigger

DCE power down mode without having to take care of any AT responses

The DCE exits the power down mode by raising the DTR. DCE is not ready to receive further AT commands until it raises in turn CTS, within a time interval of 2s. after the DTR raise. confidential ©

Page: 460 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Here below is a diagram depicting the handshaking:

DTR

2 6

CTS

4 7

TX

RX

XXXX

1

XXXX

3

XXXX

5

XXXX

8

XXXX

9

Description of the steps:

1: the DTE sends an AT command

2: the DTE drops DTR to make the DCE enter the power down mode. Warning: this mode will not really enter until CTS is dropped (step 4). The DTE could also have dropped DTR after having received the AT response (step 3).

3: the DCE sends back the AT response (if any)

4: the DCE drops CTS: it enters the power down mode.

5: the DCE sends back an unsolicited response (for instance a RING or +SMTI

(incoming SMS indication))

6: the DTE wants to reply to that unsolicited response so it raises the DTR, causing the DCE to exit the power down mode.

7: the DCE acknowledges the exit of the power down mode by raising CTS.

8) & 9) exchange of AT commands/responses.

Note 1): The DTE must not send any AT commands from steps 2 to 7.

Note 2): During the latency period (between steps 2 and 4) should the DTE want to abort the power down mode, it raises DTR and should wait for 150µs before assessing CTS. If CTS is still high than the DCE has aborted the power down mode and is ready to receive AT commands.

The 150µs wait should get around the race condition between DTR raise and

CTS drop.

Warning: The diagram above is V.28 compliant (PC interface), meaning the

HIGH level corresponds to +12V, and the LOW level to –12V.

confidential ©

Page: 461 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

APPENDIX G: Conditions for command execution and dependence to SIM

These arrays list all the AT command. For each, a column indicates the command execution condition (if +WIND:4 must have occurred OK, for example). SIM dependency column indicates if the command behaviour will vary if another card is used (for example, it will be the case for phonebook reading commands). The Intermediate column indicates if intermediate responses can occur for the considered command.

AT commands Conditions

AT+CGMI None

AT+CGMM None

AT+CGMR None

AT+CGSN None

AT+GCAP None

A/ Depends on previous command

AT+CPOF +WIND: 3 without SIM,

+WIND: 1 with SIM

AT+CFUN None

AT+CPAS None

AT+CMEE None

AT+CKPD Depends of the sequence used

AT+CALA None

AT+CRMP None

AT+CRSL None

SIM dependence

N

N

N

N

Intermediate

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N N

Depends on prev. command

N

N N

N

N

N

Y/N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

N confidential ©

Page: 462 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

26.2 Call Control commands


ATD Depends of sequence used

ATH None

ATA None

AT+VTD None

AT+VTS +WIND:5

ATDL None

AT%D None

ATS0 None

AT+CICB None

AT+CSNS None

AT+VGR None

AT+VGT None

AT+CMUT None

AT+SPEAKER None

AT+ECHO None

AT+SIDET None

AT+VIP None

SIM dependence Intermediate

Y/N Y

N N

N N

Y N

N

N

N

N

N Y

N N

N N

N N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N N

26.3 Network service commands


AT+CSQ None

AT+CREG None

AT+WOPN None

AT+CPLS PIN

SIM dependence

N

Y

N

N

Y

Y

N

Intermediate

N

N

Y

N

N

Y

N confidential ©

Page: 463 / 478



AT commands

AT+CPIN2

Conditions after PIN entered

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

SIM dependence

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Intermediate

N

N

N

N

N


AT+WAIP None

SIM dependence

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

Intermediate

N

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

26.6 Short Messages commands


AT+CMGF none

AT+CSAS

AT+CRES

SIM dependence

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Intermediate

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

N confidential ©

Page: 464 / 478




AT+CMMS +WIND:4

AT+CSCA

AT+WUSS None

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

SIM dependence

Y

Yes

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Intermediate

Y

No

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

N

26.7 Supplementary Services commands


AT+CLCC None

AT+CSSN None

AT+CUSD None

SIM dependence

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

Intermediate

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y confidential ©

Page: 465 / 478




AT+CBST None

AT+FCLASS None

AT+CR None

AT+CRC None

AT+CRLP None

AT+DOPT None

AT%C None

AT+DS None

AT+DR None

\N None

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

SIM dependence Intermediate

N

N

N

N

N N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N N

N N

N N


AT+FTM None

AT+FRM None

AT+FTH None

AT+FRH None

AT+FTS None

AT+FRS None

SIM dependence

N

N

N

N

N

N

Intermediate

N

N

N

N

N

N


AT+FDT None

AT+FDR None

AT+FET None

AT+FPTS None

AT+FK None

AT+FBOR None

AT+FBUF None

SIM dependence

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Intermediate

N

N

N

N

N

N

N confidential ©

Page: 466 / 478




AT+FCQ None

AT+FCR None

AT+FDIS None

AT+FDCC None

AT+FLID None

AT+FPHCTO None

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

SIM dependence

N

N

N

N

N

N

Intermediate

N

N

N

N

N

N


AT+IPR None

AT+ICF None

AT+IFC None

AT&C None

AT&D None

AT&S None

ATQ None

ATV None

ATZ None

AT&W None

AT&T None

ATE None

AT&F None

AT&V None

ATI None

AT+WMUX None

SIM dependence

N

N

Intermediate

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N N

N N

N N

N N

N

N

N

N

N N

N N

N N

N N

N N confidential ©

Page: 467 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

26.12 Specific AT commands


AT+CCED None

AT+WIND None

AT+ADC None

AT+CMER None

AT+CIND None

AT+CMEC None

AT+WIOR None

AT+WIOW None

AT+WIOM None

AT+WAC None

AT+WTONE None

AT+WDTMF None

AT+WDWL None

AT+WVR None

AT+WDR None

AT+WHWV None

AT+WDOP None

AT+WSVG None

AT+WSTR None

AT+WSCAN None

AT+WRIM None

AT+W32K None

AT+WCDM None

AT+WSSW None

AT+WLCK None (PIN for auto CNL)

AT+WBCM None

AT+WFM None

AT+WCFM None

AT+WMIR None

AT+WCDP None

AT+WMBN PIN

SIM dependence

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N (Y for auto CNL)

Y

N

N

N

N

N

Y confidential ©

Page: 468 / 478



Intermediate

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N


AT+WALS +WIND:4

AT+WOPEN None

AT+WRST None

AT+WSST None

AT+WBR None

AT+WBW None

AT+WBM None

AT+WATH None

AT+WIMEI None

AT+WSVN None

AT+WMBS None

AT+WMBS None

AT+WBHV None

AT+WSHS None

26.13 SIM Toolkit commands


AT+STSF None

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

SIM dependence

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

N

Intermediate

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

SIM dependence

N

Y

Y

Y

Intermediate

N

N

N

N


AT+CGDCONT +WIND:4

AT+CGQREQ +WIND:4

AT+CGQMIN +WIND:4

AT+CGATT +WIND:4

AT+CGACT +WIND:4

AT+CGDATA +WIND:4

AT+CGCLASS +WIND:3

AT+CGCLASS +WIND:4

SIM dependence

N

Intermediate

N confidential ©

Page: 469 / 478




AT+CGSMS +WIND:4

AT+CGREP +WIND:4

AT+CGREG +WIND:4

AT+CGAUTO +WIND:4

AT+CGANS +WIND:4

AT+CGADDR +WIND:4

AT+WGPRS +WIND:4

WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

SIM dependence Intermediate confidential ©

Page: 470 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

APPENDIX H: Interoperability commands always reply OK

All the commands listed below are only used for interoperability with other applications. They have no action and always reply OK.

Command Responses

ATB OK

ATC OK

ATG OK

ATL OK

ATM OK

ATN OK

ATP OK

ATT OK

ATW OK

ATX OK

ATY OK

AT\K OK

AT&E OK

AT&G OK

AT&K OK

AT&P OK

AT&Q OK

AT&R OK

AT&Y OK

AT+GOI OK

AT+GCI OK confidential ©

Page: 471 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

28 Alphabetical Index for AT commands and responses

AT command / response Type of Command Paragraph Nb

& C V24-V25

& D V24-V25

& F V24-V25

& S V24-V25

& T V24-V25

& V V24-V25

& W V24-V25

+CBST Data 11.2

+CEER Call Control, GPRS 5.5, 17.18

+CFUN

General

4.12

+CGACT GPRS 17.5

+CGANS GPRS 17.14

+CGATT GPRS 17.4

+CGAUTO GPRS 17.13

+CGCLASS GPRS 17.7

+CGDATA GPRS 17.6 confidential ©

Page: 472 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

AT command / response Type of Command

+CGDCONT GPRS

Paragraph Nb

17.1

+CGEREP GPRS 17.9

11 February 2005

+CGMM General 4.2

+CGPADDR GPRS 17.15

+CGQMIN GPRS 17.3

+CGQREQ GPRS

17.2

+CGREG GPRS 17.10

+CGSMS GPRS 17.8

Supplementary services 10.2

+CNMI Short 9.9 confidential ©

Page: 473 / 478




WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Paragraph Nb

Supplementary services

10.3

GPRS

GPRS

17.17

17.16

+CRES Short

9.7

+CRLP Data 11.7

+CSAS Short

9.6

+CSCA Short

9.17

+CSCB Short

9.18

confidential ©

Page: 474 / 478




WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Paragraph Nb

+DOPT Data 11.8

+FBOR Class

13.6

+FBUF Class

13.7

+FCLASS Data 11.3

+FCFR Class 13.14

+FDCC Class

13.11

+FDCS Class

13.14

+FET

+FPTS

Class 2

Class 2

13.3, 13.14

13.4, 13.14

+FRH Fax 12.4

+FRM Fax 12.2

+FRS Fax 12.6

+FTH Fax 12.3

confidential ©

Page: 475 / 478



WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

AT command / response Type of Command Paragraph Nb

+FTM Fax 12.1

+FTS Fax 12.5

+ILRR Data 11.6

toolkit

(unsolicited.response) 16.3.4

+WBCM Specific 15.35

+WCDM Specific 15.25 confidential ©

Page: 476 / 478




WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Paragraph Nb

+WCTM Specific 15.55

+WDTMF Specific 15.14

+WDWL Specific 15.15

+WGPRS GPRS 17.19

+WHCNF Specific 15.57

+WHWV Specific 15.18

+WMBN Specific 15.41

+WMBS Specific 15.53

+WMSN Specific 15.54

+WNON Specific 15.32

+WOPEN Specific 15.43

+WSCAN Specific 15.22 confidential ©

Page: 477 / 478




WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_010

-

008

11 February 2005

Paragraph Nb

+WSSW Specific 15.26

+WTONE Specific 15.13

GPRS

GPRS

GPRS

GPRS

17.12.2

17.11

17.12.3

5.9

17.12.1

confidential ©

Page: 478 / 478



plaquette MUSE AT 3/11/03 15:38 Page 1

WAVECOM S.A. - 3, esplanade du Foncet - 92442 Issy-les-Moulineaux Cedex - France - Tel: +33 (0)1 46 29 08 00 - Fax: +33 (0)1 46 29 08 08

WAVECOM, Inc. - 4810 Eastgate Mall - Second Floor - San Diego, CA 92121 - USA - Tel: +1 858 362 0101 - Fax: +1 858 558 5485

WAVECOM Asia Pacific Ltd. - 5/F, Shui On Centre - 6/8 Harbour Road - Hong Kong, PRC - Tel: +852 2824 0254 - Fax: +852 2824 0255

www.wavecom.com